Home

U ser M anual

1. 84 Deterioration Famliligs onerat 84 Family eri cette E tiere 84 Create Condition 6 Condition Analysis Parameters Viewing The Condition Analysis Report Open Saved Condition 90 12 M amp R Family Assignment 0 Assign Familles cdi tide p it HERR d tis eruit E 92 5510 IE 92 13 M amp R Plan Create A M amp R Plan OverVIeW nece Tab 1 Plan Tab 2 Tab 3 M amp R Categories Tab 4 Families Tab 5 Project Planning Analyzing M amp R Activity vii Open A Saved Plan 104 Required Work Planner 104 14 GIS Tool Shapefile Creation 106 Shiapefile CreatlQI eene tentes ER Wee Y PA RUIN POR EYE 106 Shapefile ModifiCatiOl herein 106 BIS idola E EDD 108 PAVER Shapefile 108 GIS Assignm
2. 132 PAVER Shapefile 132 Converting From PAVER AX tO tonc iota ria reae 132 Shapefile Conversion 132 Appendix Inspection Information File Format Standard And Extended FOMI lS LO 135 07 AC Or GR And 10 Card Format 135 08 AC Or GR And 11 Card 135 Appendix BA A hA A XML Inspection Data Import Format 137 File Specifications for XML Interface to PAVER 137 Video Inspection Import Data Format ASCII Text 140 File Specifications For PClVideo Interface To 140 Example User IMtentaCes s a etes eee e vues eet rene eus 140 PCIVid oOpDtlODS Xt sre corr rto e rete 141 PClIVideolitispectlOEWtxL 141 5 cas 142 ONE ERU VEN G eu ERE 142 14
3. 67 Open Saved Inspection Schedule es 69 8 Reports O o aummary De MD dai uM REM dd 71 Standard essensa a 71 User defined 73 Display A Mernorized Report 73 Create NEW 73 Edit Current RE POM sees 74 GIS lee 74 Innes 75 PGI 76 Assignment Of PCI Deterioration And M amp R 77 9C jiti Predicti Model Create And Maintain Prediction 8 79 Building Family Models 79 Using The Prediction Model retener ente rti rne on v e 79 COMN CE MOG ESN bi 80 REVIEW Model Datel 80 Use rrt ete rre e a eR are eaa ee RR 80 OPTIONS o 81 View Equation And Stats 82 55 82 Other Condition Prediction Model Features 82 ASSIGN PCI Deterioration
4. M 289 Ico 289 Hints amp Solution Guide 15 eA 290 xii 1 Overview System 2 Recommended Hardware ettet tetro dte re ane eee an enn doe 2 Updating To PAVER 6 PAVEH 6 5 Activation 5 Automated Web Activation Manual Web Activation ACtivatin ERREUR PRONE ACH ATION Activation cts coca sles Eaa 7 Activation Fale diass eisian istae edere ci aae 7 7 PAVER B dd M MP M M 8 PAVER aeia 8 PAVER 6 Improvements New 9 What s New iti VERSION 6 5 2 ur eeu uie iv i redde a bv ds 12 m S 13 System Requirements Recommended Hardware Processor Speed 1 GHz or faster Memory 2 GB RAM Updating To PAVER 6 For PAVER 5 x users the conversion to PAVER 6 is an easy procedure Once the PAVERTM 6 pro
5. 81 View Equation Arid Stats iet rante irent a 82 Assign Family sss ravens REED 82 Other Condition Prediction Model Features 82 Create And Maintain Prediction Models Building Family Models The prediction modeling family modeling process identify s and groups pavements of similar construction that are subjected to similar traffic patterns weather and other factors that affect pavement life The historical data on pavement condition can be used to build a model which can accurately predict the future performance of a group of pavements with similar attributes In this model of a pavement s life is referred to as a family Each pavement section is assigned a family When predictions about the future performance of a pavement are desired its family model is used to predict its future condition If the user has not assigned a family model to a section its default family 15 used to predict future pavement performance Assigning sections to a PCI deterioration Family is discussed in Chapter 10 Condition Model Family Assignment Factors such as original construction maintenance weather and traffic greatly affect the life of a pavement generic guess or assignment to the default family is not likely to be as accurate as a model that takes
6. 28 Edit Inventory 9 30 M amp R Plan Tables And 21 Localized Stopgap M amp R Tables And Families sees 31 Localized Preventative M amp R Tables And Families eese 32 Global Preventative M amp R Tables And Families 33 Major M amp R Tables And Families 34 Priority Arles 34 Layer Types And COSS iieri reri ENTRA RE EE er eb YARIS 35 mem 35 Condition Select Condition Ty DOS ER EGER XR Define Condition And Age Categories Define User Distress ndiCes erret tiere teet nte ter Miscellaneous Other 1 Aircraft Layer CONStIUCE Unit Of Measure Field 4 Database Tools Combine Subset 1 1 8868 40 IM Or oera 41 6 5 Export Procedure Pepe 41 6 Import PHOCE MUNG PTT EET 42 Create PAVER Inventory From Shape Data 11121 43
7. 5 Phone EUH Maes DERE E OCURRE E E E EE ERO EE REED RR ENT 6 Activation 7 Activation Failed Deactivate a License PAVER STI RICO Introduction To PAVER PAVER 6 Improvements New Features What s New in Version 6 5 2 esee Organization 2 User Interface Basies ee eee ees 16 Spreadsheet FOrtms 16 NOX Cat P 16 17 Printing Screem Iml ges o REI 17 18 Adjusting Table And Graph 5 18 RIGHT Dutton drm 18 20 kan 20 I 24 Edit Image Paths n ke 25 System Tables diee mem HMM M 27 NSORT BSORT 550 E RONDE RE AES De REUS Reo E 27 Customize NSort BSort And SSort 5 28 Additional User Fields eese eret sisser sain
8. SANA SA desee 212 5 62 212 Hints amp Solution Guides For Workshop 4 213 Workshop 5 Database Management Import Export 224 elanlj 224 224 224 Hints amp Solution Guides Workshop 5 ret teen rete tre 225 Workshop 6 a Database Management Combine 231 el t 231 231 IPs I 231 Hints amp Solution Guide For Workshop 6 a ete tet eee 232 Workshop 6 b Database Management Subset 235 235 235 235 Hints amp Solution Guide For Workshop 6 236 Workshop 7 Database Verification Tools 239 Objective Database Workshop 8 Review Creation O
9. om Total Funded Tabl Datel Gap Funded Preventive Funded Global Funded Major Under Funded Major Above Crical Funded Layer Constuct Funded Total gt 67172010 3130 576 83 19 154 60 0 00 35 973 568 12 30 00 0 00 5 123 299 55 Total Funded Plot 6 1 2011 140 866 46 24 380 59 0 00 5 954 751 62 0 00 0 00 6 119 398 67 6 1 2012 70 958 21 29 751 23 30 00 3 554 894 93 0 00 0 00 33 655 604 37 67172013 1 220 99 14 288 71 0 00 36 065 306 55 30 00 0 00 36 080 816 24 8 1 2014 0 00 25 595 61 0 00 536 696 11 0 00 0 00 3562 291 71 6 17 2015 T 38 956 31 X 0 00 0 00 0 00 38 956 31 67172016 T 53 398 38 X 0 00 0 00 0 00 6 1 2017 si 77 50 00 0 00 0 00 Cr ms 2671720181 86 0 00 0 00 0 00 vao Gia 87172019 123 987 55 117 762 81 0 00 0 00 241 750 36 Date Workshops 293 Total Funded Plot 8000000 5000000 4000000 2000000 o 6 1 2010 6 1 2012 6 1 2014 5 1 2016 6 1 2018 6 1 2011 6 1 2013 6 1 2015 6 1 2017 6 1 2019 Date Total Unfunded Plot 2000000 1500000 Unfunded 1000000 500000 6 1 2010 6 1 2012 6 1 2014 6 1 2016 6 1 2018 6 1 2011 6 1 2013 6 1 2015 6 1 2017 6 1 2019 Date Total 2010 2011 2015 Expenditure 614253
10. Added Imported Networks Branches 50 Sections 83 Click Import to create a new database ae Branch Summary iloumatinn Chapter 4 Database Tools 46 5 inventory Inventory Definitio odd p nil n phu dud inti 48 Basic T 48 Creating 49 Creating eta a n de des e 49 Conditions Families sees etos o ERE TOEROIO M 53 Virt al 54 And Move 55 Data Vermearnonm ideni a ko app cisci enel i npa tti tp pin 56 EMS Image VieWe 57 St re ANIMAJ nc 57 nrbe P 58 sedent M 58 Other Image NER esedendvante 59 Inventory Definition Basic Operations The Inventory button provides tools to view edit and define pavement networks Clicking on the Inventory button opens two windows List Selector and inventory data The List Selector is a series of drop down boxes that allow you to navigate to a specific point in the inventory Select the particular inventory item by working down the hierarchy of the database fr
11. Llear Llear ue Liear tument View Text 5 virtual Inventory Management Virtual Inventory Name Roads and Parking VI vi New Delete Rename Close Aggregation eset v EdtAggegaton Rule Sets Virtual Section VS Name Other New Delete Rename Calculate Conditions View Virtual Inventory Assign Sections SetPropeties Stored Criteria Memorze Delete Available sections Select Rows Order Rows E E Section x Hio mi Roowy tal Lale Liear All Liear Lurrent Liear Lurrent View Text Workshops 270 E Review the Virtual Inventory by selecting the View Virtual Inventory button on the right side of the Virtual Inventory form Virtual Inventory Management 4283 Virtual Inventory Name Roads and Parking VI Delete Close Aggregation rule set Default Edit Aggregation Rule Sets Virtual Section VS Name New Delete Rename Calculate Conditions View Virtual Inventory Assign Sections SetFamiies Show All Sections Show Subset of Sections Virtual inventor y NetwoID BranchID SecionD From To Virtual Section a review Workshops 271 Workshop 12 Creation Of Cond
12. After creating the report reviewing it close out of the Section Condition Report and the Standardized reports 3 To create a user defined report m Select Reports from the PAVER button bar and then User defined Reports gt gt Continue m Click Create New Report E In the tree list highlight Network in the left tree list Under the Select Columns tab select Network ID and click the single right pointing arrow to move it to the right side table Workshops 208 EMS User Defined Reports Memorized Reports Record Count Enable Field Name Cache Refresh Cache Selected Network Select Columns Select Rows network Branch Comments Section Name Move Up Latest Work sed pes Sot 3 ove 1 etwork User Sor Network User Sort Down Deflection Latest Inspections Sample Sample Con Selected Distress column Latest Conditions Click on Branch in the tree list and under Select Columns tab choose Branch ID and click the single arrow pointing right to move it to the right side table EMS User Defined Reports Memorized Reports Record Count o E Enable Field Name Cache Refresh Cache Select Columns Select Rows Network Selected branch Branch Section i Move Up Latest Work i Latest Traffic Kove E Latest
13. 87 Viewing The Condition Analysis Report 87 Open Saved Condition 12 90 Create Condition Analysis The Condition Analysis feature allows the user to view the condition of their pavement network or any subset of the network and the analysis 1s based on prior inspection data interpolated values between previous inspections and projected conditions based on family assignment Once the pavements to be analyzed and a duration of time have been chosen can predict the deterioration of the pavements The Condition Analysis tool 15 opened by choosing Visual Menu gt gt Condition Analysis or through the PAVERTM Button Bar Condition Analysis Parameters When Create Condition Analysis is selected a Condition Analysis Parameters window appears Here the user can decide if they want to run a condition analysis on an Actual Database or a previously created Virtual Database If an actual database 1s used two options are available for selecting inventory items to be reported AII Items and Build Selection using Query Tool The default 15 set to Items Choose Build Selection using Query Tool to select a subset for the report After selections are made the selection criteria is shown in the previously empty white box The Record Count box shows the number of sections included in the current plan At the bottom of th
14. N Hints amp Solution Guides For Workshop 3 Workshop 205 OPI ECVE 205 d 205 IL cer 205 Hints amp Solution Guides For Workshop 4a 206 212 212 212 MASKS 212 Hints amp Solution Guides For Workshop 4 213 Workshop 5 Database Management Import Export 224 5 ee 224 Databas birani aia aaa eaa eed aa Sae aaie a aean Raa e SaaS a Se A aE A A a E a aaa aa ea aia 224 ananin 224 Hints amp Solution Guides For Workshop 5 eese esee tete tenente teretes non 225 Workshop 6 a Database Management Combine 231 eMe S 231 Data a s e M 231 s aeiesstendts 231 Hints amp Solution Guide For Workshop 6 a 232 Workshop 6 b Database Management Subset 235 E 235
15. assigned This mem tl ET because 02 nts Pan Select 796 A T ou Center Print and 03 have not ums been assigned yet i Te d Selected T Sections signed and Selecte Unassigned Select this tio cj INEWM polygon on the GIS map g B ections This will assign IINTE Section 01 to this 02 Locate mouse ciicks synchronize me ana me calartinn polygon Workshops 219 m Now assign the rest of the sections on the tree selector according to the diagram below IRESE 01 INEWT 01 IRESE 02 IFARB 01 01 03 All of the sections have been assigned o m Pan seien poss Center Print EE IRP and the network B Branches root has turned S E IFARE Eu rspark shp Assignment green 2 B Assigned Sections Wl Assigned and Selected 0 X Unassigned 03 INEWM Sections 01 E INEWT B Sections IRESE B Sections 01 Locate moge mouse syncnronize me me map E After assigning all of the sections click close on the bottom left of the GIS Assignment Tool Now another form will appear asking if you would like to save your GIS Linked sections Click Yes to save the linkage Save change
16. After entering all the work items PAVER will list them in the Work Wizard window where the user is able to review them and edit or delete any as necessary In the Settings to apply to all the individual work items the user can specify whether the work items that are being entered are Work History or Work Required items The user can also add Project Name Number Phase and Comments These settings will be applied to all the work being applied to sections When finished click Next to continue Next select the sections for the work items to be applied to utilizing the EMS Query Tool Select All includes all sections whereas choosing Select Subset allows the user to build a subset of sections Choosing Select None and clicking Next will allow the user to utilize the GIS Tree Selector to select the section s to be included After selecting the desired sections click Next and review the list of the Sections Selected for Work Items and the Work Items to Add The user has the option of generating a work history report by selecting Generate Work Report Run the Work Entry Wizard by clicking Apply and PAVER will apply the work items to the sections entered Chapter 15 Wizards 117 Work Wizard DER Review Confirm Sections and Work Record Count Generate Work Report Cancel will not apply any work Apply will apply the work to the sections Sections Selected for Work Items Selected Branch Use
17. 101559199 uone6nil02 ZG 01g peusilod 15 Duipaelg 05 Ly 15955914 OV AyD AousDy 595591751 184 Workshops 9 912U09 SI uoJde y 3deoxe 3jeudse si 3ueuieAed 990 usv 9 Buijeds Gz sjuor Duijeds 592810 eDexuuus EZ gels pejeyeus ZL jueuigmes 14 0 69 synodod 89 afse 79 99 juiof 69 Dune Ageing 9 540819 9 1905 779 dnmojg 19 SessaJsiq 99d 1S 95 abeddis W014 Duns 25 peusilod 5 eDeliids IIO Duo gr julof Ly se g Jer 101559199 uomnebnio rr 2018 Zy 05 Lp sessaJjsig PI IHIY OV MO 185 Final Sectioned Airfield Network Answer Key suey 595591510 ejdueg Workshops 59ss943sig ajdwes 000 81 26 0 iu Buyjeds Buljeds ge LE Bujeos 96
18. is black and white printing for graphs To choose color printing right button click on the graph and select Toolbar then on the toolbar select the System button Under Printing change the selection from Mono to Color and click OK Units Of Measurement To change units from English to metric select Preferences on the menu and then select Metric Units Rounding error is not introduced into stored data values if repeated changes between English and metric units occur because all measurement values in are stored as metric values Changing the setting in Preferences changes the filters that are used for presenting data on screens and reports To ensure that the display properly reflects the unit change it 1s best to close all data entry and report screens before switching preferences Adjusting Table And Graph Sizes Tables and graphs automatically resize to the available space on your computer display As the number of active tables increases the number of lines allocated to each table reduces If a table is associated with a graph the table and the graph share the horizontal space that is allocated to the table You can adjust the space allocated between a table and its associated graph by pointing to the vertical bar that separates a table from its graph and then while pressing the left mouse button drag the separator bar to the right or left You cannot manually increase or reduce the vertical spa
19. Adjusting M amp R priorities for different Rankings Clicking Add adds a new record to the table Before clicking Delete first highlight the desired record by clicking on the box at the left of the record PAVER asks you to confirm every Delete action Chapter 3 System Tables 30 Edit Inventory Pick Lists 7 Branch Use 5 Street Type B Surface Type D 3 Section Ranks click a tab Section Rank Principal Arterial Collector Industrial Residential Not Applicable Primary Secondary Edit entries for Section Ranks picklist here Tertiary Other oja OD 2 mM oO oO gt M amp R Plan Tables And Families All tables found under this category are tables that PAVER uses when executing the M amp R plan Like previous tables most of these tables allow you to add items and delete non default items To edit a cell in the table click on the cell you wish to edit and enter the new value Once changes are made they are automatically saved to the system A brief description of each table follows Localized Stopgap M amp R Tables And Families Work Types A listing of all work types classified as localized repairs Work types can be added or deleted by clicking on the associated buttons on this tab Cost by Work Type Tables You can create different cost tables to correspond with different jobs or re
20. File name Save as type Report File Workshops 279 Navigate to the saved analysis Select to open a previously saved analysis Workshops To open a saved report select Condition Analysis gt gt View Existing Report Select your saved report and then click Open to view the report Condition Analysis Condition Analysis Parameters Look in 9 Roads and Parking y Plan Setup C3 GISView Assignments C3 GISView Section Conditions Select Inventory for Planning My Recent 98 10 Documents Actual Database Virtual Dat 2 Allltems Desktop My Documents Select Plan Start Date and Plan 10 1 1998 My Computer Network Files of type Condition Analysis Open as read only Deae Ce 280 Workshop 14 M amp H Work Plan Objective Develop several 5 year maintenance planning scenarios Database Open the Mansfield 2007 database by clicking File gt gt Open Database selecting Mansfield 2007 pvr and clicking Open Tasks 1 300 000 Year Hint use Limit To Budget option using a single budget 2 How much money is required to maintain the current condition Hint use iteration 3 How much money is needed to eliminate the backlog of maintenance over 5 years E For each of the budget scenarios Start amp Program Dates
21. 015025525 rouna au Remaining Samples Sample Unit Size 2000 Slabs Distress Type C 21 BLOW UP C 26 JT SEAL DMG C 22 CORNER BREAK C 27 LANE SH DROP C 23 DIVIDED SLAB C 24 DURABIL CR C 28 FAULTING 1 POLISHED AG C 2 POPOUTS 6 SCALING 28 LINEAR CR 33 PUMPING 3 C3 7 SHRINK CR 8 CORNER SPALL 3 3 3 39 JOINT SPALL 29 LARGE PATCH 4 PUNCHOUT 30 SMALL PATCH 5 RR CROSSING Distress Severity Distress Quanti C Low Medium High N A 2 Slabs Distress Description Quantity Units 28 LINEAR CRACKING M Delete Distress Replace Distress irj Next Sample Unit Smp Images 0 Insp Images 0 Close Workshops 204 Workshop 4a Reports Objectives Create basic reports in to show the results of inspections and general inventory information Additionally develop custom reports that can be exported to Excel Database Open the Roads and Parking database by clicking File gt gt Open Database selecting Roads and Parking pvr and clicking Open Tasks 1 Use Summary Charts report to generate a chart of Branch Use vs Weighted Average Condition Change the title to read Condition by Pavement Use Export the associated table to Excel 2 Create a report using Standard Reports which shows the condition of each section at the last inspection 3 Create a user defined report that shows the Network Branch
22. Include images Include other non associated condition families Include Virtual Inventory v User User Include Required Projects Working Status Accomplished percentage Action Done Checking major work families for invalid minimum condition table reference y Checking for duplicate Work Type Codes Import file status e Checking for duplicate or blank use and surface names Done 4 Using the same process as above import the Airport e65 file into PAVER Name the database Airport 5 Open PAVER and follow the captions below to delete the Airport database Tables Preferences Add Mew Database Database Print Printer Setup Exit System Workshops 229 Select the Airport Database to delete and confirm Workshops 230 Workshop 6 a Database Management Combine Objective Combine several databases using the Combine Subset database tool Database Use the two databases as defined below Task 1 Combine Neil Armstrong and Mansfield databases using Combine Subset database tool and name the new database Ohio Workshops 231 Hints amp Solution Guide For Workshop 6 a 1 Using the Database Combine Subset tool To combine databases or to subset a database double click the PAVERTM 6 DB Tools icon Select Database Tools and choose Combine Subset Database from the window on the right and t
23. 15 represented in a hierarchy similar to the file structure in Windows it is logical to navigate this structure in a tree format Much like the Explorer tool in Windows the Tree selector allows you to move through the hierarchy of your database and select the specific network branch or section from which information 15 needed This is done by moving down the tree until you arrive at the desired location 5 0 RC 13 Networks IRP Branches IFARB INTE INEWM INEWT IRESE Sections 01 Tab Selector The Tab selector has a similar look and feel to the 4 2 method of selecting inventory items by selecting from the Network Branch and Section file cards Starting with the Network tab and working across to the Branch and Section tabs the user can select and view data at any level of the inventory Along with selection capability all data contained at each level can be viewed directly from the same window the selection is made Unique ID numbers and user defined sort field data are also now available for viewing with this selector Chapter 2 User Interface 20 DOOK Networks Branches Sections NEWMARK DRIVE FARBER DRIVE From To 2 Category Rok Surface gt ot N T 4 n Close EMS Query Tool The EMS Query Tool is utilized in several places within PAVER to facilitate the selection of a subset of pavement sections to use in reports and data
24. 6 5 GIS tools are substantially upgraded from previous versions of the software GIS capabilities are now integrated with the software and are easier to operate and employ Shapefiles can now be imported and exported with e60 and e65 files First though you must have a shapefile consisting of polygons which represent your database s section definitions If you don t already have a shapefile representing your database there are three main options for obtaining creating a shapefile 1 Obtain a shapefile from your GIS personnel and modify it to represent your section definitions 2 Import AutoCAD drawings of your pavements to a GIS program such as ArcGIS The AutoCAD to GIS data conversion process can be difficult though there are many aftermarket programs to ease this migration Still the conversion is time consuming and often results in data quality issues which must be fixed in a GIS program Some of the data quality issues are Due to errors the AutoCAD drawing such as gaps it 15 difficult to get a one to one feature match for every object resulting in information loss For example it is unlikely that each line in AutoCAD representing a road will be accurately translated to polygons in your shapefile E Most AutoCAD maps were not designed for GIS analysis but instead were created to serve as hardcopy drawings Therefore they may not be accurate in their scaling measurements or projection coordinate system
25. Branch Use Runway Number of Sections 0 00 in Branch Length Sum of fo 00 Width of 00 Sections Sections Calc Area Sum 00 Area Adjustment 0 00 True Area fo 00 of Sections Comment User prese are editing Curent Values Historical Values Images 0 New Copy Delete Workshops 192 Section tab Configure new section New section information Workshops Within the Section tab enter the section information Use the drop down lists for Rank and Surface Type List Selector Network Exercise m Branch Rw 6 24 X Runway 624 22 Section Y Branch Exercise RW 6 24 3 Section Properties Conditions Families atory Information for New Section Section Fiom Te fem Constructed 6 72371985 Length 1300 Width 100 00 n Surface Pan OK are editing CumentValues Historical Values Images 0 Copy Delete E List Selector Network Exercise Exercise 52 Branch RW 6 24 Runway 624 Section 028 Fiom Te 18 00 E Section Exercise RW 6 24 02B Branch 01 3 Section Properties Conditions Families Section ID 028 From 5400 18 00 Surface Type Rank Last Const 7 23 1585 Date Length 1 300
26. Zoomin zoom Out Center Print mnsfield shp Major Maintenance 2010 n Major MR Critical n Major MR gt Critical mnsfield shp Major Maintenance 2010 mnsfield shp Major Maintenance 2011 mnsfield shp Major Maintenance 2012 mnsfield shp Major Maintenance 2013 mnsfield shp Major Maintenance 2014 mnsfield shp Major Maintenance 2015 mnsfield shp Major Maintenance 2016 mnsfield shp Major Maintenance 2017 mnsfield shp Major Maintenance 2018 OOOOOOORIR mnsfield shp Major Maintenance 2019 B As seen on GIS map MicroPAVER recommends Major M amp R on the two AC runways RW 5 23 amp RW 14 32 In the next section we will plan two Major M amp R projects on these two runways Do not close any of the forms Workshops 295 2 Assigned projects Workshops Plan Projects using the M amp R Project Planner Select the Project Planner form Designate the first projects name by selecting New in the upper left hand corner of the Project Planner form and after naming the project RW 5 23 select OK With the new project selected in the Current Project list box add sections to the project by highlighting the section s to be added in the left hand table and clicking the single right pointing arrow sections project RW 5 23 are shown in image below Sections can either be added one at a time or multiple sections can be added by highlighting them while pressing the Ct
27. 2 oject Current Project nw 523 v Eatliest Work Date 571 2010 Total Project Area 1 103250541 po Completed love to isl x tory let Latest Work gt Work Hi New Delete Copy J Rename 2010 Total Project Cost 5543532712 Project Sections 1 Project Work 1 Section Level Work Work Item Views Work Description Work Date Unit Cost 7 Thickness Thickness Units zol zold Mill 4 8 1 2010 0 45 SqFt in 499 167 __ 4inoverlay 9 1 20010 200 SaFt 2218498 Recalculate All Button Replan Affected Sections Recalculate Close After all work items have been added to both projects click on Recalculate All and the M amp R Plan will be re executed including the created projects This button 1s shown above on the Project Planner form Review the results of the added projects The views below include the projects on both the Summary view gt gt Expenditure Summary and Project Summary tables It is important to mention that these projects not counted against the budget because this criteria was included on the original M amp R Plan analysis To Detail xpenditure Summary al 2010 201 2012 20m3 2014 60 824 771 14 6 082 477 11 6 082 477 1 6 082 477 11 6 082 477 11 6 082 477 11 5 534 168 3 5 967 839 7 702 206 3 441 827 13 26 32011 30259 Total 813 262 970 59 11 502 008 1 702 206 3 441 827 13
28. View Existing Report Execute Close E Since the plan will exclude Global M amp R configured on the previous tab we can skip the Global Preventative M amp R tab E On M amp R Families gt gt Major tab the selected Cost By PCI is V6 5 Default AC AF Major Select Edit to view this table M amp R Plan Parameters Plan Setup Budget Categories Families Project Planning Localized Stopgap Localized Preventive Global Preventive Mi Major Use Assigned Families Default Major Family Cost By Default AF_Major E dit Cost Multiplier Cost by PCI Mutiplier 1 View Existing Report Execute Workshops 292 To analyze where work needs to be allocated run Work Planner without including any Required Work Planned Projects After PAVERTM recommends work projects will be planned Select the options shown in the below image and then click Execute No required work has been pl anned y et 0 Plan Setup Budget M amp R Categories M amp R Families Project Planning don t include any Required Work Minimum years between formulated projects and work planning recommendations equired Worl Formulated Plan Projects aft Projects Select this Work Count projects after the p lan against the budget is executed projects will be planned Reset
29. The Report Viewer includes a View option that is used to open and close the various spreadsheet views of the report data You may use the View in the Report Viewer window to configure the report viewer so that it presents only the information you wish to view The default presentation of the Report Viewer is the summary version To turn off one of the summary tables and its associated graph select View from the Report Viewer window and then Summary Select the table which you want to turn off Tables or graphs which are active in the current report view have a check mark to the left of the table or graph name Within the Detail submenu Plan Parameters opens a table displaying the parameters that were used to configure the current report This 1s convenient for checking the settings requested when the user ran the report without having to exit and rerun the report EMS Report Viewer 5 Program Files Paver rpedefit rpc 7 View AutoRefresh Vi ew menu ET User Defined Views Annual Condition Plot Arithmetic Avg Detail 15 Se le ct ta b le S tiny Overlay Work Scenario Condition Frequency No Of Sections an d gr a ph S t INE Condition Frequency Area Condition Frequency Area display Annual Condition Plot Area Weighted Awg Condition Distribution Graph 96 Area 5 5 2004 18
30. o ad 164 Concrete Surfaced Airfields ee UR SENE des USER 165 97 165 Load amp Climate Distresses Asphalt Surfaced Roads And Parking Lots Pavement Distress Distress 1 Alligator Cracking 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Ap Bleeding Block Cracking Bumps amp Sags Corrugation Depression Edge Cracking Joint Reflection Cracking Lane Shoulder Drop Off Longitudinal Transverse Cracking Patch Utility Cut Polished Aggregate Pothole Railroad Crossing Rutting Shoving Slippage Cracking Swell Raveling Weathering Load Other Climate Durability Other Other Other Load Climate Durability Other Climate Durability Other Other Load Other Load Other Other Other Climate Durability Climate Durability pendix F 162 Concrete Surfaced Roads And Parking Lots Pavement Distress Distress Type 21 Blow Up Climate Durability 22 Corner Break Load 23 Divided Slab Load 24 Durability Cracking Climate Durability 25 Faulting Other 26 Joint Seal Damage Climate Durability 27 Lane Shoulder Drop Off Other 28 Linear Cracking Load 29 Large Patch Utility Cut Other 30 Small Patch Other 31 Polished Aggregate Other 32 Popouts Other 33 Pumping Other 34 Punchout Load 35 Railroad Crossing Other 36 Scaling Other 37 Shrinkage Cra
31. 5 5 2003 57572005 0 18 Percent 5 5 2006 14 18 ANS Chapter 2 User Interface 24 Report Viewer Tables The spreadsheet tables in the report viewer are standard tables and support the right button click on tables features When an EMS Report Viewer report i e Condition Analysis or M amp R Work Plan is displayed the tables are made active with a left click Spreadsheets in the Report Viewer can be associated with graphs These graphs are implemented in two different ways The first type associates a graph directly with a single row the active or highlighted row of the table In this case as the user changes the active row in the spreadsheet the graph dynamically adjusts so that the graph reflects the active row in the spreadsheet The second type of graph association is as an overlay on an existing graph For example in the Condition Analysis Report a table showing combined section condition history and projections is linked to a graph that plots the condition over time This graph can further be overlaid with a plot of the family curve assigned to the section As elsewhere in the program graphs in the Report Viewer can be zoomed printed or configured with the right button click on graphs feature Exiting The Report Viewer When you have completed reviewing a Report Viewer report close the report by closing the Report Viewer window After you close a report you ar
32. Delete C Select All 4 Select Rows Field Comparison Compare To 2 the jue sf LH TAXIWAY Clear All Tables Clear Current Table Clear Current Row View Text Workshops 274 Click on tabs 2 3 4 and 5 to review the data that was used or to change some of the model settings E predic tion Modeling Family Type PCI vs Age Taxiway AC Calculate Close Boundaries Active Outliers Active 4 Options 5 View Equation and Stats 6 Assign Family 1 Collect Model Data 2 Review Model Data Use Boundary Filter Model data and properties Minimum Maximum Use X Range Filter 0 50 Use Outlier Boundaries 1 960 95 Note To add additional points in the model based on experience go to tab 2 Review Model Data right click and choose Add to add additional data Similarly choose Remove to delete individual data points Note When you create a prediction model you are not editing your pavement data The prediction model makes a copy of the data points so editing of the prediction models will not have an impact on your pavement data Workshops 275 If you are satisfied with the model and want to assign it to data click tab 6 To assign the pavement features used to create the model to the new model click Assign Families To Sections E predic tion Modeling Family Type PCI vs Age Boundaries Active Dutliers Active 1
33. The PCI is the default condition index for the PAVER system A numerical index ranging from 0 for a failed pavement to 100 for a pavement in perfect condition Calculation of the PCI is based on the results of a visual condition survey in which distress type severity and quantity are identified It was developed to provide an index of the pavement s structural integrity and surface operational condition Pavement Identification PID Pavement Identification PID is the unique combination of pavement inventory information that makes a particular pavement section unique The PID is formed from the network ID branch ID and section ID Pavement Network A logical unit for organizing pavements into a structure for the purpose of pavement management A network will consist of one or more pavement branches which in turn may consist of one or many pavement sections The network is the point of origin for the hierarchy of pavement management structures Pavement Section A section should be viewed as the smallest management unit when considering the application and selection of M amp R treatments It is a logical unit assigned to a stretch of pavement that exhibits a common age construction type traffic and other criteria The terminus or leaf point in the hierarchy of defined pavement management structures A pavement section will be defined as a subordinate of a pavement branch which in turn will be a subordinate of a parent pav
34. Workshops 212 Hints amp Solution Guides For Workshop 4b 1 Use PAVER Shapefile Converter Tool to import a GIS shapefile Click on Visual menu choose GIS tools and highlight the PAVER Shapefile Converter option Click the Continue button located at the bottom of the Visual Menu window PAVER Shapefile nente PAVER Shapefile Converter Converter e 5 Inspection Conditions Reports Condition Prediction Model Condition Model Family Assignment Condition Analysis Family Definition Family Assignment Plan GIS Tools Selectors C Wizards GIS Tools Continue The PAVER Shapefile Converter window will pop up as seen below Source Shar Destination She Source Shape file currently selected No Destination Shape file currently selected EJ Click the Select button on the PAVER Shapefile Converter form and then navigate to GIS Shapefile in the directory as seen below Workshops 213 Date modified Type A rspark shp Documents Recently Changed 3 Recent Places More Folders gt 1 PCIVideo User Data J Class Workshop 3 1 Class Workshop 4b d Class Workshop 8 d Deduct Curves Test Interstate Research Park J Mansfield 1 Mansfield 2007 Neil Armstrong Neil Armstrong Workshop 11 1 Neil Armstrong Workshop 12 Neil Armstrong 2007 J Ohio Workshop 6 b Peterson2 8 2010
35. CHANCE D0203 D0204 D0205 D0207 D0500 00504 00507 DAHLGREN DFUEL ROADPARK 011998 062000 octa 0 12006 DIAMOND Octis octa octams nnana Years Workshops 278 ES In the Select GIS Views box click Section Conditions By Year to show a map of the resulting conditions over time based on the pavement deterioration Select SelectArea Zoom Zoom In Zoom Out roadpark shp Condition 1998 roadpark shp Condition 1999 M roadpark shp Condition 2000 v ition 2001 rpadpark shp Condition 2003 roadpark ondition 200 roadpark shp Condition 2005 7 roadpark shp Londition 2006 shp Condiion 2007 To save the report click Close and then Yes Save the report to the C drive and name it CA98 10 ca Save the analysis for viewing at a later time Plan Save Options Save this plan for later review or modification EMS Program Files User Data Roads and Parking Save in Roads and Parking C3GISView Assignments amp Section Conditions My Recent Documents 2 Desktop
36. Class Workshop 4 Interstate Research Park Mansfield C3Mansfield 2007 Armstrong Armstrong 2007 ohio Workshop 6 b C3Reads and Parking Roadway Class Workshop 2 pvr Class Workshop 3 pvr Class Workshop 4 pvr Interstate Research Park pvr Mansfield pvr Mansfield 2007 pvr Neil Armstrong pvr Neil Armstrong 2007 pvr E Ohio Workshop 6 b PYR Roads and Parking pvr Roadway pvr File name Files of type Ohio Runways PAVER 6 x 237 Click OK to close the EMS Query Tool and Execute to Subset the database Import PAYER data from an e40 or e50 or e60 or 5 file Export data to an 5 file Source s 1 Ee HT odio GR Selection Criteria Destination Processing Status File 5 PROGRAM FILESXUs amp Data Ohio Workshop Table Frames 0 0 0 FrameDistresses 0 0 0 Status Workshops 238 Workshop 7 Database Verification Tools Objective Run the database verification tool Database Open the Roadway Workshop 7 database by clicking File gt gt Open Database selecting Roadway Workshop 7 pvr and clicking Open Task 1 Run database verification tool on the Roadway Workshop 7 database Workshops 239 Hints amp Solution Guide For Workshop 7 1 Using the Database Verific
37. Enable Preview Files of type JPG Cancel File Info ou are editing Progressive Passes Page Meaningful Only fi images 0 _ New _ Coy E Network Exercise Spring St 02 pring 200000 Branch Properties Conditions Families meon 2 EMS Image Viewer BED Images 14 4 Image 1 of 1 gt P item Length 600 00 Definition Properties X Description Store New Images As Delete Paths to Image Files Rename Slab Length Typ 15 00 Print Existing Images Stored As Total Slabs 80 00 Paths to Image Files _ Pictures in Database Youaeedlng Current Values Historical mess _ Co Note Images can be stored inside an image database which is associated with the pavement data or you can store the path to an image located elsewhere such as a CD Workshops 198 Workshop 3 Field Inspection Data Entry Objectives Create inspection data entries for sections create sample units and enter PCI inspection data Database Open the Class Workshop 3 database by clicking File gt gt Open Database then select Class Workshop 3 pvr and click Open When opening a database always select databasename pvr instead of the database folder Tasks 1 Create new inspection dates for several sections 2 Enter the PCI field inspection data on the following page Works
38. There are two types of Tab Tables basic independent and linked dependent The basic table operates like a standard spreadsheet except that data input into the table 1s controlled by the series of buttons Close Add and Delete that are arrayed along the bottom of the Tab Table forms Clicking the Add button inserts a new record into the table which can then be edited The Delete button removes the highlighted record in the table and the mouse or arrow keys are used to move up and down the rows and across columns in the active Tab Table The second type of Tab Table is a linked table The linked table uses the records of a basic table or tables as the basis for its data entry The linked table is referred to as the child or dependent table and the basic table 1s the parent independent table For example the work type cost table uses three work type tables localized global and major as the basis for its entries Therefore when you add a record to the work type cost table a linked table you click the Add button and get a picklist of possible values to add The table is formed from the entries in the linked table s parent table s localized global and major M amp R tables in this case Linked tables help enforce consistency in its data tables For example if the work type cost table was not linked to the M amp R tables it would be possible to develop costs for M amp R procedures that were not defined This type of inc
39. To Text File ph Workshops 207 2 To create a standard report Select Reports from the button bar and then Standard Reports gt gt Continue Select Section Condition Report and under methods double click PCI so it moves to the Selected box and then click Execute E Reports Summary Charts Standard Reports User Defined Reports z 615 Reports C Branch Listing Report Condition Selection Methods Selected Work History Report Tinknownclogd 1 Branch Condition Report UnknownCi001 UnknownCl002 Condition Section Condition Report 1003 Report Selection Criteria Continue Execute button Please Note For Large Reports After pressing Execute once the hour glass disappears it may take several minutes for report data to populate the report form EA PAVER Standard Reports Section 1 4 1045 y 100 Total 82 100 82 of 82 Section Condition Report Pavement Database Roads and Parking NetworkiD ROADPARK L Last Branch ID Section ID Aer Surface Lanes True Area SqFt 0 Date 10 19 2007 PCI 0103 Access for Bldg 103 06 01 1998 AC ROADWAY ae 11 131 00 04 19 2003 0106 Access for Bldg 106 06 01 1997 ROADWAY mH 6 233 00 04 19 2003 0403 Access for Bldg 403 06 01 1983 ROADWAY 4 918 00 04 19 2003 A0403 Access for Bldg 403 06 01 1983 PCC ROADWAY 220 00 04 19 2003 s
40. d 235 T 235 Hints amp Solution Guide For Workshop 6 b eese eese estes tenen enteros nones tote 236 Workshop 7 Database Verification Tools 239 Objective Database Workshop 8 Review Creation Of Additional User defined NIMM MM MM 242 5 epe p 242 BEC 242 Focus 242 Hints amp Solution Guide For Workshop 243 Workshop 9 a Creation Of New Surface 245 ie M 245 e 245 Lec 245 Hints amp Solution Guide For Workshop 9 246 Workshop 9 b Creation Of A New Branch Use 11 1 1 248 OJ SCE ES ie 248 Database 248 E H 248 Hints amp Solution Guide For Workshop 9 D tiii rtr 249 Workshop 10 A PRENSA E t o p E de I E Heidi 251 8 2 251 E 251 251 Hints and Sol
41. length Select M amp R Plan Type Critical PCI Consequence of Localized Distress Maintenance C Major based on Minimum Condition Select Critical PCI plan type View Existing Report Execute Close On the Budget tab select Determine Budget Consequences In Budget Consequences select 100K per year in the Budget drop down box Set the Budget Scale Factor to 3 0 and apply an Inflation Rate of 390 Note There are three types of budgets a single budget for all M amp R a split budget where one is for localized global M amp R and the other is for major M amp R and the last budget scenario splits the localized the global M amp R and the major M amp R into their own separate budgets In this workshop we will only be using the single budget Workshops 282 ele Plan Setup l Budget M amp R Categories l M amp R Families l Project Planning Constrain Budget Determine Budget Consequence Determine Budget Requirements Iteration Select One budget for localized global Separate budgets for Localized ff OnebudgetioralMtH C one budget for Major Global Major M8R Budget Budget 100K per Year E Edit Scale Factor 3 M amp A Priority Table Default Priority Table v Select inflation rate Inflation Rate 2 p View Existing Report Execute ii On the M amp R Categories tab place checkmarks next to allowing for Local
42. 4 Show entire set C Show subset Respond to Selections Center Print After the sections have been assigned to the two projects work items can be added On the Project Planner window there are three other tabs named Project Work Section Level Work and Work Item Views The Project Work tab is where work items are assigned to an entire project every section while the Section Level Work tab is where work items can be assigned to individual sections in a project The Work Item View tab is where all work project or section level can be reviewed For this workshop both Project Level and Section Level work items will be used for the two projects For the Section Level Work First select the project called RW 14 32 in the Current Project list Now proceed to the Section Level Work tab where all of the sections assigned to this project are shown in the left table To add work items to section 14 32 A highlight 14 32 A and then select Add Fill in the Add Work Item window as shown in the image below Manually enter a Unit Cost of 0 30 S SqFt and click the lower Calculate button to calculate the Total Cost Be sure to enter a work date of 8 01 2009 297 Project and section to which work will be applied Add layer work and select work type to add to a project Select the start date of the work Enter the unit cost for the work item and calculate the total cost of the
43. Area Linear Linear Area Linear Area Area Area Linear Linear Any Area Slab Replacement Linear Area Linear Area Linear Area Area Linear Linear Area Linear Area Area Linear Linear Area Area Area Distress Quantity Distress Quantity Patch Area Patch Area Patch Area Distress Quantity Slab Width Slab Width Slab Width Slab Width Slab Width Slab Width Constant Constant Constant Constant Constant Constant Slab Length Width Slab Area Slab Length Width Slab Width Slab Width Slab Width Slab Width Slab Area Joint Calculation Joint Calculation Constant Constant Slab Width Slab Width Slab Area Slab Length Slab Width Slab Width Slab Width Slab Area All units are in metric Appendix H 172 Scaling H Linear Slab Length Width 1 70 Scaling M Linear Slab Width 1 70 Scaling L Linear Slab Width 1 70 Scaling M Area Slab Width 1 25 71 Faulting Any Any Slab Width 1 72 Divided Slab Any Linear Slab Length Width 1 72 Divided Slab Any Area Slab Area 1 73 Shrinkage Cracking Any Area Constant 0 304 73 Shrinkage Cracking Any Linear Constant 1 5 74 Joint Spalling L Linear Constant 0 5 74 Joint Spalling L Area Slab Width 0 25 74 Joint Spalling M Linear Slab Width 0 5 74 Joint Spalling M Area Slab Width 0 5 74 Joint Spalling H Linear Slab Width 1 74 Joint Spalling H Area Slab Width 0 5 75 Corner Spalling Any Linear Constant 0 5 75 Corner Spalling Any Area
44. Branch User Sort 1 Deflection Branch User Sort 2 Latest Inspections Branch User Sort 3 B Sample Sample Con Selected Distress column Extrapolated Distres Latest Conditions Click on Section in the tree list and under Select Columns choose Section ID and click the single arrow to move it to the right side Highlight Last Construction Date and click the single arrow pointing right to move it to the right side table Then do the same for Years Since Inspection Workshops 209 EMS User Defined Reports Memorized Reports Record Count Enable Field Name Cache Refresh Cache Network Select Columns Select Rows Branch Slab Width Last Construction Date Selected section Section ID Move Up Latest Work gt gt Years Since Inspection Latest Traffic visi Latest Deflection Latest Inspections Sample ee y coordinate Sample Con Years Since Global Wor Distress Years Since Global Maj Extrapolated Distres Years Since Local Work Latest Conditions Years Since Years Since Major Work Zone Zone Description m In the tree list select Latest Inspections and then under Select Columns click on Date and move it to the right side EMS User Defined Reports Memorized Reports rcc Record Count Men Delete Cancel
45. Delete Saved Layout Right button Change Sort Order click menu Activity Dal Condition Age a HER i Very Poor Section Condition Plot Failed 4 Import Failed Failed 3 5757200 b 4 Failed 2 1 0 712311996 5 5 2004 5 5 2006 5 5 2003 5 5 2005 Dae In addition to the right button click table features column widths can be reduced or enlarged when a table is active To change column width point to the vertical line positioned between the columns When the mouse pointing indicator changes from the large arrow to the small double arrow icon click and drag the column border to the desired size Right button Click On Graphs PAVER graphs can be printed customized and zoomed in the same manner as PAVER tables To view a PAVER graph make the graph active by clicking on the graph While the graph is active and the mouse pointer is anywhere on the graph right click to invoke the graph menu Select items from the graph feature menu which is accessible with a right button click Summary Charts X Ais Surface Type z Y Axis Pavement Area Pavement Area Surface Type Right button click menu All Sections C Subset of Sections You can customize the look of PAVER graphs on the fly by using the EMS right button click tools The graph Zoom feature enlarges the graph to the f
46. Email Activation Select to activate your copy of PAVER email an email application such as Outlook must be used with this option m Phone Activation Select to activate your copy of PAVER over the phone with the phone number provided in the next screen Automated Web Activation When Automated Web Activation is selected the screen below will be shown To activate your software online please enter or update your contact information below Your correct EMail address is important to receive notification of PAVER updates Press Activate when you are finished Previously Agency Company serial Contact Name number State PAVER Serial Number fi 3 Country EMail Address Confirm EMail Address Secondary EMail Phone Fields marked by an asterisk are required all other fields are optional Once all required fields are populated click the Activate PAVER Online button to complete the activation process Chapter 1 Overview below Your correct EMail address is important to receive notification of PAVER To activate your software online please enter or update your contact information updates Press Activate when you are finished PAVER Serial Number is Mo Agency Company Pavement Consultants Inc Contact Name Joe Smith City Fort Collins State Co
47. GlobalPreventive tabs Use Assigned Families Default Stopgap M amp R Family Cost By PCI Cost by PCI table New Default AC FidstRW_Stopgap selector Stopgap Localized below critical PCI Cost Multiplier Cost by PCI Multiplier 1 PEI View Existing Report Execute Close Tab 5 Project Planning On the left side of the Project Planning tab there are two main options Required Work and Plan Projects after Recommending Work If Required Work is selected PAVER will include in its M amp R analysis any previously designated required projects The edit button below the selected Required Work option is used to create and edit projects If Plan Projects after Recommending Work is selected PAVER will allow the user to plan M amp R after the plan is Executed through a Project Planner window This window will open automatically along with the Executed M amp R Plan results and allows the user to apply any created projects to the executed plan directly If either Required Work and or Plan Projects after Recommending Work is selected a work interval section is shown on the right hand side of the tab This section sets a mintmum and maximum time interval for which PAVER is allowed to recommend work in the work plan on any required projects The time interval can be set for both Required Major and Required Global work types and their appropriate global and major work intervals
48. MANSFIELD T HANGAR i MANSFIELD TWY 5 Jui2011 12012 MMW Years Total Funded Table _Stop Gap Funded Preventive Funded 77172010 S164 104 46 13 824 55 Total Funded Plot 77172011 227 549 19 25 805 08 7 1 2012 233 326 20 0 00 7 1 2013 230 772 22 0 00 7 1 2014 239 173 26 0 00 Funded 7712011 71 2012 7 1 2013 7112014 m After reviewing the results close the window and will prompt you to save the report Save the report as 300k wp by checking Save this plan for later review or modification gt gt Browse gt gt type 300k wp in the Mansfield 2007 folder gt gt and select Save The Plan Save Options form can be seen below MS Program Files Paver rpwdefit Save the plan 77172010 164 104 46 7824 Total Funded Plot 77172011 5227 549 19 525 805 08 7 1 2012 5293 926 20 50 00 7 1 2013 290 893 38 50 00 7 1 2014 3299 307 25 0 00 Funded 1 1 71 2010 7 2011 71 2012 712013 7 2014 gt Date Workshops 286 2 M amp R Plan Maintain Current Condition New budget parameters Everything will be the same based on the previously run report except for the budget input parameters On the Budget tab select Determine Budget Requirements Iteration Under the Determine Budget Requirements Iteration select Condition
49. Mansfield J Mansfield 2007 J Armstrong Armstrong Workshop 11 J Armstrong Workshop 12 Armstrong 2007 J Ohio Workshop 6b E Roads and Parking Pavement detelbese Pavement file to export EMS Program Files User Data Roads and Parking Browse Export path and filename Working Status Action o Fie Eu Table No destination has been selected 0 r Browse 100 Export Close To change the name of the file or its destination click Browse next to the Export Path and File Name box For this example put the new file in the Program Files User Data directory and name it Roadway P C Import PAVER data from an Export PAVER data to an e65 Combine Subset PAVER dat EMS Program Files User Data gt Favorite Links Create PAVER Inventory from E Documents More Exei PAVER 60 Folders Sum J User Data Export Type Exportto an e65 readable by C an e55 readable by Options Export pavement data and asso a Class Workshop 3 Class Workshop 4b Class Workshop 8 FORTCOLLINSTESTING Interstate Research Park Search 2 Name Date taken Class Workshop Class Workshop 4b Class Workshop 8 FORTCOLLINSTESTING Interstate Research Park Mansfield J Mansfield 2007 Neil Armstrong Neil Armstrong Wo
50. Peterson3 8 2010 1 Peterson5 20 2010 Peterson5 25A 2010 peterson2002 21 Reads and Parking Roads and Parking Workshop 11 44 Roads and Parking Workshop 13 Roadway Workshop 7 Navigate to this Schriever AFB 11 Shapefile folder 11 XML Examples and Docs EMG Dranram Filer File name Highlight the rspark shp shapefile inside the Shapefile folder and click on the open button Select a shapefile t EMS Program Files UserData gt Shapefile Name Date modified A rspark shp Favorite Links Documents Recently Changed Recent Places W More Folders 4 1 User Data J Class Workshop 3 1 Class Workshop 4b 1 Class Workshop 8 J Deduct Curves Test 1 Interstate Research Park 1 Mansfield d Mansfield 2007 Ji Neil Armstrong J Neil Armstrong Workshop 11 1 Neil Armstrong Workshop 12 1 Neil Armstrong 2007 J Ohio Workshop 6 b Peterson2 8 2010 Ji Peterson3 8 2010 1 Peterson5 20 2010 Ji Peterson5 25A 2010 J peterson2002 1 Roads and Parking Roads and Parking Workshop 11 1 Reads and Parking Workshop 13 1 Roadway Workshop 7 11 Schriever AFB Shapefile 1 XML Examples and Docs B Fal 43 Filename rspark shp Workshops 214 m Now select the Convert button on the PAVER GIS Converter form to import the GIS Shapefile to the Class Workshop 4b database PAVER Shapfile Converter Source
51. Vitual Section VS Name New Delte Rename JL Current Virtual Inventory Assign Sections Show AllSections Show Subset of Sections Close Virtual inventory review reri 000 t down R W 26 Available se Be 8 4000 t fom RAW end B RAV end 26 RW APRON _ BUILDING TNT up APRON Apron C Fuel Pumps APRON THGRSTOTAVT APRON AND AROUND APRON D APRON B PART OLD lip APRON APRONBANDA WEST HANGARS JAPRON noth west edge of apron Jend of moved T Hangar APRON G APRONC WEST TOENDOFHGR Show APRON TAXIWAY AT TES WISEOFTWW AP Cita ford TR A Ww 04 360 S0UTH TO Al M TW B1 RAW BEND W TAW B RUNWAY A M TW B2AND STUB APRO TW TW t PRIVATE HANGARS EAST SITW D TIC W TAW RUNWAY A M 2 Roads and Parking Lots VI After opening the Roads and Parking database create a Virtual Inventory named Roads and Parking VI Create three Virtual Sections named RD for roadways PL for parking lots and Other for any other uses Use the above airfields example as well as the below images to guide you through the process Virtual Inventory Management Virtual Inventory Roads and Parking VI 2 _ Delete Rename Aggregation rule Default T Edit Ag
52. Workshops 182 Hints amp Solution Guide For Workshop 1 1 Section network Use the following guidelines when performing sectioning There is specific correct answer to network definition rather solution is a function of pavement attributes traffic and management practices E Be consistent and use terminology common to all of the users of the system Use facility names or numbers for branches 1 Runway 12 30 E A Branch should have a unique functional use 1 e runway taxiway roadway etc E A Section should have a unique surface type rank and last construction date Use common sense when naming The names should be easy to understand by all of the system users including maintenance personnel and contractors Workshops 183 Sample Airfield Network AML AML AML AML AML 8810100 SI uode y 3deoxe jjeudse s 990 OL synodod 89 JauJ0 Gy 9 Sjuor Buyyjeds y 99 5 eDexuuus eas 9 qeis pejegeus qeing vo jueugmes 590810 69 Buyers OL 191109 79 69 dnmojg 19 59559451 99d abeliids 0 Buyo gr 95 15819 jor 9 99 W014
53. and Charles York US Air Force M Y Mo Shahin PAVER Program Manager US Army Corps of Engineers ERDC CERL Disclaimer This user manual 15 furnished by the United States Government 15 accepted and used by the recipient with the express understanding that the United States Government makes no warranties expressed or implied concerning the accuracy completeness reliability usability or suitability of any particular purpose of the information or the data contained this user manual or furnished connection therewith and the United States shall be under no lability whatsoever to any person by reason ofany use thereof The user manual belongs to the United States Government Therefore the reciprent further agrees not to assert any proprietary rights therein or to represent this user manual to anyone as other than a United States Government user manual Table of Contents System 2 Recommended Hardware n a de toti ee 2 Updating 6 2 6 5 Licensing 2 Activation SCKGGmnm us ados i tener eh eei corda DR ERN reed Re Ee VN 2 WED ACEIVATION PR ETATE TEE E 3 Manual Web Activation trei itin b et 4 0 4 da
54. sinodog 26 Le ews 06 62 gz Jepinoug eue leag 92 sz 7 gels EZ 2 zz Bupiong dn voig 712 sqejs junoo Sesso1jsid 22d s 0 pue sdwing 5 upper syun sessensid VL LO 00091d emis AD owen 1SOd D 90 000914 10 000914 TO CN 80 000914 0 000914 1 000914 50 000914 7 gt 2 x 000914 7 000914 0 dSDHdDHS 0 000914 10 00091 21 000914 187 Workshops Workshop 2 Inventory Objectives Create new inventory within a PAVER database and understand how to add digital images to the image library or store a link to images located elsewhere Database Create a new database by clicking File gt gt New Datab
55. 26 320 11 30 259 77 0 00 00 500 0 00 Earliest Work Date Latest Work Date Total Project Sections TotalProjectArea rea Units 8 1 2010 8717201 2 816 503 82 4 1 253 262 53 59 28 03 8 1 2010 8 172010 2 717 664 57 73 110925003 5 1402z After viewing the tables close out of M amp R plan and save the projects as required as seen below Workshops 300 Save projects that have changed to the required projects list Project Save To Required List RW 5 23 Yes L Rw 14 32 Yes Projects that are already in the required list but have changed in this plan Save this plan for later review or modification Now that the projects have been labeled as required work reopen the M amp R Plan and rerun the analysis exactly as it was before but include the required work as seen below Execute the Plan Plan Setup M amp R Categories Families Project Planning Minimum years between formulated projects and work planning recommendations Formulated Plan Projects after Projects D Minimum Years Before Project Recommending Work Count projects against the budget 3 Reset All to Default View Existing Report Execute Workshops 301 After the plan has been Executed view the planned projects on the GIS map by selecting the Project Assignments view on the GIS form After Conditions by Y
56. Budget Categories Families l Project Planning Constrain Budget Determine Budget Consequence Determine Budget Requirements Iteration Budget requirements Determine Annual Budget For a nd Co nd i t Condition Stabilization 7 Backlog Elimination Stabilization options in 14 years Maximum Number of Iterations to Achieve Goal 10 Maintain current area weighted PCI Condition Tolerance 2 3 Reach area weighted PCI of Table Default Priority Table v Edi Apply Inflation Rate 2 View Existing Report Execute Selecting Backlog Elimination will report what M amp R budget 15 required to achieve an overall section level PCI above critical within X amount of years Once Backlog Elimination is selected the year toggle and Maximum Number of Iteration to Achieve Goal options appear The year toggle sets the number of years to reach backlog elimination This value must be equal to or less than the total number of years the report was set to run on the Plan Setup tab Like the Condition Stabilization goal the maximum number of iterations tells the program how many times to run to achieve the desired outcome M amp R Plan Parameters Plan Setup l Budget M amp R Categories l M amp R Families Project Planning Constrain Budget Determine Budget Consequence Determine Budget Requirements Iteration Budg et requirements Determine Annual Budget For
57. Collect Model Data 2 Review Model Data 3 Use Boundary Outlier 4 Options 5 View Equation and Stats B Family Sections used Network ID Branch ID to create the D TAXIWAY __ Neil amp rms B2 TAXIWAY model 1 TAXIWAY Neil amp rms E TAXIWAY Neil amp rms B3 TAXIWAY Unassign Fay ly Selected Family Assignment Tool add other pavement features to the model click on the Family Assignment Tool button The Family Assignment Tool can be used to edit what pavement sections are assigned to the tool Family Model Selected Current model Taxiway o B Edit Family Model definition Critical condition for this Family Model 55 Sections not assigned to this Family Model Sections assigned to this Family Model Branch ID As sign families Sections not assigned to any Family Model of sections to the model LE TAXIW TAXIW ADDAA ane Show all Show all C Show subset C Show subset Workshops 276 Workshop 13 Condition Analysis Objective Create a report indicating the history of condition and the future of condition Database Open the Roads and Parking Workshop 13 database by clicking File gt gt Open Database selecting Roads and Parking Workshop 13 pvr and clicking Open Workshops 277 Hints amp Solution Guide For Worksh
58. Families Project Planning Localized Stopgap M amp A Localized Preventive obal Preventive MajorM amp R Use Assigned M amp R Families Default Preventive M amp R Family Cost By PCI V6 1 Default AC AF Loc Prev 9 E dit Preventive localized above critical PCI Cost Multiplier by PCI Multiplier 1 View Existing Report Execute Workshops 284 Plan Setup Categories Families Project Planning Localized StopgapM amp R Localized Preventive Preventive MER Major Use Assigned Families Default Major Family By PCI Default Major E dit Cost Multiplier by PCI Mutiplier f View Existing Report Execute Now select Execute to run the M amp R Work plan Plan Setup M amp R Categories l Families Project Planning Don t include any planned Required Work work in analysis r Plan Projects after Recommending Work Select Execute to run and view the M amp R Work isting hep Execute Close plan results Workshops 285 EMS Report Viewer C EMS Program Files Paver rpwdeflt wp View To Detail Close Annual Condition After Repair rea Weighted 1 ER Jul 2010 Es MANSFIELD alb MANSFIELD 05 23 MANSFIELD 14 32 MANSFIELD APRON MANSFIELD RUNUP AREA Ag
59. If an accurate representation of measurement and georeferencing is required your newly translated shapefile will require manipulation Typical AutoCAD maps display differing attributes in multiple layers In contrast a shapefile contains an attribute table which can contain information for many variables After the AutoCAD drawing is translated to a shapefile attributes will probably have to be added or imported as each translation will only result in one attribute being carried over to a single shapefile 3 Digitize your section definition polygons from an image and then scale and or georeference your new shapefile as necessary Accurate shapefile creation 15 undoubtedly easier with the help of a person who is proficient in GIS This is especially true 1f accurate georeferencing 15 required and or desired Shapefile Modification Section definitions often need to be changed This may mean simple name changes in your PAVERTM database or deleting adding or changing the shape of the section polygons There are two pathways to update your sectioning The difference between the two methods is in how the polygons are associated with your database In PAVER each pavement section is assigned a unique ID a random string consisting of 20 characters numbers and or symbols When a polygon is linked to its PAVERTM data it too is Chapter 14 GIS Tools 106 assigned the same unique ID as the corresponding data The u
60. Latest Work OS T Latest Traffic Latest NDT zl Y Deflection Query as shown Latest Inspections z 21 zl Sample Sample C Distress E 2 Extrapolated Dist Latest Conditions zf 1 EZ 21 Clear All Clear Current Clear Current Tables Table Bow View Text Workshops 260 B Select Next and review the selections shown on the map Calculate Construction Date PAVER 6 0 RC 23 Pen 3elect Select Zoom Zoom Zoom Area Area In Out Locate Mode mouse clicks synchronize the tree and the map but do not Affect selection Click Calculate review the sections items that willbe ch d Record Count Generate Work Report NewokD 1072771988 117871999 1071571988 8 8 2001 1072771988 8 8 2001 107171997 2 5 2002 1 13 1988 2 7 2000 1 13 1980 5 9 1991 10 1 1999 2 5 2002 11 1 2001 2 5 2002 Show rejected dates E Select Apply Workshops 261 Work History results of calculated Last Construction Dates Workshops Work History Report 1 of 3 Pavement Database Neil Armstrong Date 04 25 2007 Network Branch APRON APRON Section A Surface PCC 100 0808 2001 APRON Rank 5 Length 320 00 Ft width 13300 Ft True Area 48 960 00 Work Work Work hickness Major Dale Code Description Cost Comments 09 9001 BCALC Back calcula
61. Likewise when a branch is copied none of its sections are copied Clicking Delete deletes the selected network Images launches the EMS Image Viewer and Close closes the Inventory program You may also assign values for user defined fields once parameters for the user defined fields have been established See System Tables gt gt Define User Fields When completed the inventory can be sorted based on user defined criteria for many applications in PAVER Creating Networks The first step in building a pavement inventory for a military installation city or airport is to create a network A hierarchical structure exists for pavement inventory items in PAVERTM 6 Networks are the parents of branches and branches are the parents of sections To create pavement branches and sections first create a network To create a network click Inventory on the PAVER Button Bar The inventory data form appears with the Network file card displayed Click the New button at the bottom of the Network file card to populate all fields identifying the current network The fields Network ID Name and Comments should be edited to the desired values You may also enter data in any User defined Fields that you have created liil Inventory 001 lt None gt lt None gt 1 Network 2 Branch Network ID 001 Network Name USACERL Network file card Network level comments omment Network for USACERL roads User Defined Fislde
62. M amp R Families are assigned to four specific M amp R policies arranged in tabular form Localized Stopgap M amp R Localized Preventative M amp R Global Preventative M amp R and Major M amp R On each of the four policy tabs there is a checkbox to Use Assigned M amp R Families If the checkbox is selected for any of the policies the box below will prompt the user for information regarding unassigned sections On the Localized Stopgap M amp R Localized Preventative M amp R and Major M amp R tabs the individual Cost By PCI tables can be chosen by the drop down arrow or viewed by the Edit button On the Global Preventative M amp R tab the cost table can also be chosen or Edited and the specific Global Work Type defined For further information about editing any of the policy Cost By PCI tables please refer to Chapter 3 System Tables Like the Budget tab there is also a Multiply Cost Chapter 13 M amp R Plan 98 window that can be used scale the already existing cost table which 15 being used If none of the boxes are checked or M amp R Families have been created will assign all sections to the default family for that policy Please refer to Chapter 12 M amp R Family Assignment for more information on assigning sections to M amp R Families 3M amp R Plan Parameters Plan Setup Budget l Categories l Families Project Planning P ol j Cy S el e cti on Localized Stopgap l Localized Preventive M amp R
63. Select Columns Select Rows Network 1 gt DATE Section Inspected Surface Move Up Latest Work Sample Units Inspected gt gt Latest Traffic Total Sample Units in Sectic Move Latest lt Down Deflection Latest Inspections Sample Sample Con Distress Extrapolated Distres Latest Conditions In the tree list select Latest Conditions Under Select Columns click on PCI and move it to the right side Workshops 210 Memorized Reports Record Count Memorize Delete Select Columns Select Rows Network H Branch PCI E Section Latest Work PCI Pet Climate Latest Traffic PCI Pet Load Latest NDT PCI Pct Other Dav Deflection Latest Inspections H Sample Sample Con Distress Extrapolated Distres Latest Conditions E Click OK to view the report Workshops 211 Workshop 4b GIS Objectives Learn how to import assign and use a GIS shapefile in PAVER Database Open the Class Workshop 4b database by clicking File gt gt Open Database selecting Class Workshop 4b pvr and then click Open Tasks 1 Use GIS Tool PAVER Shapefile Converter to import a sectioned GIS shapefile 2 Use the PAVER GIS assignment tool to link the previously imported shapefile to sections in the PAVER Class Workshop 4b database 3 Create some GIS views that show Surface Type and Last PCI
64. Selections which allows the user to select the desired sections using any of the PAVER Selectors such as the Tree Selector Sections selected using the Tree Selector are automatically placed in the download queue 2 The second way to choose the sections to download is to Use the Inspection Schedule which allows the user to choose sections based upon their Inspection Schedule Based on the Inspection Schedule selected PAVER automatically selects the appropriate sections to inspect 3 The final method to choose the sections to download is to Use the Query Tool which uses the PAVER Query Tool to search for all desired sections Once the desired sections are found using the second two methods click Add Items to move the sections into the download queue To remove a section from the queue just highlight the row or rows to be removed and click Remove As soon as all the desired sections are cued click Transfer and the sections are downloaded into the handheld program This overwrites any inspection data that is on the handheld Be sure that all data from the handheld has been backed up into PAVER before transferring new data to the handheld Fortunately PAVER alerts the user if data that has not been backed up is about to be overwritten When writing a comment the user must first make sure that the cursor is located in the comment box Any added section sample or distress may be deleted by clicking Del Sections do
65. Set Clear Property value is a number B Cancel E Click Next and then select the subset of Interstate Drive Stored Criteri OE Select None Record Count E Select Subset E Copy Dele C Select All E Network Select Rows Branch Field Comparison Compare To Query as shown Econ Name INTERSTATE DRIVE Latest Work Latest Traffic Latest NDT zi E Deflection Latest Inspections zi Sample Sample Cor Distress 2 Extrapolated Distres Latest Conditions 5 E Clear All Clear Current Clear Current 2 Tables Table Row lt Back Workshops 263 B Click Next and then review the selections shown on the map E Inventory Property Change Wizard PAVER 6 0 RC 23 Pan SHEE diseno Center Print Area Area In Out NV EE EEE EE a affect selection Locate Mode mouse clicks synchronize the tree and the map but do not s Select Next review the sections and then click Apply to apply all 3 lanes to Interstate Drive Review this by going to the Inventory form via the PAVERTM button bar and selecting the IINTE Branch Interstate Drive as seen below Network ine INTERSTATE RESEARCH PARK Branch inte INTERSTATE DRIVE zi Section From FISHER ROAD E RE
66. Summary Charts Branch Use Labels System About Titles tab a Markers Trends Overlay Error Bar Background Legend 2D Gallery 3D Gallery Style Titles Axis 3D Fonts Enter er data as Graph Title Condition by Pavement Use shown Wt Avg Condition Bottom Title Branch Use Left Title Title Condition BranchUse C or Horizontal C Up C Down OTHER 15 18 PARKING PARKING Right Title 23 28 ROADWAY 39 48 STORAGE STORAGE Tie ry 4 5 Horizontal C up Cancel Apply Now Help To export the table right click on the Table and select Export To Excel After this is done review and close out of the report summary section gt All Sections Summary Charts Branch Use 0 386 3 Condition by Pavement Use Vit Avg Condition PARKING ROADWAY Branch Use Right click for Branch Use WtAvg Condiion PctAreal Sections Sections a ZEEN Cal 1 1 table options 8 OTHER 92 02 72 135 SqFt Zoom 15 18 PARKING 76 61 356 801 SqFt ne 28 ROADwAY 78 58 484 818 SqFt Revise Layout 48 STORAGE 25 17 36 537 SqFt Save Layout 5 All Sections Subset of Sections Search ort Export ToExcel Print
67. Survey or Detail Comment regarding Sample PClVideoFrame txt FieldA FieldB FieldC FieldD FieldE FieldF FieldG FieldH FieldI FieldJ RSPARK IFARB 01 6 5 2000 1FRM2 52 95 SqM START LONGITUDE Where FieldA The identifier of the section which owns this inspection NETWORKID BRANCHID SECTIONID SPACER FieldB Identifies the date common to all data from this inspection multi day inspections just pick a day FieldC Assigned by video vendor Identifier for this video frame must be unique within sec tion and inspection date FieldD Identifies this sample optional FieldE Size of frame FieldF Unit of measure as defined in PAVER for the frame size FieldG Appendix B Distance from start of film to begining of inspection frame optional 142 FieldH FieldI FieldJ PCIVideoDistress txt FieldA FieldB FieldC FieldD FieldE FieldF FieldG FieldH FieldI FieldJ RSPARK IFARB 01 6 5 2000 L lFRM2 7 H 1 46304001808166 M EDGE CRACKING Where FieldA FieldB FieldC FieldD FieldE FieldF FieldG FieldH FieldI Distance from start of film to end of inspection frame optional LATITUTE GPS String of Degree Minutes Seconds optional LONGITUDE GPS String of Degree Minutes Seconds optional The identifier of the section which owns this inspection NETWORKID BRANCHID SECTIONID SPACER Identifies the date common to al
68. The View Equations and Stats card displays the intercept and coefficient values for the equation estimated to be the best fit for the data The card also lists various goodness of fit statistics for the estimated model Assign Family The Assign Family tab allows individual sections to be assigned to the prediction models they created Sections assigned to a prediction model curve make up a family To assign the entire family of sections used to create the prediction curve select Assign Family to Sections After this selection all of the sections will be listed on this card To unassign any section from a family highlight the section in the table and select Unassign Family from Selected Section The Family Assignment tool 15 described in detail in Chapter 10 Condition Model Family Assignment Other Condition Prediction Model Features When the Prediction Model is open a View menu appears at the top ofthe window allowing the user to turn on and off various graphing features including Calculated Curve X Range Boundaries Outliers Good Points and Bad Points These features only affect the view of the data and not the underlying statistical routines For example if you use the view menu to turn off the boundaries the boundaries do not appear on the plot of the graph However points in the model that do not meet the boundary conditions are still excluded from the modeling process Chapter 9 Condition Prediction Model 82 10 Co
69. There have been five generations of handheld devices that run the Microsoft operating software for a more detailed history see http en wikipedia org wiki Pocket PC Versions 1 The first generation was released in 1999 It received little use and we will ignore it here 2 The second generation was released in 2000 There were two classes of devices called Pocket PC and Handheld PC This generation was sometimes also referred to as Pocket PC 2000 This generation ran version 2 x of the Windows CE operating system 3 The third generation was released in 2002 and was called PC 2002 This generation ran version 3 x of the Windows CE operating system This is the generation for which the Pocket Inspector software was designed 4 The fourth generation was released in 2003 and was called Pocket PC 2003 or Windows Mobile 2003 There was also a version called Windows Mobile 2003 SE For our purposes these two versions are identical Both run the Windows CE 4 2 operating system With the addition of special packages this version was able to run some of the software written for the previous version 5 The current fifth generation was released in May 2005 and is called Windows Mobile 5 0 It runs version 5 0 of the Windows CE operating system With this version Microsoft abandoned backward compatibility with Pocket PC 2002 There are two versions of the pocket inspector software P
70. This wizard is limited to inert properties which do not affect the PCI calculations or prediction modeling of family models Access the Inventory Property Change Wizard from the PAVER Button Bar by choosing Wizards and then Set Properties On Multiple Inventory Items Start by specifying the property to revise Under Change Property Values on select the type of the property as Networks Branches or Sections will then provide a list of available properties in the Property drop down list box where the user can select the property to change Once the property is selected PAVER will display the available actions that can be performed on the property Selecting Clear will clear the specified property of the sections If allowed the user can also Set or change a property of the sections If the Property value comes from a list PAVERTM will provide the list where the user can select the value to set the property to If the Property value is a number then the user is able to enter in the value which the property is set to Once the desired property and action is specified click Next and select the sections to update clear with the EMSTM Query Tool Select includes all sections whereas choosing Select Subset allows the user to build a subset of sections Choosing Select None and clicking Next will allow the user to utilize the GIS Tree Selector to select the section s to be included After selecting the desired sections cli
71. Today s Date Default Years In Plan 5 Default Priority Table Inflation Rate 3 96 Do not use Global Maintenance Compare the 3 scenarios Which is most cost effective View the results of the work plan in the GIS viewer In what ways would the GIS view help you in reporting the results of the plan In what ways would the GIS view help you in planning work and developing projects m When closing the report viewer you will be prompted to and should save the report outputs for each scenario as the reports will be later utilized Workshops 281 Hints amp Solution Guide For Workshop 14 1 M amp R Plan Plan using a Specific Budget Amount Open the M amp R Plan module on the button bar File Tables Preferences Add Ins Window H Inventory a Reports Pred Modeling Cond Analysis GIS Tree Sel EE List Sel bh Wizards Visual Menu Help 6 0 About m On the Plan Setup tab the M amp R plan will be executed on the entire database Start the plan on today s date run plan for 5 years and select the Critical PCI method for the M amp R Plan Type Plan Setup Budget l M amp R Categories l Families Project Planning Select Inventory for Planning Use the actual Actual Database database Alltems C Build Selection using Query Tool Se lect th e start Select Plan Start Date and Plan Length date and plan tatDate 771 2000 Years
72. gt Open Database selecting Class Workshop 8 pvr and clicking Open Tasks 1 At the network level create additional user defined field to display network s elevation Workshops 242 Hints amp Solution Guide For Workshop 8 1 How to create the network level user defined field ES Create an additional user field by selecting Tables gt gt Define User Fields gt gt Additional User Fields Define Nsort1 through Nsort3 Edit Inventory Pick Lists Define Bsort1 through Bsort3 M amp R Plan Tables and Families Define Ssort1 through Ssort3 Condition Tools Customize NSort BSort SSort Headings Misc Other Tables Additional User Fields In the Edit User defined Fields box select Network and then click New For the Field Name enter Network Elevation for Type select Real Number from the drop down menu and then click OK You can then close the User Field Editor form E User Field Editor User Defined Fields for Network New Existing Fields Deleted Fields Recycle Bin User Fields for Network Extension State New user New Copy Delete Rename defined field Field Name Define the field Network Elevation Type Create at the system level T Digits before d point Heal Number 71 Create for this database only 4 Digits after decimal point B Default Value Verify that the User defined Fields were created properly by opening I
73. ovrPCC 2 ass Paver ip Seal Asphalt ortland Cement avingBlocks Asphalt Nameand urface Treatment Description Alpha Alpha Alpha Gravel Alpha C Alpha _ Alpha Alpha 02 _ Alpha define new surface type Workshops 246 m To verify that the new surface has been added open the Inventory module and try to create a new section using the new surface type PPC Network MFD APRON A Network Branch 3 Section Properties Conditions Families Section ID fa FBO From wn Surface Type fac Rank lt E Length 482 00 width 163 50 Ft Area 55 rw J Last Constr 71371963 Date Date was back caleulated Area Adjustment 777777 sar True Area 84 685 00 SqFt Calculate Calculate ndatory In or n Section ID From S Constructed 1271971985 Length 10 00 Width 0 00 Surf SY Ren Type PPE Section must have an ID Cancel Newly defined surface type are editing Current Values Historical Values Images 0 _ Copy __ Workshops 247 Workshop 9 b Creation Of A New Branch Use Objectives Create a new branch use of Warehouse Database For this workshop you may choose to use your choice of a database Note The creation of a new branch use is done at the branch level therefore it does not matter which datab
74. resultant surface produced when a given work type is performed over different surface types Yellow fields indicate changes in surface type m Cost by Work Type Tables This is similar to Localized The user can create different cost tables depending on the scenario Global Preventive M amp R Tables and Families DER Cost by Work Type Tables 4 Global M amp R Families 1 Work Types 2 Consequent Surface Code Work Unit Application Interval Resulting Increase in Life Changes Surface Order Micro Surfacing No Global M amp R Overlay AC Thin Global Surface Seal Coal Tar Surface Seal Fog Seal Surface Seal Rejuvenating Surface Treatment Single Bitum Surface Treatment Slurry Seal Surface Treatment Sand m Endi Endi on kadi kadi kadi kand D Chapter 3 System Tables 33 Major M amp R Tables And Families El Work Types All work types considered to be major are listed here E Cost by Work Type Tables All costs associated with Major M amp R work types are listed here E Cost by Condition All costs associated with specific condition types are listed here Consequent Surface This is similar to Global and lists surface types which result from the performance of work types on different surfaces Minimum Condition This table allows the u
75. work 1 Add Work Item Section Level Work Cold Mill 2 in Material Type 5 Thickness 0 in Work Date 5 1 2800 Unit Cost 0 30 7 SqFt Calculate Unit Cost From T able New Default Layer Construct Y Quantity 580700 02 SqFt Total Cost 204 210 01 Calculate Comments After this table is complete either choose Apply to add the work item and then continue to add work items or OK to return to the Project Planner gt gt Section Level Work tab Add another work item by choosing Apply and entering in the next work item as shown in the image below Enter a Unit Cost of 2 00 S SqFt and again enter a work date of 8 01 2010 Project Ay Work Date 8 1 2010 14 32 Section MANSFIELD 14 32 Section Area 680 700 02 Work Type Material Type d Thickness 0 in Unit Cost 2 00 SqFt Calculate Unit Cost From Table New Default Major Quantity 55070002 SqFt Total Cost 31 361 400 04 Workshops Calculate 298 Project sections and work items added to the highlighted section Workshops After this is complete select OK On the Project Planner gt gt Section Level Work tab the work items added for section 14 32 A are listed in the table on the right as shown in the below image Project Planner o m Current Project RW 14 32 Earliest Work Date 71 2010 Total Project Area 1 253 263 5 Pr
76. 00 Width 100 00 Ft Date was back calcu Calc Area fiso co0 00 Area B o SqFt True 0 I C Calculate 10 6 Calculat Category 2 Lanes Spaces 0 Shoulder Street Type Grade 0 Comment User 5 SectionUser SectionUser __ are editing Curent Yalues Historical Values Images 0 New Copy Delete 193 E To create the next section first create a new branch by selecting New on the Branch tab then create the section utilizing the same procedure from above Since this section is concrete several new fields will appear in the middle of the section form Enter slab length and width and the program will automatically calculate the number of slabs and the joint length Despite the automatic calculation the user can still edit the actual number of slabs and joint length ED List Selector Network nece 9 SS Branch RW 6 24 Runway 524 Section Fem 5 0 1 18 00 2 Network Exercise RW 6 24 02 200000 2 Branch 1 Branch ID RW 6 24 Branch Name Runway 624 Branch Use w NumberofSections 100 n for Length Sum of Sections Branch ID Branch Use RGRDWAY 73 M Cale Area Sum 130 000 00 SqFt Sections OK Cancel Comment Fe pa You are editing Current Values Histori
77. 71 Create for this database only E Click Add and change the Name from New to Paved AC Repeat this process to add Paved PCC Gravel and Grass shoulder types then close the window mE Check your work by opening the inventory form and clicking on the branch tab There should be a field at the bottom named Shoulder Type that has the following values in its drop down list Paved AC Paved PCC Gravel and Grass User Field Editor User Defined Fields for Branch New Existing Fields Deleted Fields Recycle User Fields for Branch Extension Shoulder Type m New Edit Copy Delete Re Type System leve This databa Manually enter info Add Delete Workshops 196 2 Branch E Branch ID anro Branch Name access for Bldg 103 Branch Use ROADWAY z Number of Sections 00 in Branch Length Sum of 995 00 Width Avg of 5 00 Sections Sections Calc Area Sum of 1 131 00 Sections Area Adjustment po True Area 1 131 00 sr Comment User Defined Fields Grass Gravel Paved Paved PCC ou are editing Curent Values Historical Values houlder Type Images 0 New Delete 3 To store images with the database Open the inventory form and using the list selector choose the Network named Exercise Branch Spring St and Section 02 Click on the Images button as seen below 3 Se
78. Airport database Workshops 224 Hints amp Solution Guides For Workshop 5 1 To export pavement data to an e65 export file for this example use Interstate Research Park B If PAVER is open close and open the PAVER 6 DB Tools icon by double clicking it Click Export PAVER data to an e65 file and then Execute Select the first option in the Options box Export pavement data and associated condition families Note This tool can be used to make copies of the system tables for use with different databases Also creating an e65 file is the best way to back up data for archiving Click Execute for export form e65 selected Export options Select file to export Destination of export file Workshops C Import PAYER data from an e40 or e50 or e60 or e65 file Export PAYER data to an e65 file Combine Subset PAVER databases Create PAVER Inventory from Shape Data Exportto an e55 readable by PAVER 5 3 8 6 1 6 Options v Export pavement data and associated condition families Export system tables Include other non associated condition families Tables Inventory Picklists Include Images Condition Families Include Virtual Inventory v Condition Types and Categories Include Required Projects v User Defined Fields User Defined Reports File Selection Pavement file to export Browse Export path and filena
79. Analysis report The Work Plan Parameters window is organized with these five tabs Plan Setup Budget M amp R Categories M amp R Families and Project Planning When the Work Plan report is configured Execute the report and view the results in the Report Viewer Tab 1 Plan Setup The first step when developing a work plan is to establish an inventory On the Plan Setup tab the user can decide if they would like to run an analysis on the Actual Database that 15 currently open or a preciously created Virtual Database If the user decides to use an Actual Database two options are available for selecting inventory items to be reported Items and Build Selection using Query Tool The default is set to All but to choose a subset of sections or records for the report select Build Selection using Query Tool The EMS Query Tool window will appear allowing the selection of a subset Ifa graphical selection of subsets is wanted select None and then OK in the EMS Query Tools window A GIS map and tree selector window will appear allowing the user to select the desired sections to include in the report Note that if a GIS map has not been converted into PAVER M the GIS window will be blank for further information regarding converting a GIS map into see Chapter 14 GIS Tools After selections are made in either the Query or GIS windows click OK to exit out of the selection process In the M amp R Plan Parameters window t
80. Details Input Directory A Select Options File 0 PCIVideo ASCII Wizard DER Inspections File 3891 Select Select the directory that contains the ASCII files to be imported into the current Sample File px EX Condition Data rame Sasa Import Wizard Distress File helps guide Select PAVER to the Condition File correct files Select PAVER Databas Current PAVEMENT Database MANSFIELD vui ree Wizard Close Condition Data Import Database The Condition Data Import Database feature allows the user to import data into PAVER using mdb file format Locate the database file to import by first selecting the Input Directory and then selecting the Database Name For more information on video inspection import data format for Access Databases see Appendix B Directory Locations Input Files Input Directory 5 PROGRAM FILESNPCIVIDEONSAMPLENENGLISHN 5 Database Name ntermediateFile mdb Select Database Import Close Chapter 16 Add ins 127 Handheld Data Import Pocket Inspector Software And Pocket PC Devices The market for handheld devices is immature and still changing rapidly Microsoft and hardware vendors mostly Compaq and Hewlett Packard who have now merged have produced several generations of devices and their operating software Unfortunately the different generations are by and large not compatible
81. If an invalid activation code has been entered the screen below will be shown indicating that has not been activated and further steps are required to successfully activate your software PAVER was not activated Check your Serial Number or Activation Code You may need to contact your distributor to resolve the issue Deactivate a License To deactivate PAVER open the program and select Deactivate License under the Preferences drop down menu Chapter 1 Overview PAVER 0 5 2 File Tables Preferences Add Ins Window Help H inventory English Units Modeling W Cond Analysis Plan GIS Tree Sel Metric Units Tool Bars Default Settings Save Selector Layout The deactivation screen will appear with the serial number currently in use Click the Automated Web Deactivation button Deactivate will release the license held by this copy of PAYER This will allow the use of this Serial Number on another PAYER install Serial number from your copy of PAYER C c Jo JE 0 After PAVER is deactivated you can install the software on a different computer Deactivation quantity is dependent upon PAVER product type Academic Demo etc 6 5 Introduction To PAVER 6 for Windows is an automated pavement management system PMS It is a decision making tool for the development of cost effective maintenance and repair alter
82. Inspection Setup Create Inspection Records Create Inspection Forms Inspector Name Andy Doll Select desired Bsspection ti ons Distress Detail Level Print Comments for C None Sections C Summary Inspections Detail deu Distresses Calculate Sample PCI 4 Yes C No Inspection Records Before data from an inspection can be entered into Inspection Records need to be created for the sections that were inspected Inspection Records consist of a record of the date of inspection The Inspection Setup Wizard allows the creation of Inspection Records for multiple sections If the user wishes to delete or edit an inspection record or to add additional inspection data this is done in the PCI form Inspection Records can also be created one at a time for each section in the PCI form Inspection Forms During an inspection the use of Inspection Forms is a convenient method for recording the distresses When an Inspection Form is created for a given section using the Inspection Setup Wizard the form will include relevant information for that section such as PID inspector name inspection date branch use surface type location details and section dimensions According to the surface type of the section the form will additionally include a list of the pertinent distress codes for that type of surface For each sample of a given section the form will have an area to r
83. Intersection with 3 Intersection with 4 intersection ty pe Intersection with Traffic Signals Yield at Intersection Chapter 3 System Tables 27 Customize NSort BSort And SSort Headings This window allows you to set the values for the User Name the name displayed in PAVERTM and the User Width the size of the field for selected preset fields in The first two fields Table Name and Field Name are displayed in italics and cannot be edited Table Name and i User Sort 1 Field Name cannot BSORT2 Branch User Sort 2 be edited BSORT3 Branch User Sort 3 NSORT1 Network User Sort 1 NSORT2 Network User Sort 2 NSORT3 Network User Sort 3 _ SECTION SSORT1 Section User Sort 1 SECTION 550812 Section User Sort 2 SECTION SSORT3 Section User Sort 3 Additional User Fields This section allows you to create user defined fields in which you may enter data From the PAVER main menu select Tables gt gt Define User Fields gt gt Additional User Fields to access the User Field Editor On the New Existing Fields tab the user can create a new field by first selecting the desired inventory level network branch or section and selecting new Within the new window the following information needs to be defined m Field Name The entry for this is displayed as the Additional User Field name when using this capability in P
84. Major M amp R By Year option on the GIS view form and configure your screen to display both the Project Planner window as well as the GIS view as seen below Single click on each of the four sections seen below individually to see that the Project Planner window responds and highlights each of the sections Include each of these sections in the RW 14 32 project 296 Select these sections on the map and assign them to the Taxiway project Workshops EJ Project Planner 9 Current Project RW 14 32 Earliest Work Date 5 0 Total Project Area 1 25 New Delete Copy Rename Latest Work Project Sections Project Work Section Level Work AllSections Sections in projects not in projects Sections with recommended work that are not in projects Sections in Current Project gr Total Project Cost QU Project Completed Move to Work History Work Item Views NetworkID NetworkID BranchlD SectionlD MANSFIELD 14 MANSFIELD FBO B MANSFIELD MANSFIELD MANSFIELD BranchlD SectionID MANSFIELD MANSFIELD MANSFIELD MANSFIELD c2 14 32 B D MANSFIELD APRON c3 MANSFIELD RUNUP AREA 14 MANSFIELD AREA 32 MANSFIELD T HANGAR MANSFIELD T HANGAR B MANSFIELD T HANGAR t MANSFIELD T HANGAR D MANSFIELD TWY A1
85. PAVER GIS Assignment Tool option Click the Continue button located at the bottom of the Visual Menu window Visual Menu GIS Assignment 215 Assignment Oo Inventory PAVER Shapefile Converter Work Inspection Conditions Reports Condition Prediction Model Condition Model Family Assignment Condition Analysis M amp R Family Definition Family Assignment M amp R Plan GIS Tools Selectors Wizards GIS Tools e o le e e Continue Workshops 216 m The GIS Assignment Tool form will now open as seen below Print Select Zoom Zoom Pan Select A nae Zoom In om Center rspark shp Assignment Assigned Assigned and Selected Unassigned Locate Mode mouse clicks synchronize the tree and the map but do not affect selection E Double click on PAVER 6 5 to reveal the Networks tree Now right click on the Networks and select Expand Sections as seen below Double Click on PAVER 6 5 and then right click on Networks Now select Expand Sections Locate Mode mouse clicks synchronize tee and the map but do not affect selection Workshops 217 amp GIS Assignment Tool Since all of the sections in the database s inventory have not been assigned to the GIS polygons all of the sections will be colored yellow on both the tree selector and the GIS M
86. Progam Fies Pavement Database Distress data s associated shapefile Pavement ESRI ShapeFile s Previous Net Ext Chapter 15 Wizards 123 The third display screen searches for all valid and invalid XML files that were selected for import This allows the user to remove or correct any corrupted information before the inspection information is converted and imported into Valid and invalid XML Fies Processed 2 vai 0 XML data files The fourth display screen converts XML data to inspection files using either PID or UTM After the files are converted the user can choose to print or save the log files containing the conversion information Inspection file raa Data Image Inspection Import e eeu conversion p gt Convert XML to Inspection fies using UTM Convert XML to Inspection using PIO methods Path a The fifth display screen is the final step to importing the inspection data By selecting import the user will have added the inspection data to the database The number of successful as well as failed imported inspections are listed along with process messages and inspection import messages Chapter 15 Wizards 124 Import to PAVER Process Information Total Sample size too small for Inspection Total Sample Size 6038 6976 65 000 00 SF Section 37161 2151337934 400 000 00 SF PID N
87. RUTTING C 44 CORRUGATION 49 OIL SPILLAGE 54 SHOVING 45 DEPRESSION 50 PATCHING 7 55 SLIPPAGE CR Distress Severity Distress Quantity Low o Medium High C N A Close 2 Work Entry Wizard Neil Armstrong database a Using the Neil Armstrong database open the Work Entry wizard via the Wizard icon on the PAVER button bar Select the Work Entry wizard and then Add Work on the Work wizard form Enter in the information as shown below and then select OK Work Wizard Enter work to be applied to sections _ Work Description werkDate UnitCost Thickness Thickness Units Totalt Add Work Sl Add Work Item BAX Work Category Global MR Work Surface Treatment Slurry Seal Work Date 11 27 2007 Material Thickness 0 Calculate Total Cost from Unit Calculate Section Cost From Total Cost and Section Area Cost and Section Area Settings to apply to all Unit Cost 0 35 4 SqFt New Default Rds amp R w_Global Workshops 256 Enter the Project Name Number Class Work and Phase 1 Enter work to be applied to sections T Work to be added Edit Work Delete Work Settings to apply to all the individual work items Project Name Number Class Work Phase Comment m Click Next and then select the subset of AC Taxiways Select Reco
88. Rate of deterioration pts vr 2 25 5 9 29 interval between inspections n n n UN E n t er yea rs For each section measure the interval from that section s last inspection be t ween For all sections measure the interval from a fixed date 22 2006 g s inspection v Fixed Interval yrs n Sampling Strategy Fixed Percent Projectlevel Sampling Inspection Expenses per sample unit Cost 100 Labor Man Hours 05 Time Hours 0 25 View Existing Report Execute Open Saved Inspection Schedule This utility is accessed under Visual Menu gt gt Inspection Conditions gt gt Open Saved Inspection Schedule Navigate to the directory where you saved the inspection schedule as a rpi file and double click the file name to open the saved schedule in the same view as when you originally created it Chapter 7 Inspections Conditons 69 8 Heports Summesrv icones idiot 71 Standard DE i ME 71 User defined IINE EU BM MEME DUE MIR 73 Display Memorized Report e tuntur 73 Create NEW M M 73 Edit Current mt 74 GIS ROPO S 74 o EE E E A E E 75 Esa EAEE AEA EAA A EE AEAEE 76 Assignment Of PCI Deterioratio
89. SE ye Buidung synodog 76 poysiiod Le yews 06 a61e7 62 Buppeuo Jeau 82 Jepinous eue 7 2 leag oz sz Ageing yz qas ez zz Lz sqejs junoo sossonsig 224 js BuueueaM 61 Gs lems js aBeddiig s js Suny Bulssaig peoipes uo sejouod eJ doug epinougjeue1 0 I 0 pue sduing gt Js s Js 20 sessensig 9V Sample Roadway And Parking Lot Network vL L0 0009 1d uonoas yoursg Jequnw euieN Aouaby 1SOd Q DUOWSN 186 U HUO 6000 Bldg D Workshops Final Sectioned Roadway And Parking Lot Network Answer Key 59sso43sig HLNON 000 41 26 0 S 96 se inouound
90. Section ID Last Construction Date Years Since Inspection Last Inspection Date and Latest PCI Workshops 205 Hints amp Solution Guides For Workshop 4a 1 To use the Summary Charts Open Roads and Parking database by clicking File gt gt Open Database gt gt Roads and Parking pvr Select Reports from the button bar File Tables Preferences Add Ins Window Help inventory Qi wok Reports Pred Modeling lif Cond Analysis Gis Tree Sel EBListSel gy Wizards E Visual Menu Help 6 0 About Select Summary Charts and click Continue E On the X Axis drop down list choose Branch Use and on the Y Axis drop down list choose Wt Avg Condition Summary Charts fees X amp JR X Anis Branch Use v YAris Wt Avg Condition Y axis info Branchuse wtAvgCondiion Pavement Area Unit_ Sectons PctSecions Wt Age 44 299 1 1 21 21 72 135 15 18 PARKING 356 801 23 28 ROADWAY 484 818 39 48 STORAGE 36 537 4 5 All Sections Subset of Sections Close Workshops 206 Right click on the graph and select Toolbar When the icons appear click on any icon to bring up the dialog box Click on the Titles tab and in the Graph Titles box type Condition by Pavement Use To exit the graph control click OK
91. Shar C4EMS Program Files User Data Shapefile rspark shp Destination She CAE MS Program FilessLl ser Data Class Workshop 4b rspark shp Source C EMS Program Files User Data Shapefile CNYSHAPE shp Shape file does not contain field UNIQUEID UNIQUEID will be added Shape file does not contain field PID Once the operation has been completed Close out of the GIS Converter PAVER Shapfile Converter 2 SouceShat CAEMS Program Files User Data Shapefile rspark shp Destination She CEMS Program Files User Data Class Workshop 4b rspark shp Shape file contains field UNIQUEID Shape file does not contain field PID Conversion No PID field Found File is ready for GIS Link Assignment Complete PAVER UPDATE CONVERSION COMPLETE Workshops 215 After closing the GIS Shapefile Converter click on the GIS Tree Sel button to see your imported GIS Shapefile GIS Tree Sel Button amp Tree Sel EBListSel Wizards EI Visual Menu Help The Imported CT Shapefile and Area Tree Selector Locate mouse clicks synchronize the tree and the map but do not affect selection 2 Use the PAVER GIS Assignment tool to link the previously imported shapefile to sections in the PAVER Class Workshop 4b database m Click on Visual menu choose GIS tools and highlight the
92. Stabilization in 5 years Set the Maximum Number Of Iterations To Attempt Goal to 10 apply the inflation rate of 3 and click Execute to run the report Plan Setup Budget Categories Families Project Planning Constrain Budget Determine Budget Consequence Determine Budget Requirements Iteration Determine Annual Budget For Condition Stabilization Backlog Elimination 5 years Maximum Number of Iterations to Achieve Goal 10 Maintain current area weighted PCI Condition Tolerance 3 Reach area weighted PCI of M amp A Prionty Table bats i Priority T able v Edi Apply Inflation Rate 2 3 z View Existing Report Execute After reviewing the results close the window and save the report as MaintPCI wp as done before with the 300k report 3 M amp R Plan Eliminate Backlog In 5 Years Workshops Everything will be the same based on the previously run report except for the Budget input parameters On the Budget tab select Determine Budget Requirements Iteration Under the Determine Budget Requirements Iteration select Backlog Elimination in 5 years Set the Maximum Number Of Iterations To Attempt Goal to 10 apply the inflation rate of 3 and then click Execute to run the report 287 Plan Setup Budget Categories Families Project Planning Constrain Budget Determine Budget Consequence Determine Budget Req
93. To view existing projects or plan required projects click Edit below the Required Work checkbox When this is clicked a new Project Planner window will appear and in the upper left corner a Current Project box Here previously created projects can be selected by the drop down arrow or new projects can be created by selecting New Projects can be copied renamed or deleted by clicking on the appropriate buttons Any competed projects be moved to PAVERTV s work history by using the Project Completed Move to work History button on the top right corner of the window Chapter 13 M amp R Plan 99 Plan Parameters Plan Setup Budget M amp F Categories M amp R Families Project Planning Minimum years between formulated projects and work planning recommendations Required Work Edit Formulated B Plan Projects after Projects Recommending Work r Count projects against the budget Reset All to Default View Existing Report Execute Close To create a new project first name the project then begin assigning sections and their associated work to the project On the Project Planner window there are three tabs Project Sections Project Work and Section Level Work On the Project Sections tab sections are assigned to the project The table on the right lists all the sections that are currently assigned to the chosen project while the table on the left is mainly there to view the sections that have not been assigned to
94. Unit drop down list box Review previously entered data by using the Sample Unit drop down list box 01 Summary data at time of inspection Branch Use ADWA Section Surface Type Section True Area Section Length J F Section Width F Inspection Date 7 23 1996 Detailed Inspection Comments Calculate Conditions Sample Unit 4 M Edit Sample Units Distress Remaining Samples Hi Sample Unit Size ur inc ii Samples Have codes and No Distress Distress Type 01 ALLIGATOR CR C 06 DEPRESSION C 11 PATCH UT CUT C 16 SHOVING descrip tions C 02 BLEEDING C 07 EDGE CR 12 POLISHED AG C 17 SLIPPAGE CR C 03 BLOCK CR C 08 JT REF CR C 13 POTHOLE C 18 SWELL C 04 BUMPS SAGS C 09 LANE SH DROP C 14 RR CROSSING C 19 RAVELING C 05 CORRUGATION C 10L TCR C 15 RUTTING C 20 WEATHERING Distress Severity Distress Quantit Severity level wies 464 00 Distress Description Quantity Units Comments a Add Distress 1 ALLIGATOR 254 54 Delete Distr Quantity field ALLIGATOR 87 SgFt TONS BLOCK CRACKING 1 357 Replace Distress BLOCK CRACKING 143 SqFt Distress DEPRESSION 18 SgFt A summary for a Next Sample Unit Smp Images 0 Insp Images 0 lose sample unit For Maximum Speed Keyboard Only The most repetitive part of inspection data entry is inputting the di
95. amp R will be applied to All or Selected Select Start Date and Years to run M amp R Plan Select M amp R Plan Type policies Tab 2 Budget M amp R Plan Parameters Select Inventory for Planning Actual Database Budget l Categories l Families l Project Planning Virtual Database Record Count All Items Build Selection using Query Tool Select Plan Start Date and Plan Length Start Date 8 730 2006 Years Select amp Plan Critical PCI Consequence of Localized Distress Maintenance Major based on Minimum Condition View Existing Report Execute The user can choose to use three different budget split scenarios one budget for all M amp R two budgets one for localized and global M amp R and one for major M amp R or separate budgets for localized global and major M amp R Next to each Budget there is a drop down list box used to select a previously created PAVERTM M amp R budget table for the report To the right of the drop down list box 1s the Edit button which is used to review and edit the selected budget table or for creating a new table The Scale Factor window allows the user to multiply or scale the currently selected budget Select if a custom budget is wanted The other main option Determine Budget Requirements Iteration allows the user to view
96. and Backlog Condition Stabilization Elimination option S in 4 years Maximum Number of Iterations to Achieve Goal 10 Priority Table Default Priority Table v Edi Apply Inflation Rate 2 View Existing Report Execute Close Below the main Use Budget checkbox is the checkbox to apply an Inflation Rate Once this is checked the program will run the report with the defined inflation rate The default inflation rate is set to 3 Chapter 13 M amp R Plan 97 Tab 3 M amp R Categories The M amp R Categories tab is where the user selects which policies to use in the work plan The Localized Stopgap PCI Critical option is used to indicate the use of Safety M amp R policies which allows PAVER to plan localized stopgap M amp R work pothole filling etc on areas where the PCI is below the critical level The Localized Preventative M amp R PCI gt Critical checkbox allows to plan M amp R work in localized areas where the PCI is above critical Just below the local preventative checkbox 15 a white box with a toggle switch Here life extending credit in years can be given to any localized preventative work Applying any preventative work where the PCI is still above critical will save money and add years to the pavements life The Global Preventative M amp R checkbox allows PAVER to work a global level This M amp R includes any slurry seal or other global pre
97. and Distresses The Sections tab enables the user to view downloaded sections add new sections to inspect or add comments Downloaded and added sections appear in the large text box listed by network branch and section names When adding a new section the user can edit network branch and section names along with the use surface area number of samples or frames and age The Samples Frames tab allows the user to edit or add specific samples frames Downloaded samples frames appear in the large text box Unlike the Sections tab the user may delete or edit any downloaded samples frames In addition a sample may be declared to have no distresses by clicking the No Distress checkbox The Distresses tab allows the user to enter the distresses for each inspected sample frame The current sections and samples frames are indicated at the top of the screen and may be switched by clicking the left or right arrows on either side of the section or sample frame ID To add a new distress click New The distress type then can be picked from the list of distress types or entered into the text box Distress severities are selected from the pull down menu if applicable and distress quantities may be entered directly To save the entered distress data use Save If a sample has no distresses click the No Distresses checkbox under the Sample Frames tab When working with frames if a new frame 15 desired click New Frame and a new frame is added wit
98. are listed here EI Costs Costs associated with layer types are listed here Layer Types amp Costs o ox 1 Layer Types Base Course Base Course Base Course SqFt Binder Bituminous SqFt Coat Prime SqFt Coat Tack SqFt Cold Milling SqFt Subbase SqFt Subbase SqFt Suhhase Stahilized GaFt Budgets Here you can create tables to specify a budget for each year When running the Work Plan you can select from a list of budgets To create your own budget click on New Table You are given the option of copying the budget that is displayed When creating a new table select the copy option to save time entering data if most values are the same Enter Year and budget Amount information By placing actual budget numbers in a budget table you can restrict the spending of the work plan to a specific budget Creating different budget tables also allows you to compare the results of different Work Plan scenarios Chapter 3 System Tables 35 All budgets in Funds By Year your system are 100K per Year m listed here Amount NS 1 1 2000 100 000 00 1 1 2001 100 000 00 1 1 2002 100 000 00 1 1 2003 100 000 00 1 1 2004 100 000 00 12122005 100 000 00 1 1 2006 100 000 00 1 1 2007 100 000 00 1 1 2008 100 000 00 1 1 2008 100 000 00 1 1 2010 100 000 00 1 1 2011 100 000 00 New Table Rename Del Table Close Add Del Enter budget amo
99. are small circular items that typically displayed in array for the user to make a mutually exclusive selection from Report Viewer A standard interface which presents results as spreadsheet tables with associated graphs The Condition Analysis Report M amp R Planning Report and the Inspection Scheduling Report all present their results in the EMS Report Viewer format E Right button Click Feature Added capabilities available for an object either a PAVER spreadsheet table or a graph that are accessed by pointing to the object with the mouse and clicking the right mouse button Structured Query Language SQL A standard database access language collection of commands control clauses etc supported by all major database managers Structured Query Language or SQL provides a standard way to get or view information from a database or put information into a database Tab Table Data The common for Windows data that is edited on Tab Table forms Tab Table data includes the User defined Fields tables Inventory picklists Work Plan tables Materials and Misc Other Tables Tab Table Form Microsoft standard form for editing and reviewing data The Tab Table form simulates index cards that can be selected by pointing to the index tab portion of the card with the mouse and pressing the left mouse button Glossary 177 User defined Fields Discretionary inventory information that ca
100. click Zoom Area and the mouse icon will become a cross Position the intersection of the cross at one corner of the desired window click and hold the left button on the mouse and drag it to the opposite corner of the desired window creating a box outline If you begin the zoom window at the upper left corner you will drag to the bottom right and vice versa If you begin the zoom window at the upper right corner you will drag to the bottom left and vice versa Release the right button on the mouse and the GIS map will automatically zoom to the largest view that includes everything in your zoom window The zoom area tool will continue to be active and may be used again until another tool is selected To decrease the zoom factor use the Center tool and start over or use the Zoom In tool 111 The Zoom In tool allows you to zoom in a specific location To use the Zoom In tool click Zoom In and the mouse icon will become an arrow Position the tip of the arrow over the point you want to zoom in on and click the left button on the mouse The GIS map view will decrease as the scale of the map increases at scale factor of 2 1 The new view window will be centered on the tip of the arrow The Zoom In tool will continue to be active and may be used again until another tool is selected 6 The Zoom Out tool allows you to zoom out from a specific location To use the Zoom Out tool click Zoom Out and the mouse icon will become an arr
101. dates The complete listing of every condition index for every date occurrence listed in the section history View family assignments Shows what the current family assignment Prediction Model is for the selected section Double clicking in the Family column opens the Change Family Assignments window providing the user the option to change the family assignment As with other tables in right clicking on any of these tables allows the user to revise the table layout sort the data print or export the data Condition and Age Categories Condition Type Selection and User defined Distress Indices are all discussed in Chapter3 System Tables gt gt Condition Tools Chapter 5 Inventory 53 Inventory IRP INEWM 01 2 Brancl 3 Section View the Properties Conditions Families conditions View all latest conditions C View family assignments and f ami ly View one condition index for all dates assignmen ts for View all indices and dates a section Date Condiion Index Condition Value 7 23 1396 PCI 18 12 5 1994 PCI 22 10 13 1383 24 10 21 1992 28 10 16 1991 29 6 6 1383 PCI 49 10 13 1386 52 4 22 1386 PCI 50 You are editing Images 0 New Copy Delete Close Virtual Inventory The actual inventory consists of the original sections that were defined when the database w
102. ear Major and Global All Years Select Project s fe Year i Assignments gt rojec ssignments GIS view Major for all Years Major By Year Global M amp R By Localized By Year Close Select Select 255mArea Zoomin Zoom Out Area mnsfield shp Project n 14 32 2010 n 5 23 2010 Workshops 302
103. for performing inspections whereby each section 1s divided into smaller pieces called sample units Inspection information is then collected from one or more sample units Chapter 7 Inspections Conditons 63 The PAVER Inspection Data Entry window matches the field inspection and allows the user to enter survey information Click Edit Sample Units next to the Sample Unit window to bring up the Select Samples window which contains two lists The left side shows the samples to be included in this inspection and the right side shows samples that were used in previous inspections To use a sample defined in a previous inspection click the sample and then click the arrow button located between the two lists To add a completely new sample click Add New and a sample is added to the end of the list with a Sample Number of New and a Sample Size of zero Click on the Sample Number field and change the ID to the sample ID used in the actual field inspection The user may enter a comment for the sample and switch the Sample Type between Random R and Additional A If there is a sample definition in the left hand list that you do not wish to use click the sample to be removed then click Remove If the sample already has inspection information as can occur when editing the sample list for an existing inspection PAVER informs the user that the sample already contains information and asks the user to confirm that they really wi
104. gt Yes ROADWAY Review sections for work items to be added to Select All Select None Work Items to Add Work Date Unit Cost Total Cost 7 7 2006 0 25 SqFt Cancel lt Back Calculate Last Construction Date The Calculate Last Construction Date Wizard 15 utilized to determine the most recent construction date for selected sections The wizard conducts the calculation according to a specified deterioration rate and discards any inconsistent data Access the Calculate Last Construction Date Wizard from the PAVERTM Button Bar by choosing Wizards First choose the Deterioration Rate Selecting Use a fixed rate of PCI deterioration will enable PAVERTM to use the current PCI and linearly backtrack to the construction date to a PCI of 100 with the specified points per year Selecting Use the assigned PCI deterioration family causes to use the current PCI and the assigned PCI deterioration family model to determine the construction date For sections assigned to the default family the user can choose not to calculate its construction date or to Use a fixed rate of a specified points year Under Date Tolerance the user has the option to Discard a calculated date if it is less than a specified time interval after an existing construction date This allows to keep any existing construction date that 15 reasonable when compared to the calculated date If the ca
105. is the unit of pavement used for inspection rating methods Date of inspection Distress code Distress severity Quantity of distress Density of distress for severity PCI points to deduct for this distress for severity CONDHIST DBF Inspection Summary Results Large group of pavements Usually Airport City Sub Division Identifier Medium grouping of pavements Usually runway taxiway apron street name Area of same pavement type This is the unit of pavement used for inspection rating methods Date of inspection Condition rating Ride Quality Condition rating Safety Condition rating Drainage Condition Condition rating Shoulder Quality Condition rating Overall Condition Condition rating Foreign Object Damage Samples in section Samples in section Condition rating PCI Random samples in section Additional samples in section Minimum number of samples recommended for section INTERNAL USE VALUE NOT REQUIRED Percent of distress due to LOAD Percent of distress due to CLIMATE Percent of distress due to OTHER 150 OBJECT NAME DATA SIZE USAGE 00 0 Table Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Table Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Table Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Appendix D TRAFFIC NETWORK BRANCH
106. modeling The query tool can also be used to specify the sorting of data Selection and sorting criteria specifications can be stored and retrieved by name in the Stored Criteria box The query tool also reports the record count number of sections selected as filtering queries are built Filter criteria are entered using the drop boxes arrayed across the query form Fields are entered from left to right and top to bottom As you enter query information only the next field will be highlighted for user selection For example use the first entry in the Field column to select Surface Once you have selected Surface the Comparison field is highlighted After selecting a query field and the comparison evaluator gt lt gt lt lt gt the Compare To field becomes active The drop down list on the Compare To field lists the available choices in the database for the selection you made in the Field column If the number of avaliable choices is larger than 1000 the first couple of characters can be typed in the box to narrow down the number of items populated After you make a selection in the Compare To field the record count indicator will change as the query you are building is applied to the database in real time The first column on the query form contains the query statement operators And Or These operators are used to join the individual query statements To see the Structured Query Language SQL query that you have bui
107. pavements above the critical PCI Glossary 175 Localized Stopgap Safety Maintenance and Repair Stopgap M amp R is defined as the localized M amp R needed to keep the pavement operational in a safe condition This policy 15 applied to pavements below the critical PCI E Major M amp R Activities applied to the entire pavement section to correct or improve existing structural or functional requirements It is also used to upgrade pavements below the critical PCI E Modal A Microsoft Windows form for displaying or collecting information modal form must be configured and executed or closed before you can resume other or Windows tasks Parameter Collection Screen A Microsoft Windows form that is used to configure the PAVERTM Condition Analysis Work Plan and Inspection Schedule Reports The parameter collection screens displays the default settings for the various report parameters that can be configured by the user In general the values on the form can be adjusted to reflect the desired setting The parameter collection screen is a modal screen Pavement Branch A branch is a readily identifiable part of the pavement network and has a distinct function For example an individual street or a parking lot would each be considered a separate branch of the pavement network Similarly an airfield pavement such as a runway or a taxiway would each be considered a separate branch Pavement Condition Index PCI
108. report To view individual branches click the desired Branch ID to highlight the Chapter 11 Condition Analysis 87 section The condition summary table is accompanied by a graph that plots the average condition for the highlighted branch row in the condition summary table Annual Condition Area Weighted Average Shows the Annual Condition Area Weighted Average for each branch for each year in the reporting period The first row of the table summarizes all branches included in the report To view individual branches click the desired Branch ID to highlight the section The condition summary table 15 accompanied by a graph that plots the average condition for the highlighted branch row in the condition summary table Overlay Work Scenario Allows the user to choose a previously made work plan and apply it to the current condition analysis report This allows the user to see the effect of any planned work on the database over the length of the analysis Condition Frequency Number of Sections This table is divided into six default unless otherwise specified PCI categories excellent very good good fair poor and failed Under each of these categories the number of sections are presented for each year in the reporting period As in the other tables highlighting an individual year will display its associated graph to the right of the table Condition Frequency Area This table 15 divided into six default unless otherwi
109. selections made by another selector Chapter 5 Inventory 55 and Move Data Destination PAVER 6 0 AC 13 PAVER 6 0RC 13 Networks Networks NeilArms Neil ms Branches ourse Aggregate Layer instruction Major Bituminous Layer Constr New Construction AC Base Course Bituminous Overlay AC Structural Inspections Delete Delete Select Sections Using Query Tool Else Respond to selections Respond to selections Data Verification Tools The Database Verification Tools are a good place to start when encountering errors They are now available as an Inventory option within the Visual Menu Each checkbox represents a separate segment of the verification process 1 Verify branch data and remove duplicate section data Ensures that branch summaries correspond to section totals that only one family model is assigned to each section and that there is only one set of user defined field data for each section 2 Verify section construction history Ensures the LCD Last Construction Date agrees with data in the Work History table 3 Verify reset latest inspection indicators Ensures data matches last inspection data 4 Check for duplicate Major M amp R and duplicate inspections Eliminates duplicate Major M amp R i e same date same work type and duplicate inspections i e same section same PCI 5 Verify work required history
110. system tables and pavement data In this case there need be no process restrictions because you are giving each user their own databases Appendix G 167 Appendix H Computing Work Quantity From Distress Quantity 169 Computing Work Quantity From Distress Quantity 1 We look in the Work Conversion By Work Type table given below If the work type is there which is currently only true for Slab Replacement we say the work quantity 15 equal to the slab area Work Name Conversion Type Multiplier Slab Replacement Slab Area 1 2 If there is conversion by work type we try to look up conversion by distress type severity and work unit type in the table given below If a matching record is found we take the amount given by the conversion type column e g for distress 21 we use slab width and multiply it by the distress quantity and the value in the multiplier column to get the work quantity The conversion type definitions are mE Slab Width Work quantity distress quantity x slab width x multiplier Slab Length Work quantity distress quantity x slab length x multiplier Slab Area Work quantity slab width x slab length x distress quantity x multiplier Constant Work quantity distress quantity x multiplier Joint Calculation Work quantity joint length x distress quantity number of slabs x multiplier Distress Area Work quantity distress are
111. that layer displays If more than one layer 15 checked the layer that 15 highest in location on the list displays The up and down arrows under the layers box can be used to move layers up or down on the list Highlight a layer and use the Surface Type Category Rank Branch Use arrows to move it to a different location in the list Chapter 8 Reports Pan Select PER zoom Zoomin Zoom Out Center JE a rspark shp Surface rspark shp Surface rspark shp Category rspark shp Rank lt Last PCI This view displays the current latest PCI value for each section in the view The PCI value comes from the last inspection date or last major M amp R activity date Going to Tables from the menu bar and selecting Condition Tools and Define Condition and Age Categories can define the categories and range of values as well as associated GIS and graph colors In this table on the Condition Categories tab select PCI in the Name drop down list box to make new categories change names assign numeric ranges and manipulate color schemes Pan Select Zoom Zoomin Zoom Out Center T rspark shp PCl Non pavement No data Failed 0 10 Serious 11 25 Very Poor 26 40 Poor 41 55 NH Fair 56 70 Satisfactory 71 85 Good 86 100 Chapter 8 Reports 76 Assignment Of PCI Deterioration And M amp R Families Th
112. the existing System Tables with those being imported When using the second option it is STRONGLY recommended that the user produce a backup of the existing System Tables The Tables to Import provides several options as well When importing an e60 file the user has the option of selecting specific components of the System Tables to import When importing an e50 file the user has the option to import System Tables in their entirety or not at all Chapter 4 Database Tools 42 Clicking on the Import button launches the import routine If the import routine does not cause any existing data to be overwritten the import procedure will proceed uninterrupted If the import routine is configured such that it will overwrite existing data either pavement data or system data a Windows message box appears and presents you with three options Abort to skip this file Retry to overwrite the current file and Ignore to overwrite all files Select the appropriate choice When the import procedure is completed the PAVERTM status window shows a Done message Click the Close button to leave the 6 Import Window The data you imported can be opened by choosing File gt gt Open from the PAVER Menu Select the imported database from the list of available PAVER databases 4 File Selection Select file TE rs CAEMS Program Files User Data V6 1 Tables EG0 Browse to import Destination path 5 PROGRAM FILES USER DATA
113. the Print and Export options for the table iil Summary Charts nM DER Define graph Axis Surface Avg Condition v PCI v axes Select the Condition Type to display AC Surface Type Pct Section 518 750 SqFt 51 74 29 283 661 SqFt 92 211 459 SqFt Choose All Sections or define a All Sections Subset of Sections Subset of Sections Standard Reports There are four Standard Reports accessed through Visual Menu gt gt Reports Branch Listing Work History Branch Condition and Section Condition Reports Branch Listing Report Produces a list of all branches and associated information including usage number of sections total area etc The last page is a summary of all branches in the network s Chapter 8 Reports 71 Work History Report Produces a section by section report of all work completed within that section over the life of the database and includes data such as work type work date and cost Branch Condition Report Displays the average and weighted average condition of each branch including standard deviations as well as a summary of all branches on the last page m Section Condition Report The same as the Branch Condition Report except the data 15 displayed at the section level A summary is included on the last page of the report Define the subset of the database you wish to run the report on by clicking on Selection Criteria The subset can ra
114. the current project To assign a section to a project highlight the desired section in the left hand table and click the single right pointing arrow dividing the two tables This will move the highlighted section to the right table and assign it to the selected project If the double right pointing arrow is selected it will assign and move all sections from the left table to the right table Similarly the left pointing arrows move sections to the left table from the right table Moving sections to another project can be done by highlighting them and clicking Move Selected Section s to Different Project located at the bottom of the window This button also gives the user the option to copy the associated work with the section s Once sections have been assigned to a project the user can begin to assign work using the three remaining tabs Project Work Section Level Work and Work Item Views The Project Work tab is used to assign work items that are to be applied to all of the sections in a project the Section Level Work tab is used to assign work to individual sections in a project and the Work Item Views tab is a summary of the assigned projects On the Project Work tab any previously assigned project level work will be listed in the table area To the left of the table there are three buttons to modify project work items Add Edit and Delete To add project work select Add and a new window appears called Add Work Item Project Level
115. these factors into consideration The Prediction Model is designed to allow users to blend unique knowledge about their pavements measured local condition information and powerful modeling tools together to produce highly accurate estimates of future pavement life Using The Prediction Model Choose Visual Menu gt gt Condition Prediction Model gt gt Create and Maintain Prediction Models to display the Prediction Modeling window The Prediction Modeling window can also be reached by clicking on the Prediction Modeling button on the Button Bar The top half of the Prediction Modeling window is a graph that shows a sample start up prediction model Two drop down list boxes are located above the prediction model graph By clicking the drop down arrow on the right side of these boxes the user can select a Family Type as well as a previously saved Prediction Model Select a Model from the list and PAVER loads all the data points used to build the model and the settings used to generate the model It then plots the data points and the estimated condition prediction function The upper right corner of the Prediction Modeling form contains two buttons Calculate and Close The Calculate button causes the model to estimate the condition prediction function and plot the curve through the data points The Close button closes the Prediction Modeling window Any models you have built are automatically saved when the Close button is c
116. to the selected sections and generate a work report if desired li Calculate Construction Date Deterioration Rate Select desired C Use a fixed rate of PCI deterioration of H 5 points year deterioration ra te for gt If a section is assigned to the default family ca 1 C ul a ti on Do not calculate its construction date Use afixedrate of 3 points year Use the assigned PCI deterioration family Date Tolerance Discard a calculated date if it is less than FS gt after an existing construction date Cancel Next gt All PAVER calculated last construction dates can be viewed using User defined Reports To view all of the sections that have had their last construction dates calculated select Visual Menu gt gt Reports gt gt User defined Reports gt gt Create New Report Select all of the standardized columns used when creating a report Network ID Branch ID Section ID Date etc and then highlight Latest Work on the tree selector and open the Select Rows tab In the Field list box select Work In the Comparison list box select In the Compare To list box select Back calculated Construction Once the drop down list boxes are defined select OK to view all of the sections that have had their last construction dates calculated Set Properties On Multiple Inventory Items The Inventory Property Change Wizard is utilized to update or clear a specified inventory property for selected sections
117. wizard to help guide the user through the import process This wizard also provides data verification to insure that survey information is being imported properly into the database Access the XML FieldInspector ImagelInspector Data Import Wizard from the PAVER Button Bar by choosing Wizards Chapter 15 Wizards 122 The FieldInspector ImageInspector Data Import XML Tool contains five display screens The first display screen is the XML file location It shows the XML Data Path and the corresponding XML Data Import Files for the inspection data The XML Data Path is how the user navigates to the location of the files that will be imported to create PAVER inspection data The XML Data Import File is where the individual XML files can be selected for import XML Data Path 7325 EMS Program Files XMLData Import File xml The second display screen 15 the Data Path where the database currently open 15 selected and the associated shapefile inside the pavement database project folder 15 used for the XML inspection data import The shapefile interpretation 15 only needed if the PID information 15 not known and the import will be based on the distress GPS conditions The data will be assigned to the georeferenced GIS map during import Field Data Image Inspection Import _ teer Pavement Data Location SC PAVER Data Path TIEMS
118. 00 00 Area Adjustment 00 sa True Area 18 000 00 Sart Length and Width Calculate C Calculate as seen here Slab Length Typ 15 00 Width 159 For Slabs over 30 ft use imaginary joints to calculate total slabs Length width and joint Total Slabs 80 00 Joint Length 1 770 00 NN length should be the actual size Category Zone Lanes Spaces 0 Shoulder Street Grade fo Comment User Defined Section User Seien User PCN are editing Current Values C Historical Values 2 To create and edit a user defined field Close the inventory window and within the Tables drop down list select Define User Fields gt gt Additional User Field Workshops 195 ie Tables Preferences Add Ins Window Help Define User Fields Define Nsort1 through Nsort3 Edit Inventory Pick Lists Define Bsort1 through Bsort3 M amp R Plan Tables and Families Define Ssort1 through Ssort3 Condition Tools Customize NSort BSort SSort Headings User Fields Additional User Fields Note There are 7 fixed user fields at the Branch level of inventory E Go to the User Defined Field for Branch and then select New Change the Field Name from New to Shoulder Type then select List option from the drop down menu and then click OK 2 Create User Defined Field Field Name Shoulder Type Type Create at the system level Li
119. 03 0203 JARL Loading Dock for Bldg 204 00204 JARL Loading Dock for Bldg 205 D0205 JARL Loading Dock for Bldg 207 00207 ABL D0207 JARL Loading Dock for Bldg 207 D0207 ARL Loading Dock for Bldg 207 00207 Loading DockforBldg 500 100500 Valid Records 3 Invalid Records 0 Previous The fifth display screen 15 where the user can choose to import shapefile into a usable database The message box shown displays all of the information regarding each section being created as an inventory item in the database Once the information has been imported the polygons are automatically linked to the pavement sections in the PAVER database Inventory Import ESRI GIS ARL FLORAL 02 Added ARL FLORAL 04 Added ARL FLORAL 05 Added 0 Added ARL KUESTER 02 Added ARL PKUES 01 Added ARL PFUEL 01 Added ARL S0406 01 Added ARL DR403 01 Added ARL A0403 02 Added 0403 01 Added ARL FLORAL 07 Added ARL FLORAL 08 Added ARL FLORAL 09 Added ARL FLORAL 10 Added ARL D0500 01 Added ARL DFUEL 01 Added 0500 02 Added ARL D0504 01 Added ARL PO0504 01 Added ARL S0504 01 Added 0505 02 Added ARL A0601 01 Added ARL CHANCE 01 Added Added 01 Added ARL DAHLGREN 03 Added
120. 06 967 SqFt Auglaize County Taxiway SaFt Auglaize County Taxiway SqFt Auglaize County Taxiway XIWA 967 S Auglaize County Taxiway TAXIWAY 967 SqFt Auglaize County Taxiway Section Condition Inventore Linkl Neilrms 8 26 B Activity Date Activity Condition Age Condiion Category 12 17 2001 Interpolation 39 54 16 Very Poor 2 6 2002 Inspection 39 0 Very Poor 12 17 2002 Prediction 35 66 Very Poor 12 17 2003 Prediction 31 78 Very Poor 12 17 2004 Prediction 27 88 Very Poor 12 17 2005 Prediction 24 0 Serious 12 17 2006 20 12 Serious 12 17 2007 16 23 Serious 12 17 2008 12 34 Serious 12 17 2009 Prediction 8 46 Failed 12 17 2010 Prediction 4 57 Failed E Select GI E EMS Rep Program Files User Data Neil Armstrong Select GIS Views In addition to the EMS Report Viewer the Condition Analysis report opens a Select GIS Views window This window contains a preset view Section Conditions by Year which is linked to the results of the current Condition Analysis report The resulting display is a year by year view of the conditions of each section included in the condition analysis This GIS view quickly shows the difference in condition from year to year Open Saved Condition Analysis You can view a prev
121. 15 highlighted on the Plan Setup tab Select the Sampling Strategy for the determination of the number of samples Chapter 7 Inspections Conditons 67 to inspect for each section The Inspection Expenses per sample unit will be used to calculate the inspection cost for each section If Schedule using criteria is chosen on the Plan Setup tab then on the Insp Criteria Sampling Strategy amp Cost tab the user additionally specifies the Minimum Condition and Deterioration Rate Use the checkboxes to enable or disable each option which may be run together or separately Irap Catena Samping Shalegy amp Cont Select Inventory los Planning Adud Database C Vitus Database Alhem Buld Selection using Tool Select Plan Start Date and Plan Length Stat Date Yen Select Inspection Schedule Schedule all sections selected above year 6 Schedule using The user may choose to schedule inspections according to a table of minimum acceptable conditions If the Minimum Condition box is checked projected section conditions are compared to a list of minimum conditions and a section is only scheduled for inspection if that section s condition falls below the matching record in the minimum condition table When the Minimum Condition alternative Is selected the user may specify a minimum condition table Use the drop down list box immediately to the right of the Minimum Condition check
122. 16 1996 PCI 73 0 SCI lt gt Pet Load Climate Other 40 56 4 m Create New Table From A Shapefile See Chapter 4 Database Tools lt lt Create PAVER Inventory From Shape Data in the PAVERTM 6 5 User Manual E New distresses added to comply with ASTM D5340 10 and D6433 09 both published in ASTM Volume 04 03 2010 Curve 52 Weathering amp Raveling ange Airfield Us T ering New PCC 70 Scaling included ASR 70 Scaling mg Ww 76 ASR New 19 Ravelin Same but no Roadway 19 Weathering amp Raveling 5 low severity 20 Weathering PCASE PAVER Compatibility PCASE is the Pavement Transportation Computer Assisted Structural Engineering software that is used for the design and evaluation of transportation systems airfield roads and railroads It uses empirical or layered elastic methodology for pavement design The software supports data from dynamic cone penetrometer and non destructive testing using falling weight deflectometer for pavement evaluation Chapter 1 Overview 11 Currently PCASE 2 09 01 is compatible with PAVER versions 5 3 7 through 6 5 2 PAVER 6 5 2 PCASE 2 09 H Inventory rc Reports Pred Modeling fi Cond Analysis Plan Qi GiS TreeSel EE List Sel Wizards Visual Help F BAbout PAVER 4 Traffic hf Design Evaluation Climate SANDT Data Core Reports Qh Vehicle Edit
123. 18 19 28 29 30 32 33 35 36 38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 50 Columns Extended 1 2 3 8 9 18 19 28 29 30 32 33 34 41 42 43 44 45 52 53 54 55 56 63 64 65 66 67 74 75 76 17 78 85 135 Appendix B XML Inspection Data Import Format XML ss 137 File Specifications for XML Interface to PAVER 137 Video Inspection Import Data Format ASCII Text 140 File Specifications PClVideo Interface To 12 40 0000 esee eee etent tenen tote tnnen ento te 140 Example User Interfaces decetero etate eet detnr vate 140 so quM 141 141 142 P p 142 c E eE AEEA EEES 143 D 143 Units Of Measure Valid For PClVideo te e REP 144 Video Inspection Import Data Format Access Database 144 XML Inspection Data Import Format XML File Specifications for XML Interface to PAVER The XML Inspection Data Import provides a vendor independent format for transferring field inspection data to PAVER An XML Schema PavementInspectionData xsd has been developed to provide validation of data contained in the XML data files and
124. 22 2024922292 167 Network The Pavement Databases And Restrict Editing 167 Use A Terminal Services Or Citrix Server 167 Computing Work Quantity From Distress 169 Workshops Workshop 1 Network 182 Olo Era 182 Databases e 182 182 Hints amp Solution Guide For Workshop 1 eee 183 Workshop 2 188 188 RETE EDU D 188 Workshop 3 Field Inspection Data 199 Objectives Database eo RR EH RR E RW ARN Ice Hints amp Solution Guides For Workshop 3 Workshop 4 PROS iiss iiss pnma ia 205 eei P 205 M 205 205 Hints amp Solution Guides For Workshop 4a 206 Workshop 212 212
125. 25 Basics The program is designed using commercial Windows components and the user interface follows standard Windows protocols Familiarity with basic Windows user skills is assumed in the design of the program the preparation of program documentation and the design of the help system Spreadsheet Forms The basic form for editing and viewing data in PAVER is table that operates like a spreadsheet In some instances these forms are used only to present data and the values displayed cannot be edited On other occasions you are able to edit the data or add new lines to the table As with other tools highlighting the spreadsheet and right clicking reveals a menu with spreadsheet tools Depending on the context some of the right button click features may not be available and are consequently listed in the menu as light gray The basic right button click spreadsheet features allow table zoom table layout customizing add edit delete record search import export print table and graph options Customize NSort BSort SSort Headings Customize NSort BSort SSort Heading p o aor User Sort 1 Branch User Sort 2 Branch User Sort 3 Network User Sort 1 Network User Sort 2 Network User Sort 3 Section User Sort 1 Section User Sort 2 SECTION Section User Sort 3 Spreadsheet form Index Cards Index style data entry windows are used in several forms by PAV
126. 253 Inspection Wizard Select Next review the sections and then click Apply Review sections for inspection setup Candidate Sections NeilArms 8 26 Select All Select None Survey sheet Workshops a P NeilArms 8 26 A Nei 8 26 View Hejected Candidates Cancel will close the wizard with no action taken Apply will execute the selected actions for the selected secti sections PID NeilArms 8 26 A inspector Name Your Name Insp Date 4 25 2007 From Runway end 08 Branch Use RUNWAY Surface AAC 4 000 amp down R W 26 Section Len 4000 Ft 1 Alligator Cracking 548 42 Bleeding SqFt 45 Depression 548 3 Block Cracking 54 46 Jet Blast 59 7 X Reflection 48 L amp T Cracking Rt M 254 Reinspection report Workshops Re inspection Report Name Auglaize County Airport Authority Branch 8 26 Name RUNWAY 8 26 Section 2 From Runway end 08 Surface Family DEFAULT 400 000 00SqFt Length 40008 Shoulder Street Type Grade 00 Section Comments Last Insp Date Total Samples 80 Surveyed Conditions PCT 42 Inspection Comments Sample Number 08 Sample Comments 52 WEATH RAVEL 52 WEATH RAVEL 43 BLOCK CR Sample Number 1 Area Sample Comments 43 BLOCK CR M 52
127. 3 jo EE 143 Units Of Measure Valid PCIVideo ceteri rite testen nott t totae tn re reso aan naue 144 Video Inspection Import Data Format Access Database 144 Appendix Abbreviations Of Surface 146 Appendix B Pavement Data Exchange PDE 148 Appendix Example Pavement Survey Forms 1 1 1 ettet 154 Asphalt Surfaced Roads And Parking 156 Airfield Concrete PaVelneft siiis ete 157 lt 158 159 R E E 160 Load amp Climate 162 Asphalt Surfaced Roads And Parking 1 5 162 Concrete Surfaced Roads And Parking Lots eee ee 163 AsphaltS rfaced Airfields s oc trenes reet ve tran e eei n EUN ELI UE E HN ERR UR ste 164 Concrete Surfaced Airflelds 165 UnsurfacEd Road t 165 PAVER Network Installation 222 2
128. 4339 6 14253434 6 142534 34 3614253434 3614253434 3614253434 3514253434 23 037 840 23 6 123 299 55 6 119 998 67 3 655 604 37 6 080 816 24 562 291 71 38 956 31 Summary table 23 037 840 23 6 123 299 55 6 119 998 67 3 655 604 37 6 080 816 24 562 291 71 38 956 31 BE To view the delay penalty costs associated with each section select View gt gt Detail gt gt Delay Penalty Details Sort the sections based on their associated delay penalty cost by right clicking on the table and selecting Change Sort Order Within the Sort Order window choose Delay Penalty and move it to the right column To alternate between Ascending or Descending sort order double click Delay Penalty within the second column of the Sort Order window After adjusting the Sort Order OK Within the main view the column order can be adjusted by selecting a column and dragging and dropping it to the desired position Workshops 294 B Within the GIS Views form select Major M amp R By Year After Conditions Major and Global M amp F All Years All by Year Major for all Years Major Year Global By Year Localized Year E Isolate the years 2010 to 2012 to view what Major M amp R is recommended over the next four years This is seen on the GIS map as shown below 2010 to 2012 Major M amp R TE Major M amp R By elles Pan sea 96 zoom
129. 5 Inventory Inventory Definition Basic Operations Creating Networks Creating Branches Conditions Famili8s ecrit toot ot rove Virtual Lui ERRAT UENIRE EE 54 And Move 55 Data Verification 8 56 EMS Image VIG WON 57 Store ANIMAJ 57 MISES IP 58 Edit EDI 58 Other Image File irit ertet e RE e REPERI ri Ye RSEN 59 C TC 61 7 in ion ndition PCI And Distress Indie 8 63 Entering Inspectiom Dates And Samples retirer 63 Entering Inspection Information 64 For Maximum Speed Keyboard ede cba 65 Batch Inspection Data 66 Calculating The PCI After 66 ier qn 67 User editable Condition 67 Inspection Data Import PAVER 67 Copying Inspection 67 Create Inspection
130. 561 1104 Frames 0 0 0 Status of Status FrameDistresses 0 0 0 meConditi 0 combination Frai ons Execute Workshops 234 Workshop 6 b Database Management Subset Objective Subset a database using the Combine Subset Database tool Database For this lesson we will be using the Ohio Workshop 6 b database Task 1 Create a new database containing only Ohio Workshop 6 b runways and name it Ohio Runways Workshops 235 Hints amp Solution Guide For Workshop 6 b 1 Select Databases to Combine Split Ohio Workshop 6b Workshops To subset a single database into parts Double click on the PAVER 6 DB Tools icon and select Combine Subset PAVER Databases Click Select next to the Source box and highlight the desired database Ohio Workshop 6b in the Pavement Databases drop down list Select Add to move the Ohio Workshop 6b to the Selected pavement databases box this is seen below Import data from an 40 or e50 or e60 or e65 file Export PAVER data to an e65 file Combine Subset PAVER databases Create PAVER Inventory from Shape Data Source s Selection Criteria Destination CAEMS PROGRAM FILES USER DATA Drive Sc Hard Drive Path cacy EEMS PROGRAM FILES amp User Data Class Workshop 3 class Workshop 4b Pavement Databases Selected FORTCOLLINSTESTING pvi In
131. 7 Loose Aggregate Other Appendix F 165 Appendix G PAVER Network Installation 167 Network The Pavement Databases And Restrict Editing 167 Use A Terminal Services Or Citrix Server 167 PAVER Network Installation 5 15 not a networked application it is designed for use on a single workstation If you must install the system in a networked environment there are only two meaningful alternatives Network The Pavement Databases And Restrict Editing Install on each networked workstation that will have access to the networked pavement databases Put the shared pavement databases on the network server and map a drive on each workstation to provide access to the networked database Each user can then access the shared pavement database using File Open from the main PAVER desktop menu With this approach each workstation has its own copy of system tables but is accessing a shared pavement database This creates two potential problems which must be resolved by careful management 1 Since does not support multi user access conflicts could arise 1f different users are editing the pavement data at the same time For this reason you must establish a process whereby editing the pavement data entering inventory inspections and work is restricted to one of the netwo
132. AVERTM E Type Designate what kind of data is to be put into the field Yes No Currency Date Integer Text List etc When you use the Additional User Field in you are only able to enter data of the type you specify To edit the type of an already existing entry select it from the list of User Fields and click on Edit To copy the field click on Copy and assign a new name for the field Delete deletes the selected field and Rename allows you to edit the Field Name Create at the System Level This option will create the field in the system tables where it will appear in any database opened with the system Create For This Database Only This option will create the field only for the current database the field will not be created in any other database Chapter 3 System Tables 28 User Field Editor mE User Defined Fields for Newok Select Network v inventory level New Existing Fields Deleted Fields Recycle Bin E dit Copy Delete Rename Create User Defined Field Field Name Name of user defined field Type of input data Under the Deleted Fields Recycle Bin tab the user has the ability to retrieve a deleted field provides a list of fields that can be restored as well as example values for the selected field The user can retrieve a field by selecting the field and clicking Restore Selected Field s or can alternatively Permanently Delete Selected Field s F
133. All to Default View Existing Report Execute Close E After executing the Work Planner several windows appear Select the EMS Report Viewer form and on that form select View upper left hand corner gt gt Summary gt gt Check the Total Funded Table Total Unfunded Table and Expenditure Summary Table PAVER only allows you to check one of these tables at a time so this process will need to be repeated 9 EMS Report Viewer C EMS Program Files Paver rpwdefit wp To Detail Expenditure Summary 61 425 343 33 5 6 142 534 34 6 142 534 34 36 142 534 34 23 037 840 23 x 11 8 67 n 38 956 31 38 69 564 77 92 159 86 241 750 36 23 037 840 23 5 113 98 67 T 37 080 338 956 3 31 38 69 564 77 92 159 86 241 750 36 Unfunded 0 00 00 2001 0 00 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Total Unfunded Table Major Above Critical Unfunded Total Unfunded Datel _Stopgap Unfunded 67172010 50 00 30 00 30 00 15 229 320 64 0 00 15 229 320 64 Total Unfunded Plot 6 1 2011 0 00 30 00 30 00 9 0 00 39 607 666 56 671 2012 0 0 0 0 x 054 001 15 0 00 6 054 001 15 6 1 2013 1 I 174 50 00 4468 74 47 i 67172014 1 50 00 0 00 67172015 i 1 30 00 30 00 67172016 I 0 00 0 00 67172017 0 00 0 00 671 2018 I I I 30 00 30 00 4 67172019 I I 0 00 0 00 varo rao
134. Comment User Defined Fields BO You are editing Images 0 New Copy Delete Chapter 5 Inventory 50 Creating Sections To create a section click on Inventory on the Button Bar The inventory data form appears with the Network file card as the active form Click the file card tab 3 Section to bring focus to the Section data card If you have just added a new branch that branch will not have defined sections Click New at the bottom of the screen to create a new section and enter section information in the fields starting with Section ID Note that the Unit field cannot be directly edited by the user see Miscellaneous Other Tables gt gt Unit of Measure Field Settings gt gt System Tables for details The Section file card contains three area fields Calculated Area Area Adjustment and True Area The Calculated Area is the product of the section s user entered length and width and cannot be edited The Area Adjustment field Is used to reflect special knowledge the user has about section area The user must still enter length and width information as failure to do so will create problems in other functions of PAVERTM Decreases in section area resulting from items like cutouts should be entered as negative values The Branch file card also has an area adjustment field so the user does not need to reflect Branch level area adjustments in the section Area Adjustment field Calculated Area and A
135. Constant 0 25 76 ASR L Area Slab Width 1 25 76 H Area Slab Area 1 25 76 H Linear Slab Length Width 1 76 M Linear Slab Width 1 76 L Linear Slab Width 1 76 M Area Slab Width 1 25 Note units are in metric Appendix 173 Glossary Checkbox A Microsoft Windows standard user interface item for indicating a user selection Checkboxes are small square items that are displayed in an array for the user to make a selection s from When the mouse is pointing to the checkbox and the left mouse button is clicked a check mark or X will appear in the checkbox Typically checkboxes are used when more than one option can be selected from a list Critical PCI Defined as the PCI value at which the rate of PCI loss increases with time or the cost of applying localized preventive maintenance increases significantly Drop down Menu A Microsoft Windows standard menu that 1s associated with a data entry form or grid The drop down menu contains a list of the available selections for a data entry field The drop down list is not visible until the field associated with the drop down list 15 selected by the user When the Field 15 selected the drop down list 15 activated by clicking the small down arrow located in the far right portion of the field mask Alternately referred to as a picklist or drop down list EMS Picture Server The EMS Picture Tool is an interface for storing images as
136. Dru cel Distress Type 41 ALLIGATOR CR 6 JET BLAST 51 POLISHED AG C 96 SWELLING 42 BLEEDING C 47 JT REF CR 52 RAVELING C 57 WEATHERING C 48 BLOCK CR C 4 53 RUTTING C 5 C 44 CORRUGATION 9 OIL SPILLAGE 54 SHOVING 45 DEPRESSION 0 PATCHING 55 SLIPPAGE CR Distress Severity Distress Quanti C Low Medium High 11000 00 E I Units GEHEN 41 ALLIGATOR 1 000 SgFt Delete Distress Replace Distress Previous Sample Unit Insp Images 0 E Using the list selector choose Network Exercise Branch Spring St and Section 02 add a new inspection date Edit Inspections gt gt New within the PCI window and enter the inspection date today s date shows as the default Enter the total number of sample units in the section 80 20 4 not the number you actually inspected and click Close 4 25 2007 40 8 17 1991 0 0 Construction Total Surface Samples Type New creates both PCI and inspections New Delete Workshops 203 Choose Edit Sample Units gt gt Add New and enter 01 for the sample unit number Under Sample Type select Random and enter 20 for the sample unit size Repeat this procedure for sample unit 02 and exit by selecting Close E PCEExercise Spring St 02 Summary data at time of inspection Branch Use ROADWAY Section Surface Type PCC Section True Area 18 000 Sq
137. E CHEYENNE _ CHEYENNE _ CHEYENNE _ CHEYENNE CHEYENNE Show Show all C Show subset C Show subset Assign Families To assign Families select Visual Menu gt gt M amp R Family Assignment Once this is selected the right hand side of the Visual Menu will display the different categories of M amp R work Localized Stopgap M amp R Families Localized Preventive M amp R Families E Global Preventive M amp R Families m Major M amp R Families Once an M amp R Family Assignment work type has been chosen the assignment window will open The M amp R Family Assignment Tool interface is very similar to the Condition Model Family Assignment Tool On the top of the form the user can select which M amp R Family to build upon There are two previously created default families for every work type roadway and runway Sections can Chapter 12 M amp R Family Assignment 92 be assigned to the default families or the user can name and build a new family by clicking on Edit to the right of the selected M amp R Family The user can delete or define a new family with the Delete and Add buttons Below the M amp R Family selection there are two tables side by side The table on the left shows what sections have not been added to the current family model and allows the user to build a subset The table on the right lists all the sections that are currently assigned to the chosen M amp R Family To as
138. ER Inventory Prediction Modeling Condition Analysis M amp R Planning and EMSTM Query The index style windows place data entry fields on multiple forms that look and operate like paper index cards and allow the user to switch between multiple cards without opening or closing additional windows When a window containing index style data cards first opens the form s initial active index card is visible and can be edited Each index card form includes a tab with a descriptive title and only this tab portion of unselected index cards is visible Chapter 2 User Interface 16 To change the active index card use the mouse to point to an inactive index card title and left click The selected card becomes the active card and the previously active card becomes inactive You can now edit or add entries to the fields on the active index card After editing is complete click the close button on the form or use the Windows close form menu Your data is saved to the database in real time as you make your edits This means there is no action required to save your changes Tab Tables PAVER Tab Tables are spreadsheet like tables used in PAVER to display and edit system configuration information The Tab Tables are accessed from the Tables menu option and look and operate like spreadsheets Right button click features are used to print zoom and configure the tables and buttons on the bottom of the tab form are used to add and delete records
139. Ft Section Length 600 Ft Section Width 30 Ft Inspection Date 4 25 2007 v Editnspections Detailed Inspection Comments Calculate Conditions Sample Unit 7 Edit Sample Units ina Sample Unit Size i c auring artir Select Samples Sample Units For 4 25 2007 Sample Units from Other Inspections Sample Sample a Sample Sample Sample Number Type SempleSize Units Number Type Size Units 01 Random 0 Slab 02 Random 20 Slab w Add New Remove Insp Images 0 Enter the inspection data for sample unit 01 by selecting the corresponding distress and severity level and entering in the quantity per Survey Info at the beginning of this Workshop Click Add when you finish entering in the distress information and enter the remaining distresses in the same fashion When you are finished with that sample unit select Next Sample Unit and repeat the distress entry process for sample unit 02 Note Distress 26 Joint Seal Damage is evaluated across the whole sample unit As a result the program automatically enters the size as the whole size of the sample unit Summary data at time of inspection Branch Use ROADWAY Section Surface Type PCC Section True Area 18 000 Section Length 500 Section Width 30 Inspection Date 4 25 2007 Edit Inspections Detailed Inspection Comments Calculate Conditions Sample Unit 01 v EditSample Units
140. Help Utilities GIS Reports GIS Tree GIS Assignment Tool What s New in Version 6 5 2 PAVER 6 5 2 improvements include Licensing deactivation is available once for each activation The query tool has been changed to accommodate large databases In Compare To field when the available items exceeds 1000 the first few characters can be typed in the box to narrow down the number of choices populated Select Sections 7 7 Stored Criteria m Record Count E Bleu Delete Cancel Enable Field Name Cache Refresh Cache Select Rows Branch Field Comparison Compare To abra Branch iD gt Latest Work PLZ Latest Traffic Latest El 7 Deflection Latest Inspections Sample 51 r Sample Condi Distress Extrapolated Distress Latest Conditions Clear All Clear Current Clear Current Tables Table Row lt 2j New Default Branch Uses E Airfield OVERRUN SHOULDER BLAST PAD Roadway and Parking DRIVEWAY New Default Work Types Localized Preventive amp Spread Sand or Gravel Code 55 56 Patching Infrared Code Cold Milling Localized Code CM LO Chapter 1 Overview 12 Major M amp R Cold Mill and Overlay Code MOL Cold Mill and Overlay 2
141. Here the Phase of the project Work Category Work Date Work Type Material Type and Thickness are entered Costs can be entered in two different ways for project work The first method is to base the work cost on an area unit cost by selecting the Calculate Unit Cost option and then a default or customized Cost Table via the drop down arrow Once the Cost Table is selected click Unit Cost from Table and PAVER will calculate the Total Cost The second method to enter a work cost is to simply enter the pre determined Total Cost by selecting the Total Cost option and then entering the Total Cost in the space provided After any Comments have been entered at the bottom of the window select OK to exit out of the window Chapter 13 M amp R Plan 100 or select Apply to add another work item Once back on the Project Work tab all of the project level work will be listed in the table for easy review Current Project Current meo 5 EsestWokDate 07472005 Total Project Area Project Completed oject name New Delete Rename Latest Work Date Total Project Cost 24113 padri caia Project Work 1 Section Level Work AllSections Sections in projects Sections not in projects Sections in Current Project yp ee letno Benno Project assigned IFARB 01 NE sections INTE 05 03 INEWM 01 INEWT 01 IRESE 01 IRESE 02 Project un
142. ISTRESS SEVERITY QTY DENSITY DEDUCT CONDHIST NETWORK BRANCH SECTION INSDAT RIDE SAFETY DRAIN SHOULDER OVERALL FOD SAMPLES SAMPLE PCI RANDOM ADDITION MINSAM PCISTA LOAD CLIMATE OTHER Text Text Text Date Time Text Text Number Double Number Double Number Double Text Number Double Text Text Text Date Time Number Double Text Number Double Number Double Number Double Text Text Text Date Time Text Text Text Text Text Text N umber Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double N N N N N umber Double iumber Double umber Double vumber Double iumber Double 10 10 10 8 10 1 8 8 8 1 8 10 SAMLE DBF Inspection Sample Details Large group of pavements Usually Airport City Sub Division Identifier Medium grouping of pavements Usually runway taxiway apron street name Area of same pavement type This is the unit of pavement used for inspection rating methods Date of inspection Sample Id Sample type R Random A Additional Sample size area or slabs Sample PCI Condition Distress code Distress severity Quantity of distress XDIST DBF Inspection Extrapolated Distress Information Large group of pavements Usually Airport City Sub Division Identifier Medium grouping of pavements Usually runway taxiway apron street name Area of same pavement type This
143. January 2012 User Manual PAVER 6 5 US Army Corps of Engineers Engineer Research and Development Center Construction Engineering Research Laboratory M Y Mo Shahin Ph D P E William Welborn USACE Lindsi Hammond USACE Simon Kim Ph D Contractor Ryan Meisel P E Contractor Lindsey Cerda Contractor Sam Franzen Contractor http www cecer army mil paver www PAVERTeam com PAVER 6 5 User Manual Acknowledgments The pavement management research and development of the PAVERTM system have been in progress since the early 1970 s These efforts have been sponsored and funded by several agencies Special thanks is due to the following agencies and their representatives who supported and shared in the development efforts over the years The US Air Force Roy Almendarez Imad Andari Jay Beam Mike Bohls Carl Borgwald Don Brown J E Dennard Everett Dodson John Duvall Jim Greene Ken Hevner Ross Higa Wayne Hudson Billy Lawson Jeff Love Charles McCarol Moises Medina Ed Miller Michael Myers Caren Ouellete William Peacock Craig Rutland Cliff Sander Michael Sawyer Mark Schumaker Ronald Sims George Vansteenburg William N Welborn Mike Womack and Charles York US Army Achmar Bill Borque Dan Boyer Ray Brown Gary Cox Mike Dean Mike Flaherty Raymond Frye Ken Gregg Jack Hinte Bob Lubbert Stan Nickell Charles Phillips Leo Price Ray Rolling Terry Sherman Pau
144. Line 2 n Optional Spacer 00000 DEFAULTFRAMESIZE 260 DEFAULTFRAMEUNITS SQF Where Line 1 FieldA Data values were collected in English or metric FieldB Comment to associate with the execution of this process FieldC Method of data association Uniqueld PID SID PCIVideolnspection txt FieldA FieldB FieldC FieldD FieldE RSPARK IFARB 01 46 5 2000 optional 4 optional Where FieldA The identifier of the section which owns this inspection NETWORKID BRANCHID SECTIONID SPACER FieldB Identifies the date common to all data from this inspection multi day inspections just pick a day FieldC Appendix B 141 FieldD FieldE PCIVideoSample txt FieldA FieldB FieldC FieldD FieldE FieldF FieldG 01 46 5 20004 1SMP2 R 52 95 SqM Sample Comment RSPARK IFARB Usually some observations resulting from inspection How many samples in the inspection Indicates the origin of the inspection data Where FieldA The identifier of the section which owns this inspection NETWORKID BRANCHID SECTIONID SPACER FieldB Identifies the date common to all data from this inspection multi day inspections just pick a day FieldC Assigned by video vendor for this video sample must be unique within section and inspection date FieldD Type of Sample R for Random and A for Additional FieldE Size of Sample FieldF Unit of measure as defined in PAVER for the Sample Size FieldG
145. Memorized Reports Memorized Report Inventory Items Above Critical 3 3 Record Count Memorize Delete E 1 N Select Columns Select Rows Order Rows etwork Branch Sect Comments Material Type Section COST Move Up Navigate through Required Work DATE 3 Latest Work Move inventory Latest Traffic Down components for Latest NDT Deflection data categories Latest Inspections Sample Quantity Units Sample Conditions Units Distress TYPE Extrapolated Distress Work Latest Conditions Work Completed Columns to be included in the report Edit Current Report The first step to editing a report is to select the desired report from the drop down list box at the top of the Edit window From here the format is the same as in the Create New Report options When editing is complete the changes take effect immediately and are reflected the next time the report is ran To Run a report select the report from the drop down list box at the EMSTM User defined Reports Tool window and the populated table appears The report generates at the moment of selection so all data is current GIS Reports The GIS Reports are a series of preset views that allow the user to see a variety of information about their database in a graphical display These reports require that a shapefile be linked to the PAVERTM database see Chapter 14 GIS Too
146. NGTH Surfaced Distress Codes 1 Alligator Cracking 6 Depression Patching amp Utility Cut Patching Shoving 2 Bleeding 7 Edge Cracking Polished Aggregate Slippage Cracking 3 Block Cracking 8 Joint Reflection Cracking Potholes Swell 4 Bumps And Sags 9 Lane Shoulder Drop Off Railroad Crossing Raveling 5 Corrugation 10 Long amp Trans Cracking Rutting Weathering SAMPLE SAMPLE Sketch Comments NUMBER AREA DISTRESS L CODE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE NUMBER AREA NUMBER AREA DISTRESS L DISTRESS L CODE CODE Appendix E 156 Airfield Concrete Pavement PCC AIRFIELD PAVEMENT CONDITION SURVEY DATA SHEET NAME SECTION WIDTH SECTION LENGTH NUMBER OF SLAB WIDTH SLAB LENGTH SLABS PCC Surfaced Distress Codes Blowup 65 Joint Seal Damage Pumping Shrinkage Cracks Corner Break 66 Patching Small Scaling Spalling Joints Cracks 67 Patching Large Settlement Faulting Spalling Corner Durability Cracking 68 Popouts Shattered Slab ASR SAMPLE NUMBER SLABS IN SAMPLE Sketch Comments m SAMPLE NUMBER SLABS IN SAMPLE Sketch Comments 157 Airfield Asphalt Pavement AC AIRFIELD PAVEMENT CONDITION SURVEY DATA SHEET INSPECTOR NAME BRANCH DATE USE INSPECTED SECTION SECTION WIDTH LENGTH Surfaced Distress Codes 41 Alligator Crac
147. ORT BSORT And SSORI tcr tees irae Kn d iia 27 Customize NSort BSort And SSort Headings eee 28 Additional ser Fields o rire iih teat ea ava 28 Inventory PIGKIISTS i 30 M amp R Plan Tables And 31 Localized Stopgap M amp R Tables And Families eere ee eee estes teten 31 Localized Preventative M amp R Tables And Families eese eene tnra atto 32 Global Preventative M amp R Tables And Families 33 Major M amp R Tables And Families inis retenti 34 Priority Tables opes mite iR i nie pii ire oriri e De Orte prb b 34 Layer Types And Casts 35 BUG EUS MM c E 35 bala Select Condition Types esser Define Condition And Age Categories Define User Distress Miscellaneous Other Tables Aircraft TY PO Layer Unit Of Measure Field Setting Define User Fields The system is designed so that you may assign user defined fields to each level of the inventory network branch and sec
148. SEARCH Section 1 Network 3 Section Properties Conditions Families Section ID 01 From FISHER ROAD Te E CURB RESEARCH RD Surface Rank 5 1 Last Constr Length 554 00 Width 23 00 nag Calc Area fis o66 00 Area Adjustment aFt True Area 6 066 00 gli EH 100 qr 2 1 f Calculate Category Zone Lanes Spaces 3 Shoulder Street 1 Grade Comment User Defined Shoulder ucc You are editing Current Values Historical Values Images 0 New Delete Workshops 264 Workshop 11 Virtual Inventory Objectives Create a Virtual Inventory for an airfield as well as for roads and parking lots Database For the airfield use the Neil Armstrong Workshop 11 database For the roads and parking lots use the Roads and Parking Workshop 11 database Tasks 1 For Airfields Create four Virtual Sections VS named RW for runways TW for taxiways AP for aprons and Other for any other uses 2 For Roads and Parking Create three Virtual Sections VS named RD for roadways PL for parking lots and Other for any other uses Workshops 265 Hints and Solution Guide For Workshop 11 1 Airfields Virtual Inventory ES After opening the Neil Armstrong database select Visual Menu gt gt Inventory gt gt Define Virtual Inve
149. SECTION SURVEY AIRTYPE ANNDEP AVDAILY PERDESGN PER2AT PER3AT ESAL COMMENT ENDDATE MATPRO NETWORK BRANCH SECTION LAYER TESTTYPE TESTDATE TESTLOC TESTVAL DEPTH COMMENT WORREQ NETWORK BRANCH SECTION WORKTYPE STADATE IDDATE PROPOSAL PHASE ACCOMP QTY COST MATERIAL THICK COMMENT Text Text Text Date Time Text Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Text Date Time Text Text Text Text Text Date Time Text Text Number Double Text Text Text Text Text Date Time Date Time Text Text Text Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Text 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 N 1 OO OO OO OO TRAFFIC DBF Traffic survey Details Large group of pavements Usually Airport City Sub Division Identifier Medium grouping of pavements Usually runway taxiway apron street name Area of same pavement type This is the unit of pavement used for inspection rating methods Starting date of traffic survey Airfields Aircraft model Airfields Annual number of departures Airfields Average number of daily departures Roadways Percent of traffic in design lane Roadways Percent of twin axle trucks in design lane Roadways Percent of trucks with 3 or more axles in design lane Roadways Annual ESAL in design lane Comments related to t
150. T3 SECTION NETWORK BRANCH SECTION FROM TOO ZONE CATEGORY RANK SURFACE SECLEN SECWID SECAREA SLABLEN SLABWID NUMSLAB JOINTLEN LCD LID LPCI FAMILY SHOULDER STRTYPE GRADE LANES SSORTI SSORT2 SSORT3 Text Text Text Text Number Double Number Double Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Date Time Date Time Number Double Text Text Text Number Double Number Double Text Text Text 10 10 25 10 10 10 10 25 25 00 92 92 OO OO CO OO OO OO 00 BRANCH DBF Pavement Branch Inventory Large group of pavements Usually Airport City Sub Division Identifier Medium grouping of pavements Usually runway taxiway apron street name Description of pavement branch Branch use ROADWAY APRON RUNWAY TAXIWAY Etc Number of pavement sections in the branch Total area of all sections in the branch Any additional comments about the branch Supplemental value for selecting branches Supplemental value for selecting branches Supplemental value for selecting branches SECTION DBF Pavement Section Inventory Large group of pavements Usually Airport City Sub Division Identifier Medium grouping of pavements Usually runway taxiway apron street name A
151. Transfer to PAVER to transfer the files into PAVERTM The transfer results indicate what sections where successfully imported and which ones were not If a section has no inspection information the information is not imported into for that inspection date If desired the transfer results may be printed by clicking Print at the bottom of the tab PAVER Shapefile Converter Converting From PAVER 4 x to 6 The PAVER Shapefile Converter is used to convert shapefiles that were used in version 4 x of PAVER to be used in version 6 as well as version 5 3 of The difference between shapefiles in version 4 x and version 6 is that in 6 shapefiles now contain a Unique ID The conversion of the shapefile will verify that the file contains a Unique ID and will add the field if necessary Converting coverages from PAVER 4 x to 6 is a two step process First take the PAVER 4 x coverage file into ArcView and convert the cov file to a shapefile shp To complete the process the shapefile must be converted using the PAVER Shapefile Converter Once the shapefile is converted the process is completed PAVER Shapfile Converter Select the source sh apefile Source Shape File Destination of Destination Shape Fle me i verted Source aie Data Interstate Research ParkCNVSHAPE shp shapefile Results of the shapefile conversion S
152. Valid For PClVideo UNIT F FT LF SF SQF SQFT M SM SOM COUNT SLAB SLABS System English English English English English English Metric Metric Metric Metric or English Metric or English Metric or English Video Inspection Import Data Format Access Database There are five data tables that can be created in Microsoft Access to input data They include the following PCIVideoDistress PCIVideoCondition PCIVideoInspection PCIVideoSample PCIVideoFrame At least one of the two tables in bold type are required Optional tables can be used to record additional descriptive data if available In general data values that have been filled in are required and those listed as optional can be omitted Appendix B 144 Appendix C Abbreviations Of Surface Y NEN 146 Abbreviations Of Surface Types Abbreviation Complete Name Distress Manual Reference AAC Asphalt overlay over asphalt concrete Asphalt ABR Asphalt over brick Asphalt AC Asphalt concrete Asphalt ACT Asphalt over cement treated base Asphalt APC Asphalt overlay over Portland cement concrete Asphalt APZ Asphalt over pozzolanic base Asphalt BR Brick Asphalt COB Cobblestone Asphalt GR Gravel Unsurfaced PCC Portland cement concrete Concrete PVB Paving blocks Asphalt ST Surface treatment Asphalt X Other Asphalt Appendix C 146 Appendix D Pavement Data Exchange PDE Forma
153. WEATH RAVEL L 52 WEATH RAVEL M Sample Number 14 Sample Comments 52 WEATH RAVEL M 52 WEATH RAVEL L 43 BLOCK CR L Sample Number 2 Sample Comments 52 WEATH RAVEL M 43 BLOCK CR L 52 WEATH RAVEL L Use RUNWAY Area 4000 down RW 26 Zone 100 00Ft 13 5 000 005gFt 999 99 SqFt Comments 600 00 SqFt Comments 4 999 96 SqFt Comments 5 000 005gFt 4 999 96 SqFt 999 99 SqFt 500 00 SqFt 5 000 008qFt 00 00 SqFt 999 99 SqFt 4 999 96 SqFt 5 000 00SaFt 500 00 SqFt 4 999 96 SqFt 999 99 SqFt Created inspection forms for 2 sections Created 2 inspections 255 Open the PCI Inspection form from PAVER toolbar and select section 8 26 or any other runway section in order to verify that today s inspection record has been setup Results of E PCENeilArms 8 26 A SAHAF Inspection E Summary data at time of inspection Set up Wizard Branch Use Section Surface A Section True Area on PCI form Section Length 101 t Section Width Inspection Date 4 25 2007 Edit Inspections Detailed Inspection Comments Calculate Conditions Sample Unit Edit Sample Units jb Gize NW Uuliriu Remaining Samples Sample Unit Size 000 00 Uss No Dees Distress Type 41 ALLIGATOR CR 46 JET BLAST 51 POLISHED AG 56 SWELLING 42 BLEEDING 47 JTREF CR 7 52 WEATHIRAVEL 43 BLOCK CR C 48L TCR 53
154. Y How to Import System Tables ADD the values from the import file to the values in my system tables REPLACE the values in my system tables with those from the import file USE WITH CAUTION Tables to Import Configure Pavement data and condition amie System table Tabs System Tables 7 r 1 import options zn nclude Condition T Include rit r Defined Report Working Status Accomplished percentage 0 100 Action File Table Begin import process im Create PAVER Inventory From Shape Data The Create PAVER Inventory From Shape Data tool allows the user to generate a complete PAVER database from an existing ESRI shapefile Before the user is able to import an ESRI shapefile there are 15 mandatory PAVER fields that must be populated in the shapefile s attribute table These fields need to be populated for each of the GIS polygons which correspond to a pavement section Each of the 15 fields has specific criteria for its field type and length that must be followed These are shown below NetworklId TTE Network Name String E Branchld String 10 String 35 Branch Use String 10 SectionId String 10 From String 35 String 35 Chapter 4 Database Tools 43 Surface Rank Construction Date Length Width Slab Length Slab Width True Area Ente
155. You are editing Cure f Images 0 New Copy Delete Creating Branches To create a branch click the Inventory button on the PAVER Button Bar The inventory data window appears with the Network file card displayed Click the file card tab 2 Branch to access the Branch file card If you have just added a new network the network will have no branches defined Click the New button at the bottom of the file card to enter a new branch The fields on the branch Chapter 5 Inventory 49 data entry form become populated with the label new or are blank depending on the type of field 1 e text numeric or picklist Enter the appropriate values Some fields are locked and will automatically reflect section data once sections for the branch are created The contents of the Use field are limited to a single value that 15 selected from a preexisting list of choices To enter a value in the Use field select the field and a down arrow will appear on the right side of the field data entry area Click on the arrow for a list of available choices in a scrolling picklist If there are more items in the list than can be shown in a single short list usually 5 to 10 items the list is displayed with a scroll bar arranged along the right side of the list Use the scroll bar arrows to select an item not visible in the list When the picklist is very long you may want to locate items in the list by typing the first character of your selection T
156. a x multiplier Slab Length Width Work quantity slab width slab length x distress quantity x multiplier Patch Area Work quantity distress quantity 0 6096 x squareroot distress quantity multiplier x multiplier 1 0 3716 Otherwise work quantity distress quantity x multiplier Alligator Cracking Patch Area Bleeding Distress Quantity Block Cracking Distress Quantity Bumps Sags Distress Quantity Corrugation Patch Area Depression Patch Area Edge Cracking Area Distress Quantity Edge Cracking Linear Distress Quantity Joint Reflection Cracking Area Distress Quantity Joint Reflection Cracking Linear Distress Quantity Lane Shoulder Drop Any Distress Quantity Longitudinal Transverse Cracking Distress Quantity Patch Utility Cut Patch Area Polished Aggregate Distress Quantity Pothole Constant All units are in metric Appendix H 169 Work Unit Conversion Type Multiplier Pothole Pothole Railroad Crossing Rutting Shoving Slippage Cracking Swell Raveling Weathering Blow up Shatter Blow up Shatter Blow up Shatter Blow up Shatter Blow up Shatter Blow up Shatter Corner Break Corner Break Corner Break Corner Break Corner Break Corner Break Divided Slab Divided Slab Durability Cracking Durability Cracking Durability Cracking Durability Cracking Durability Cracking Durability Cracking Faulting Joint Seal Damage Joint Seal Damage Lane Should
157. ailable views Section Condition List A representation of the condition plot for each section over the length of the reporting period Highlighting a record in the table causes the graph to respond displaying the condition information for that section only To see an average for all sections included in the report go to the summary views Inventory Items Each row in the table represents one section in the pavement network As the highlighted row in the Inventory Items table 15 changed the Section Condition table updates with historical interpolated historical and projected condition values for that section Each time the Section Condition table is updated the graph associated with the table replots the graphical view of the section condition This allows the user to quickly analyze the history and predicted condition of the network section by section E Section Work History Inventory Link The Section Work History view also linked to Inventory Items produces a list of all information in the work history table by section Section Condition Inventory Link The Section Condition Table is linked as the dependent table to the Inventory Items table parent table Overlay Family Curve Overlaying a family curve on the Section Condition plot shows how the current view is performing in comparison to a particular family model Inventory Work History The Inventory Work History view displays ALL work history records for ev
158. ame Browse Destination path CAEMS PROGRAM FILES USER DATA Browse Working Status Accomplished percentage 0 Action File Table No input file is selected Click Browse next to the Import Filename Navigate to the file Roadway e65 in C EMS Program Files WUser Data 227 Import PAYER data from an 40 or 50 or e60 or e65 file C Export PAVER data to an e65 file Name Date taken Tags Mansfield 2007 J Neil Armstrong Neil Armstrong Workshop 11 Neil Armstrong Workshop 12 Neil Armstrong 2007 Folders Ohio Workshop 6 b User Data Roads and Parking Class Workshop 3 JL Roads and Parking Workshop LL k Class Workshop 4b Roads and Parking Workshop 13 Class Workshop 8 Roadway Workshop 7 FORTCOLLINSTESTING i Favorite Links E Documents Import filename Recently Changed Destination path More Select file to import Mansfield V61M8BR Tables E60 File Roadways E65 gt Exports Working Status Cancel Accomplishe PAVER 6 0 Import File Selection filename CAEMS Files User DataXRoadways E 65 Browse Fil in e id P gt Roadways Browse imported Change file name How to Import System Tables ADD the values from the import file to the values
159. ap This is seen in the image below e re Ter PAVER 65 B Bt Branches H IFARB Sections Sections 03 ji INEWM B Sections B Sections 01 02 Select Pan Select ru Zoom Zoom Zoom Area In Out Center Print Assigned Assigned and Selected Unassigned rspark shp Assignment Locate Mode mouse synenronize me notemect colartian Click on section 01 in the IFARB Branch Workshops To assign a section to a GIS polygon click on the desired section on the tree selector and then select the associated polygon on the GIS map This will then color the section in green on the tree selector and color the polygon in red on the GIS map thus assigning the section For the first example we will assign IFARB section 01 Follow the directions below on the GIS Assignment Tool form Note The Select tool must be active on the GIS map to select GIS polygons Note To unassign a section first select the section on the tree selector This will highlight the section green on the tree selector and color the associated polygon in red on the GIS map Now click on the assigned red polygon on the GIS map This will then color the polygon and the section on the tree selector yellow thus unassigned PAVER 6 5 Select MN rmn Pan Select Nu Ei Branc
160. apefile Converter The PAVER Tree Menu is a tree listing of the networks branches and sections that are entered in the active PAVER database Each pavement section has a unique identification associated with it in PAVER used to link the GIS features to the pavement sections The link is automatically maintained even if the network branch or section identifications change The colors in both the PAVER Tree Menu and the GIS map have different meanings Green sections are assigned yellow are unassigned and red are the active and assigned sections GIS Assignment Tool Button Functions The Select tool located at the top of the GIS Assignment Tool dialog box allows the user to associate the PAVER data with the GIS map The GIS map of the base assigns different colors to sections with different linkage distinctions Specifically areas represented in green are assigned to a pavement section in the database areas in yellow are unassigned and sections in red identify those sections that are selected and assigned The current sections will normally be highlighted in the PAVER tree menu The Select tool will continue to be active and may be used again until another tool is selected 1 To determine the PAVER section identification of a section on the GIS map Chapter 14 GIS Tools 109 To use the Select tool click Select and the mouse icon will change to an arrow and a question mark Click on a green sect
161. as created each with a PCI value If the user wants to investigate the condition of a collection of sections then the use of the Virtual Inventory may be of aid The original database uses default aggregation rules where properties condition construction date grade lanes are calculated as averages weighted by area If the user wants to use an alternative aggregation rule they can utilize a Virtual Inventory The Virtual Inventory option in 6 provides the user the ability to make copies of existing inventories in which physical sections may be combined to make a Virtual Section For example a virtual inventory can be created where all taxiway sections may be combined to create a virtual taxiway section Conditions may then be calculated as well as reports for the virtual section To create a virtual inventory go to Visual Menu gt gt Inventory gt gt Define Virtual Inventory Click New and enter a name for the new virtual inventory The user has the option to use different aggregation rules To do this click Edit Aggregation Rule Sets and create a New rule set Select a Time interval for inspection aggregation and select the Aggregation Rule relevant to each property Now Virtual Sections need to be created Click New and enter a name for the virtual section Under the Assign Sections tab define the new virtual section PAVER provides a list of Available sections from the original inventory and the user can select mult
162. ase and save as file name Class Tasks Create a new database named Class Within the Class database create a network named Exercise and Branches and Sections as outlined on the following page 2 Create a section user defined field to record the shoulder type and add the following selections Bl None E Paved AC m Paved PCC Gravel Grass 3 Associate a digital image of your choice with the newly created sections Workshops 188 Supplemental Airfield Inventory Information To be used on the created Class database Network ID Exercise Network Name Exercise Branch ID Spring S Branch Name Spring Street Use Roadway Section ID 02 rom East side of 2nd Avenue 18400 East Side of 3rd Avenue ast Construction Date 06 23 1985 ast Construction Date 08 17 1991 Area Adjustment 0 Area Adjustment 0 Slab Size 15 X 15 Workshops 189 Hints amp Solution Guide For Workshop 2 1 Creating network branch and sections Create a new database named Class by clicking File gt gt New Database Save the created Class database in the User Data folder Once the database has been created the path to the Class database will be visible in the bottom left corner of the program window File Tables Preferences Add Ins Window Help New database New Database PCI Reports Pred Delete Database Open Database Print Printer Setu
163. ase you use Tasks f Create a new branch use Workshops 248 Hints amp Solution Guide For Workshop 9 b B Select the Branch Use table by clicking on Tables gt gt Edit Inventory Pick Lists Edit Inventory Pick Lists Define User Fields n donem nnd Invente ck Lists Edit Inventory Pick Lists M amp R Plan Tables and Families Condition Tools Misc Other Tables Click on tab 7 Branch Use Add a new branch use in the last row of the table as seen below Branch Use Warehouse Use Description Warehouse Use Category Roadway Parking Inventory Pick Lists 4 Sholde 5 Street Type 2 Categoy 3 SectonRanks 7 Branch Use EE Branchuse UseDescrp on Use Category STAGING AREA Roadway DRIVEWAY Roadway HELIPAD Airfield MTRPOOL Roadway OTHER Roadway PARKING Roadway ROADWAY Roadway ROUND Roadway RUNWAY Airfield STORAGE Roadway Define and TAXIWAY Airfield name new t gt Warehouse Warehouse 1oadway branch use Workshops 249 Newly defined branch use Workshops The new branch use Warehouse can now be defined in the Inventory module on the Branch tab Network MFD APRON A FBO 2 Branch 1 Branch ID APRON Branch Name APRONS Number of Sections 5 00 in Branch Length Sum of 95 Width Avg of 143 i Sections Sections Ca
164. assigned sections 4 Move Selected Section s to oe Show entire set Show subset a Different Project The Section Level Work tab operates like the Project Work tab On the left side of the tab there is a table listing all of the sections in the current project When a section is highlighted in the left table the right table will display what work items are associated with that section Any project work that has been assigned on the previous tab will appear for every section The buttons on the far right of the tab are used to modify the individual work items To edit or delete any of the items highlight the desired work item in the table and this will activate the edit and delete buttons If any new items are added or old items are edited the user form operates and looks like the Add Work Item Project Level Project level work must be edited on its own tab and cannot be edited on the Section Level Work tab Work Items View tab gives a summary view of the work items or you can select to view the details of each work item Once all of the desired work has been planned close out of the Project Planner to return to the main M amp R Plan Parameters window Once the Work Plan has been fully configured clicking Execute on the bottom of the M amp R Plan form launches the process The plan analysis may take some time depending on the plan configuration as well as the database size Chapter 13 M amp R Plan 101 Add W
165. ata Report sections with missing data for PCI calculation Report missing system table information Verify distresses 7 recalculate conditions for all sections Recalculate surface for all sections Select All Clear All For Sections With Duplicate Assignments Keep first non default assiqnment Assign to default family Replace names in cached inventory data with current names Yes No Manage samples with no distresses Mark all samples with no distresses as inspected but no distress and list them Delete these sample units and inspections with no sample units and list them Just list them When there is no condition index in system tables for some condition records in the pavement database Create an UnknownCl in system tables Delete the condition records Just report them Remove Duplicate Distress Severity Qty C Yes No completed 101 inspections 0 29 minutes gt IRP IFARB 01 19 171990 Cached inventory surface changed from to AC IFARB 01 4 23 2007 Changed current surface from AAC to Calculation completed 8 sections in 0 02 minutes Eancel 241 Workshop 8 Review Creation Of Additional User defined Fields Objectives Create an additional user defined field at the network level which displays the network s elevation Database Open the Class database by clicking File gt
166. ata Sample Directory containing the PAVEMENT MDB IDIR C EMS Program Files PCIVideo Directory containing the ASCII text files INSP PCIVInspection txt File containing Inspection information SAMP PCIVSample txt File containing Sample information FRAM PCIVFrame txt File containing Frame information DIST PCIVDistress txt File containing Distress information COND PCIVCondition txt File containing Condition information OPTN PCIVOptions txt File containing PCIVideo options INTERACTIVE If present force display of UI Appendix B 140 PCIVdb2PVR exe User interface for the use of Distress Data collected into an pre configured Access database It is recommended that the complete parameter string be enclosed in quotes Command Line Parameters PVR C EMS Program Files PDIR C EMS Program Files User Data Sample Directory containing the PAVEMENT MDB IDIR C EMS Program Files PCIVideo Directory containing PCIVIntermediateFile mdb INTERACTIVE If present force display of UI Six text files are needed to perform an import of video inspection data The following file formats support the import of collected frame distress data Fields are separated commas Strings are enclosed by quotes Dates enclosed by pound signs Network Branch and Section are separated by 2 colons Optional fields may be blank but present PClVideoOptions txt Line 1 FieldA FieldB FieldC Metric Data collected in contract xxx PID
167. ate to EMS Program Files User Data and click on your specific project folder Within the project folder there will now be a folder named GISView Inventory if it was the Inventory GIS Report that was generated These individual shapefiles can be copied and pasted to another location on the users computer and then manipulate as needed in a GIS program such as ArcView The Inventory GIS Report 15 sort of all inclusive as it contains essentially every field in for the associated database Often a user will want an Excel or dBase file showing all of the individual Chapter 14 GIS Tools 112 PAVER attributes for their database Once an Inventory shapefile is generated it will have a dbf file as part of it The dbf file contains the shapefiles attribute information and it can be opened and converted in Microsoft Excel as well as a number of other programs depending on the user s needs Shapefile Coordinate Shift The Shapefile Coordinate Shift module functions like the Shapefile Converter discussed above but this module also allows you to shift the coordinates of the shapefile during conversion The Shapefile Coordinate Shift 15 divided into three sections The first section displays the Source Shapefile the second section displays the Destination Shapefile and the third section displays the results of the conversion process First locate the shapefile you wish to convert by clicking Select and brow
168. ated Customized views Customized views can also be created by choosing this option Condition Frequency before Repair This table 15 divided into six default unless otherwise specified PCI categories excellent very good good fair poor and failed Under each of these categories the number of sections are presented for each year in the reporting period before repair As in the other tables highlighting an individual year will display its associated graph to the right of the table Chapter 13 M amp R Plan 102 Annual Condition After Repair Displays the condition of each branch and the entire network s after the recommended work has been performed Condition Table Shows a before and after average condition of all sections included in the current plan and for each year of the plan Total Funded Total Unfunded These tables show how much money was spent Funded and how much wanted to spend but did not have the funds Unfunded or Backlog Expenditure Summary Lists the category and amount spent per year Project Summary Lists all of the projects and project details that were included in the M amp R Plan report Project Contents link Project Summary This table is linked with the Project Summary table and lists the sections and section details of the project that is highlighted on the Project Summary table which is included in the M amp R Plan report Detail View Section The Detail View gt g
169. ation Tool ES To run the database verification tool open the desired database Roadway Workshop 7 pvr Select Visual Menu from the PAVER button bar File Tables Preferences Add Ins Window Help H Inventory A wok Aci R Reports ba Pred Modeling fi Cond Analysis Q GiS Tree Sel EE List Sel Wizards TE Visual Menu 7 Help 6 0 About Click Inventory on the left hand side and then Data Verification Tools and Continue Define Inventory Inventory Define Virtual Inventory Work Inspection Conditions Reports Condition Prediction Model Condition Model Family Assignment Condition Analysis M amp A Family Definition M amp R Family Assignment M amp A Plan GIS Tools Selectors Wizards e 9 9 9 9 amp 9 69 9 9 9 v o Continue Close E When the Confirm Database Verification Startup box appears click Yes Note It is highly recommended that you make a copy e65 file of your database before running the database verification tools is Review the Verification Tools by moving your cursor over the verification options on the left Workshops 240 Verification Tools explanation Status of Verification Tools Workshops Verify branch data and remove duplicate section data Database Verification Tools For Sections With Duplicate Assignments Keep fist nun defaull assiyrmernt L sures that only one family model is assigned to each section and insures tha
170. become more integrated into the user can now select an inventory item using a GIS coverage This first requires the database to be linked to a coverage via the PAVER GIS process Once GIS link has been completed the map can be viewed via the GIS selector By simply pointing and clicking on any polygon in the coverage the selector makes the link to that section Like the Tree selector the GIS selector allows for selection but not the displaying of data E mx Select 52 Zoom Zoomin Zoom Center Print Area Chapter 2 User Interface Tree GIS Selector The Tree GIS selector is simply a combination of the Tree and GIS selectors displayed in one window This allows the user to select an inventory item using the simplest method for that particular inventory item For example if you know only the location of the pavement the GIS selector is most useful If you need to trace through the hierarchy the Tree selector 15 the logical choice The Tree GIS selector combines both of these features into one compact tool Selector PAVER ORCS Pan Select Select Zoom Zoom In Zoom Center Print Networks Area Area Out 7 Branches Sections INEWM INEWT IRESE ere YY YY ERR ERE RR ERR RRR RRR ERE L
171. box to select a table of acceptable minimum conditions The Edit button can be used to review and edit the selected minimum condition table The tables are arranged with an associated Minimum Condition for each Year If the Deterioration Rate box is selected the user 15 able to configure the relationship between deterioration and inspection frequency checks the rate of deterioration for a section included in the report and categorizes it based on the numbers placed in each Rate of deterioration category Select the Sampling Strategy for the determination of the number of samples to inspect for each section and enter in the Inspection Expenses per sample unit data which will be used to calculate the inspection cost for each section Run the Inspection Schedule report by clicking Execute The Inspection Schedule report is presented in the EMS Report Viewer with the default view as a summary of inspections per year To obtain a version of the report that lists the individual sections inspected for each year of the report period click Go to Detail When closing the report PAVERTM will ask you if you want to save it If you save the plan it will create a file name of your choice with a rpi extension Chapter 7 Inspections Conditons 68 liil Inspection Schedule Parameters o y Plan Setup Insp Criteria Sampling Strategy amp Cost Minimum Condition Default Minimum Condition v Edit Deterioration Rate
172. branch data and remove duplicate section data 4 Keep first non default assiqnment m C Assign to default family Verify section construction history Replace names in cached inventory data with current names 6 Yes No Verify reset latest inspection indicators V Check for duplicate Major and duplicate inspections Manage samples with no distresses Mark all samples with no distresses as Verify work required history descriptions inspected but no distress and list them Delete these sample units and inspections V Verify inspection samples and cached inventory data with no sample units and list them Justlist them v Report sections with missing data for PCI calculation When there is no condition index in system tables for some condition records in the v Report missing system table information pavement database E Creati Unk i tem tabl Verify distresses recalculate conditions for all sections dino Ad Delete the condition records Recalculate surface for all sections Just report them Select All Clear EMS Image Viewer The EMS mage Viewer manages the saving recalling viewing and enhancing of pictures drawings and other stored images in the PAVERTM program The EMS mage Viewer is accessed from the Inventory section of PAVER 6 The network branch and section cards of the Inventory pr
173. by using the mouse to point at the Family box and double clicking the left mouse button Family information can also be assigned under the Prediction Model button Three user defined section fields are arranged along the bottom of the screen These fields are used to contain user defined inventory information and can be used to sort and select inventory maintenance and inspection information Chapter 5 Inventory 52 E Inventory IRP INEWM 01 3 Section Properties Conditions Families SectionID 01 From NEwTON DRIVE Te INTERSTATE DRIVE Surface Type Rank Last Constr Length 1 328 00 Width 26 00 Calc Area 455400 Area Adjustment True Area 34 554 00 Date Calculate C Calculate Category Zone Lanes Spaces 0 Shoulder Street Grade 0 Comment User Defined Section user You are editing Images 0 New Copy Delete Conditions Families This tab provides a quick reference to condition and family assignment data for the selected section in four preset views View all latest conditions table with the last computed last entered condition indices associated with the section View one condition index for all dates Shows every date for which one selected index occurred for the current section A drop down list box allows the user to choose the condition for which they would like to display information View all indices and
174. cal Values Images 0 New Delete List Selector Network Exercise gt nm Branch Spring St Spring Street Section v From z 2 Branch i Branch ID Spring St Branch Name Spring Street Branch Use Agapway w Number of Sections fi 00 in Branch Length Sum of 50000 Width Avg of 30 00 Sections Sections Calc Area Sum of 15 000 00 Area Adjustment o True Area 15 000 00 Sections Comment Fiel User Defined m L gt You are editing CurentValues Historical Values Images 0 New Copy Delete Workshops 194 List Selector Ben Spingst Section From x zi section Exercise Spring St 02 Properties Conditions Families Section ID From East Side of 2nd Avenue Te East Side of 3rd Avenue Constructed 8 17 1991 Length 600 00 Width 30 00 n s Cancel ou are editing Current Values Historical Values Images 0 Copy E Network Exercise Spring St 02 3 Section Properties Conditions Families Section ID 02 From East side of 2nd Avenue To East Side of 3rd Avenue Surface Type pcc Rank s Last Const 571771597 Date Length 500 00 Width 30 00 Date was back calculated En ter in th e Slab Calc fis 0
175. caling Crazing Area Slab Area Shrinkage Cracking Linear Constant Shrinkage Cracking Area Constant Corner Spalling Area Constant Corner Spalling Linear Constant Joint Spalling Linear Constant Joint Spalling Area Slab Width Joint Spalling Area Slab Width Joint Spalling Linear Slab Width Joint Spalling Area Slab Width Joint Spalling Linear Slab Width Alligator Cracking Any Patch Area Bleeding Any Distress Quantity Block Cracking Any Distress Quantity Corrugation Any Patch Area Depression Any Patch Area Jet Blast Any Distress Quantity Joint Reflection Cracking Linear Distress Quantity Joint Reflection Cracking Area Distress Quantity Longitudinal Transverse Cracking Distress Quantity Oil Spillage Patch Area Patching Patch Area Polished Aggregate Distress Quantity Note units are in metric Appendix H 171 Dist Raveling Rutting Shoving Slippage Cracking Swelling Weathering Blow up Shatter Blow up Shatter Blow up Shatter Blow up Shatter Blow up Shatter Blow up Shatter Corner Break Corner Break Corner Break Corner Break Corner Break Corner Break Linear Cracking Linear Cracking Durability Cracking Durability Cracking Durability Cracking Durability Cracking Durability Cracking Durability Cracking Joint Seal Damage Joint Seal Damage Small Patch Small Patch Large Patch Utility Cut Large Patch Utility Cut Popouts Popouts Pumping Pumping Scaling Scaling gt Linear Area
176. can be found in EMS Program Files Paver Templates directory The XML data dictionary layout is presented below 50 Schema Root s Annotation 0 pavementData n pavementData pavementData 2 geospatialInsp geospatialInsp pavementData Po geospatialInsp geospatialInsp inspectedElem 4 geospatialInsp inspectedCondi inspectedCom 3 inspectionDate string 3 units availableUnits level inspectionLevel J inspector string 1 defaultiInspect string o3 frmPrefix string Appendix B 2215 startLocation geospatialLoca endLocation geospatialLoca 225 eenterLocation geospatialLoca inspectionData c inspectedElem string o size double PID string sectionUniqueid string sampleUniqueid string inspectedType availableTypes comment string noDistresses boolean o map string c inspectionSam string 21100 startLocation geospatialLoca 2215 endLocation geospatialLoca 22 centerLocation geospatialLoca l 11 conditions levelCondition PID string sectionUniqueid string startLocation geospatialLoca endLocation geospatialLoca centerLocation geospatialLoca o PID string sectionUniqueid string comment string 137 The XML format presented above does include items t
177. ce allocated to a table in the Report Viewer If you want to increase the vertical space available for a table you must close one of the other Report Viewer tables You may use the zoom function on active tables with the right button click tool for a temporary larger presentation of a table or a graph Right button Click Right button Click On Tables Whenever possible information in is presented in tables These tables are used to input edit and review reports EMSTM Report Viewer and Reports The tables in PAVERTM are equipped with several features that enhance the capabilities of the PAVERTM system These features include m Table printing Exporting the table to Excel Changing the formatting of the table Zooming in on the table Adding or removing fields Sorting table To access the extended table features you must first make the spreadsheet table active by clicking on the table Once the table is active and the mouse pointer 15 over any portion of the table right click to invoke the menu of extended table features Chapter 2 User Interface 18 EMS Report Viewer C EMS Program Files Paver rpcdeflt rpc E To Summary Inventory Items ROADWAY INTERSTATE ROADWAY INTERSTATE ROADWAY Sal INTERSTATE ROADWAY INTERSTATE ROADWAY INTERSTATE Zm ROADWAY 876 INTERSTATE 1 ROADWAY 840 INTERSTATE Revise Layout ROADWAY 840 INTERSTATE Save Layout
178. ck Next and will display all the sections Chapter 15 Wizards 119 that will be changed allowing the user to review items that will be changed and to deselect any changes that they do not want to take place Run the Inventory Property Change Wizard by clicking Apply and will update the selected sections lil Inventory Property Change Wizard Change Property Values on Networks Branches Sections Property Zone Select new Property Value Set pr operty va I ues Property value comes from a list znel Fieldinspector Imagelnspector Data Inspection Export Version 6 5 includes a new feature to export sections to be surveyed in preparation for use in the PAVER FieldInspector ImageInspector This Export tool uses an 170 file to export information about sections to be surveyed in the sister programs This wizard provides a step by step procedure to export data to be used by the PAVER FieldInspector ImagelnspectorTM Access the FieldInspector ImageInspector Data Inspection Export Wizard from the Tool Bar by selecting Wizards The FieldInspector ImageInspector Data Inspection Export Wizard contains five display screens The first display screen seen below prompts the user to define the file name to export to After this has been defined the Next button on the bottom of the wizard will bec
179. cking Climate Durability 38 Corner Spalling Climate Durability 39 Joint Spalling Climate Durability Appendix F 163 Asphalt Surfaced Airfields Pavement Distress Distress Type 4 Alligator Cracking Load 42 Bleeding Other 43 Block Cracking Climate Durability 44 Corrugation Other 45 Depression Other 46 Jet Blast Other 47 Joint Reflection Cracking Climate Durability 48 Longitudinal Transverse Cracking Climate Durability 49 Oil Spillage Other 50 Patching Climate Durability 51 Polished Aggregate Other 52 Raveling Climate Durability 53 Rutting Load 54 Shoving Other 55 Slippage Cracking Other 56 Swell Other 57 Weathering Climate Durability Appendix F 164 Concrete Surfaced Airfields Pavement Distress Distress Type 61 Blow Up Climate Durability 62 Corner Break Load 63 Linear Cracking Load 64 Durability Cracking Climate Durability 65 Joint Seal Damage Climate Durability 66 Small Patch Other 67 Large Patch Utility Cut Other 68 Popouts Other 69 Pumping Other 70 Scaling Other 71 Faulting Other 72 Shattered Slab Load 73 Shrinkage Cracking Other 74 Joint Spalling Other 75 Corner Spalling Other 76 Alkili Silica Reaction Other Unsurfaced Roads Pavement Distress Type 81 Improper Cross Section Other 82 Inadequate Roadside Drainage Other 83 Corrugation Climate Durability 84 Dust Other 85 Pothole Climate Durability 86 Rutting Climate Durability 8
180. click on Next Sample Unit and repeat the distress entry for sample unit 02 PctExercise RW 6 24 0 data at time of inspection Branch Use RUNWAY Section Surface Type AC Section True Area 130000 SqFt Section Length 1300 Ft Section Width 100 Ft Inspection Date 4 23 2007 Edit Inspections Detailed Inspection Comments Calculate Conditions Sample Unit 01 v Edit Sample Units EG es rouna auring Remaining Samples Sample Unit Size SqFt i Have NoDickass Distress Type 41 ALLIGATOR CR 46 JET BLAST 51 POLISHED AG C 56 SWELLING 42 BLEEDING C 47 JT REF CR 52 RAVELING C 57 WEATHERING C 43 BLOCK CR C 48 L T CR 53 RUTTING C 44 CORRUGATION C 49 OIL SPILLAGE 54 SHOVING 45 DEPRESSION 50 PATCHING 55 SLIPPAGE CR Distress Severity Distress Quanti Low Medium High C NIA 1000 00 L Distress Description Severity Quantity Units M 41 ALLIGATOR 1 000 SqFt Delete Distress Replace Distress 4 Previous Sample Unit Sample Unit Smp Images 0 Insp Images 0 202 Summary data at time of inspection Branch Use RUNWAY Section Surface Type AC Section True 13 SqFt Section Length 1300 Ft Section Width 100 Ft Inspection Date 4 23 2007 X Edit Inspections Detailed Inspection Comments Calculate Conditions Sample Unit 02 v EditSample Units Sample Unit Size Sqr Dunne
181. ction Section ID o2 From East side of 2nd Avenue To East side of 3rd Avenue eur Sais Date 500 00 Width 30 00 Date was back calculated 18 00 00 ae penning 00 sar ue Aves 18 000 00 sare Slab Length 15 00 Width peo Total Slabs 80 00 Joint Length 1 770 00 Jr Category Zone Lanes Spaces o ts Shoulder Street Type Grade jf User Defined Shoulder Type Fields y Gravel ou are editing Current Values Historical Values Add Image New Cop add an image to the EMS Image Viewer click New and choose the image file to add For now add the image file Workshop Picture jpg that is provided in the User Data Folder Workshops 197 Network Exercise Spring St 02 el Jot Network Branch 3 Section Properties Conditions Families preton ID 2 EMS Image Viewer elio Surface Type pcc DOS j Images 14141 Item Add new Length enn 0n Definition image Calc Area in User Dat k Slab Length EDD Look in a ser Data Total Slabs O class Workshop 2 Armstrong_2007 80 00 Workshop 3 Roads and Parking Prowse for c a 3 E Workshop Picture JPG Image Z Mansfield Shoulder Mansfield 2007 neil Armstrong User Defined Fields File name Workshop Picture JPG
182. ction component of PAVERTM Entering Inspection Dates And Samples To enter inspection information first verify that the desired network branch section 1s selected using the Select Inventory Item window Notice that the name of the window corresponds to the network branch section that is currently selected The Inspection Date drop down list box allows the user to select a previous inspection according to its inspection date which is useful if the user needs to add or edit information for a previous inspection To enter information for a new inspection click Edit next to the Inspection Date window The Inspections window appears displaying a list of past inspections Click New and a new inspection with the current date appears at the top of the list When you first create a new inspection date the new inspection has the same sample information as the previous inspection If the actual inspection date is different click on the date and edit it Other fields in the window including entering a comment for the inspection may be edited When the inspection date and other fields are as desired click Close to return to the Inspection Data Entry window the most recent inspection will be the currently selected one To enter comments for an inspection date click the Detailed Inspection Comments box and enter a comment which is stored with that inspection date To view the comments for a given date select the date in the Inspection Date windo
183. d way is to click on the Family Assignment Tool button on the tab 6 Assign Family via the Prediction Modeling window Once the Family Assignment Tool window is open a drop down list box labeled Family Model Selected appears and is where the user will select the Prediction Model to assign a family of sections to On the window to the right there is a button labeled Edit Family Model Definition which reverts the user back to the Prediction Modeling window for any editing Directly below there is a window to manually enter a Critical condition for this Family Model which will be set to a default PCI value of 55 This value will tell when to flag sections M amp R based on the family model chosen Below the critical PCI section there are two tables side by side The table on the right lists all the sections that are currently assigned to the chosen family model The table on the left has several view options but is mainly there to view what sections have not been assigned to the current family model To assign sections to a family model highlight the desired section on the left hand table and click the single right pointing arrow dividing the two tables This will move the highlighted section to the right table assigning it to the selected family model If the double right pointing arrow is selected it will assign and move all sections from the left table to the right table Similarly the left pointing arrows move sections to
184. d width Total Slabs True Area Ota 9703 Slab Length x Slab Width Total Slabs ae 40 Slab UTEM The formula for calculating Joint Length 1s based on the average slab length and width along with the dimensions of the section The above image shows user entered inventory data for IRESE 01 which has a calculated Joint Length of 932 feet The formula for Joint Length is shown below along with the calculation for section IRP IRESE 01 ection Length Section Width 5 int Length 1 x section width nE 1 x secti Joint Leng Slab Length 1 x Section Wi Slab Width 1 x Section Length Joint Length 22 1 x28 1 400 Joint Length 532 400 932 Ft If the user has specifically measured Joint Length and or Total Slabs these calculated values be overridden allowing the user to enter their measured values Some of the section fields can only be changed using the choices in the picklists Picklist choices can be edited or expanded through the Tables button above the PAVERTM Button Bar See Chapter 3 System Tables gt gt Edit Inventory Picklists for further directions After the basic section information there are two boxes Conditions and Families Condition information cannot be edited from the Section file card but rather can be entered in the routines run from the Field Inspect button on the Button Bar The family assignment for the section or other sections can be changed
185. ded click Select in the Destination Shapefile area of the box After selecting the destination file you are then able to select the appropriate Shift Mode for the converted shapefile You may select a pre made shift mode or a User Specified shift mode from the drop down list box To complete the conversion process click Convert As the conversion takes place the results will be shown in the lower window Shapefile Coordinate Shift Source Shape Shape File Type Records Destination Shape File Shift Right Down mnstield shp shp Mest shp Chapter 16 Add ins Appendix A Inspection Information File Format Standard And Extended PP Rn 135 07 AC Or GR And 10 Card Format 135 08 AC Or GR And 11 Card Format 135 Inspection Information File Format Standard And Extended Formats The following description is based on a model where the Cards are now represented by lines in atext file Files are in ASCII text fixed width format Note PAVER 4 and later support the extended branch and section number fields 07 AC Or GR And 10 PCC Card Format These cards contain section header information and supplemental inspection One card required per section inspected Field Name Form ID Inspection Date Bra
186. descriptions Ensures all work history and work required entries have a work type description Reports sections and dates that have work codes no longer in the system tables 6 Verify inspection samples and cached inventory data Ensures all sample units either have distresses or are marked inspected but no distresses Checks and fixes cached inventory data associated with inspections 7 Report sections with missing data for PCI calculation Reports all sections missing data needed for PCI calculation 8 Report missing system table information Lists networks branches and sections containing data that is missing from the System Tables 9 Verify distresses and recalculate conditions for all sections Reports invalid or incomplete distress entries Recalculates PCI and other selected distress indices for large databases this option may take considerable time Chapter 5 Inventory 56 10 Recalculate surface for all sections Ensures that the surface type AAC etc for each section is correct according to the work history Select the Data Verification Tools to run as well as any corresponding options and then click Start will run the selected Data Verification Tools and produce a verification report listing all the sections that were altered and the associated actions carried out for each error Database Verification Tools 3 f For Sections With Duplicate Assignments Verify
187. ding on the speed of the computer the parameters of the report and the size of the database this could be a significant advantage Saving M amp R Plan also provides an easy and efficient method to compare different reports Required Work Planner When Required Work Planner is selected via the Visual Menu the Project Planner window appears This 15 the same project planner window that is described above under tab 5 Project Planning operating in the same way but allowing the user to bypass the main M amp R Plan Parameters tool Chapter 13 M amp R Plan 104 14 GIS Tools Shapefile Creation 2 2 2 222222 2 106 Sha pefile Creat OM E 106 Shapefile ModifiCatlO eee 106 Shapefile Del Stir assess c 108 PAVER Shapefile 108 GIS Assignment 2 4 2442122 1 1 1 1 2 22 01004 109 What Is The GIS Assignment Tool 109 GIS Assignment Tool Button Functions eese ense tentent 109 Accessing The GIS Reports 112 Shapefile Coordinate 113 Shapefile Creation Modification Shapefile Creation In
188. e Workshops 201 Edit create sample unit info Add remove sample unit info Selected inspection date and sample unit Enter sample distress type severity and quantity Add delete replace distress data Workshops List Selector Exercise gt Bess Branch RW 6 24 Runway 6 24 Section 028 From 5 00 18 00 E PCEExercise RW 6 24 028 Summary data at time of inspection Branch Use RUNWAY Section Surface Type AC Section True Area 120000 Section Length 1300 Ft Section Width 100 Inspection Date 4 23 2007 7 Detailed Inspection Comments Calculate Conditions Sample Unit z Edit Sample Units Sample Unit Size No distresses found during inspection Select Samples Sample Units For 4 23 2007 Sample Units from Other Inspections Sample Sample A Sample Sample Sample 5 Number Size Units 01 Random 5 000 Sq Random 5 00d Sq Enter inspection data for sample unit 01 by clicking on radio button next to the corresponding distress and severity level and then entering in the quantity per Survey Info at the beginning of this Workshop When you finish entering the distress information click Add and then proceed to enter the remaining distresses in the same fashion When you are finished with sample unit 01
189. e When the EMail response arrives you can copy paste the Activation code in the area provided below After entering it press the Activation Key NOTE DO NOT CLOSE THIS FORM UNTIL YOU PROCESS YOUR ACTIVATION Activation Code 123456789 Cancel Phone Activation When activating PAVER over the phone EJ The serial number will be populated automatically from the first activation screen The system ID will be populated automatically from your computer Call the number shown on the screen and provide the serial number and system ID shown to receive an activation code to enter in the Activation Code box Once the activation code has been entered select Activate to activate your copy of PAVER uc roo m You must obtain an activation key before you can proceed Please call the phone number below You will be asked for the Serial Number and System ID Enter the Activation Key you receive below Phone number 317 723 3202 SerialNumber A A System ID Enter the code provided over the phone into this box Activation Code Chapter 1 Overview Activation Complete Ifa valid activation code has been entered the screen below will be shown indicating that PAVERTM has been activated and is now ready for use mmus PAVER has now been activated Activation Failed
190. e AER y oom In Center Print Other view layer Workshops EE inventory Surface Use Rank Category rspari Surface 222 Now Close of the Inventory Surface Use Rank Category GIS view and select the Last PCI GIS view option Select the Inventory Surface Use Rank Category Last PCI GIS Last PCI view option Assignment of PCI Deterioration and M amp R Families This GIS view will display the last PCI data that was recorded entered PAVER Non pavement No data Unsatisfactory 0 55 Degraded 56 70 Adequate 71 100 223 Workshops Workshop 5 Database Management Import Export Objectives Import and export a database using export files e65 Database For this workshop we will be using two databases as defined below Tasks 1 Export the Interstate Research Park database using the Import Export Tool and name it CAEMS Program Files User Data Roadway e65 2 Export the Neil Armstrong database using the PAVERTM Import Export Tool and name it CAEMS Program Files User Data MAirport e65 3 Import the Roadway e65 database using the PAVERTM Import Export Tool and name it Roadway 4 Import the Airport e65 database using the PAVERTM Import Export Tool and name it Airport 5 Delete the
191. e inspectedElement node above Direct attributes for inspectedComment If desired to import Mandatory PID or sectionUniqueid as defined above If desired to import only one attribute Mandatory The XML tree node and attribute structure above describes common ways to import inspection data at different levels The data dictionary used to verify xml formatting contains extra nodes not described above and only is used internally during the XML import into In the same location as the data dictionary examples XMLs are provided to aid in the understanding of the structure These example XMLs use the default database Roads and Parking in PAVERTM The following image depicts one of the example XML s importing at the sample level Appendix B 139 pavementData xsi noNamespaceSchemaLocationz PavementInspectionDataV2 xsd gt geospatialInspectionData inspectionDate 7 13 2008 units English levelz SAMPLE lt inspectedElement inspectedElementID 0001 size 2500 PID ROADPARK PKUES 2 gt lt centerLocation gt latitude degrees 28 minutes 28 seconds 8 262177 northSouth N gt longitude degrees 80 minutes 32 seconds 38 72498 eastWest W gt lt centerLocation gt lt inspectionData gt lt PCIDistresses gt levelDistress distressCode 03 quantity 238 136804221442 severity L gt lt levelDistress distressCode 19 quantity 42 9508250808349 severity M gt PCIDistresse
192. e unless the importing user takes special steps not to overwrite existing files If you specify that an export file includes all system files the person importing your file will replace their system files with the system files that you have exported When creating an export file you must specify the pavement database to export You may do this by clicking the Browse button in the File Selection area for Pavement file to export The export file that is created will be located as indicated by the Export path and file name selection When these steps are complete click the Export button located on the lower left portion of the export window The Working Status portion of the export window displays the progress of the export process and indicates the completion of the export file You may reconfigure the export options to create another export file or click the Close button to leave 6 5 Export Chapter 4 Database Tools 41 Configure ptions e xport Export pavement data and associated condition families proce du re Include other non associated condition families Include Images Include Virtual Inventory Condition Types and Categories Include Required Projects 7 User Defined Fields User Defined Reports Select File Selection database to Pavement file to export Export path and filename Browse Status Action 0 100 fas 7747471 Begin expor
193. e Assignment Of PCI Deterioration And Families GIS view consists of five distinct layers PCI Deterioration Family Assignments Major M amp R Family Assignments Global M amp R Family Assignments Preventive M amp R Family Assignments StopGap M amp R Family Assignments As in the Inventory GIS view the top most checked layer has priority in the display Highlight a layer and use the arrows to move it to a different location in the list and thus change its priority or display rank K KKK Close rspark shp PCI Deterioration Family Assignments rspark shp Major Family Assignments rspark shp Global M amp R Family Assignments rspark shp Preventive Family Assignments rspark shp StopGap M amp R Family Assignments Assignment of PCI Deterioration and M amp R Families o Select Select Zoom Zoom In Zoom Out Center Print rspark shp PCI Deterioration Family Assignments DEFAULT Chapter 8 Reports 77 9 Condition Prediction Model Create And Maintain Prediction 79 Building Bg nl Adler Et 79 Usirig The Prediction ere tere acne OR 79 Collect Model E 80 Review Model Data E 80 Use Boundary O tlier intr trt 80 iSo Ae
194. e prompted to save the report If you choose to save the report a file dialog box window is presented so that you can name the report to be saved Note Each report type has its own unique file extension Condition analysis reports are rpc files and M amp R Work Planning reports have rpw extensions These extensions should be maintained when you name a report file Edit Image Paths The Edit Image Paths tool now available under Inventory in the Visual Menu gives users the ability to change the image path for images that are not stored in the database but are stored in a remote location The path to the image is stored in PAVER when images are not stored in the database This tool allows the user to edit what image path is stored in the database To begin launch the Edit Image Paths tool from the Visual Menu under Inventory The image path can be adjusted for images stored at the Network Branch Section and Inspection levels All images stored at a specific level will be displayed in the table To change the image path first select the portion of the image path to be replaced in the What to replace box The Shorten button shortens the path to be replaced one directory at a time Once you have selected what to replace select the new path in the Replace with box The Browse button can be used to navigate to the new image location Chapter 2 User Interface 25 3 System Tables Berne User Fiel S dup a AA duni pid 27 NS
195. e window the plan start date and plan length in years can be defined The report includes historical information and predicted conditions for selected sections for each annual interval over the defined plan length Viewing The Condition Analysis Report Once the report has been configured click Execute to start calculating the report After the report calculations are completed the EMSTM Report Viewer tool and Select GIS Views windows are presented EMS Report Viewer The View menu in the EMSTM Report Viewer can be used to add or remove tables and associated graphs from the report viewer screen It can also be used to switch between the summary and detail views of the report To turn off one of the summary tables and its associated graph select View gt gt Summary and then select the table that you want to turn off Tables and graphs that are active in the current report have a check mark to the left of the table or graph name As usual in order to zoom in on a table or graph right click on the desired object and select Zoom Other options can be selected with a right click such as Revise Layout Change Sort Order Export and Print Table Summary Views Summary version includes the following available views Annual Condition Arithmetic Average Shows the Annual Condition Arithmetic Average for each branch for each year in the reporting period The first row of the table summarizes all branches included in the
196. ecord the distress the severity and any sketch or comments The user can print these Inspection Forms and conduct surveys and inspections using forms When viewing these forms will show them as a continuous Chapter 15 Wizards 115 page but will print separate pages for each section Example Inspection Forms can be found in Appendix E Reinspection Report The Reinspection Report is designed to produce a listing of information about the last inspection for each section included in the report The Reinspection window offers several options for configuring the report Distress Details This section gives you the option to display recorded distress information from the last inspection in three levels of detail Remember Distresses are entered at the sample level and are associated with a specific inspection date None No distress details shown Summary Distress code and severity level of each distress in the sample unit are shown Detail Complete details for every distress listed in the current sample are shown Calculate Sample PCI This produces PCI for each sample listed Although works with section level PCI s throughout the program this shows the PCI of each inspected sample m Report Sample Ordering This gives you control over how the Reinspection Report sorts and orders the samples in each section numerical or alphanumerical Your choice is based on how you have cho
197. ected the image file to add click Open and the image will appear in the EMS mage Viewer window If you wish to change the storage option for an image at a later time select the image and change the selection in the box titled Existing Images Stored As E EMS Image Viewer Adjust imag eS Images KIKI Item or add special Properties effects Descnobon Store New Images Edit how EE Paths to Image Files 5 Pictures in Database images are stored Existing Images Stored As C Paths to Image Files Pictures in Database View An Image To view and select an image from the list of saved images use the scrolling tool at the top of the window If you add only one image for an inventory item it always appears in the in EMS Image Viewer window when you access the EMS Image Viewer for that inventory item However you may associate more than one image with an inventory item When multiple inventory images are associated with an inventory item you can scroll through the images by clicking the image scroll buttons located on the upper left corner of the EMS Image Viewer window Edit An Image There are two tabs in the EMS Image Viewer window Definition and Properties Clicking on the Definition tab allows the user to view the selected image and to determine how the image is stored Clicking on the Properties tab allows for various graphic adjustments to the image as well as the addition of a vari
198. een created the previously defined Distress Maintenance Policy Cost by Work Type Cost by Condition and Sort Order can be assigned to it To add sections to a M amp R family refer to M amp R Family Assignment Fal Localized Preventive M amp R Tables and Families 5 Preventive Cost by Condition 6 Preventive M amp R Families 3 Distress Maintenance Policies 4 Consequence of Maintenance Policy 1 Work Types 2 Cost by Work Type Tables No Localized M amp R All Localized Crack Sealing Work Types are nn H 4 Joint Seal Localized listed here Patching AC Deep Patching AC Leveling Patching AC Shallow Patching PCC Full Depth Patching PCC Partial Depth Shoulder leveling Global Preventative M amp R Tables And Families m Work Types This 15 a listing of all work types considered Global This includes M amp R work applied over a larger area of pavement Other data in this table includes the Application Interval that work would be reapplied and the Delta Age or change in age of the pavement This Delta is defined as the time in years it would take for the condition of the pavement to return to where it was prior to application of the global treatment Again the M amp R Plan uses these numbers when predicting condition m Consequent Surface This table provides data as to the consequent
199. eld Field Field Field Appendix D WORKHIST NETWORK BRANCH SECTION WORKTYPE COMPLETE MATERIAL THICK ACCOMP QTY COST COMMENT STADATE IDDATE PROPOSAL PHASE NDTI NETWORK BRANCH SECTION LOCATION STATION TESTDATE TEMP LOAD MAXDEF TRANSFER TESTTYPE NDT2 NETWORK BRANCH SECTION LOCATION STATION TESTDATE TEMP LOAD SENSOR DISTANCE DEFLECT Text Text Text Text Date Time Number Double Number Double Text Number Double Number Double Text Date Time Date Time Text Text Text Text Text Number Double Number Double Date Time Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Text Text Text Text Number Double Number Double Date Time Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double 10 10 N OO OO OO OO 10 10 10 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 1 10 10 10 OO OO OO OO 00 OO WORKHIST DBF Pavement Work History Details Large group of pavements Usually Airport City Sub Division Identifier Medium grouping of pavements Usually runway taxiway apron street name Area of same pavement type This is the unit of pavement used for inspection rating methods Work type code Date work completed Material type used for work type Thickness of material Manner Accomplished I Inhouse C Contractor Quantity of work type to be performed Cost based on work t
200. elected using the drop down list next to the field These includes the 15 mandatory fields that must be present in the attribute table in order for the PAVER database to be created Chapter 4 Database Tools 44 E Inventory Import ESRI GIS Network Fields 14 INETWORKID NSort1 Asterisk indicates a PAVER Manatory Field Branch Fields IBRANCHID BSort1 Section Fields Id SECTIONID From To Surface SURFACE Rank Construction CONST DATE Length LENGTH Width True Area ISTRUEAREA Slab Length SLAB_LENGT Slab Width Zone Category Shoulder Street Type Lanes Grade SSort1 SSort2 SSort3 PAVER Mandentory Field Previous Next The third display screen allows user to select any additional user defined fields that are not included on the second display screen of standard fields These fields must be created in the attribute table and then the user will have to select the level at which the field is assigned 1 Network Branch Section If the field type is a list the View Possible List button will become available to select Multiple user defined fields can be selected or removed before importing the shapefile to a database inventory Import ESRI GIS o SoNg User Defined Fields Level Fieia View P
201. ement network Glossary 176 PAVER Button Bar The array of eight buttons displayed across the top of the PAVERTM for Windows Desktop used to invoke the most used for Windows features Each button contains descriptive text and a graphic related to the function of the program the button launches Picklist A Microsoft Windows standard menu associated with a data entry form or grid The picklist menu contains a list of the available selections for a data entry field The picklist is not visible until the field associated with the picklist is selected by the user When the Field 15 selected the picklist is activated by clicking the small down arrow located in the far right portion of the field mask Alternately referred to as a drop menu or drop list Polygon Attribute Table PAT A Polygon Attribute Table PAT is a list used by a Geographical Information System GIS to relate database information such as PAVER PCI values to a GIS map location In PAVERGIS the PAT is used to describe the sections ina PAVER database Polygons are used in GIS to represent PAVER features roads parking lots runways aprons etc and then tabular data is attached to the features A coverage is defined by several files Some of the files contain graphical information while others contain table information Radio Button A Microsoft Windows standard user interface item for indicating a user selection Radio buttons
202. ent TOOL 109 What Is The GIS Assignment Tool eee esiste sete nten sete AEA 109 GIS Assignment Tool B tton FUNCTIONS rot 109 Accessing The GIS Reports 112 Shapefile Coordinate 113 15 Wizards Inspection Setup dt EP RE RED HET 115 eT 115 Inspection rol TERR 115 116 Wark pios ERE 116 Calculate Last Construction Date 118 Set Properties On Multiple Inventory lItems 1 1 1 1 122 119 Fieldinspector Imagelnspector Data Inspection Export 120 Fieldinspector Imagelnspector Data Import XML 122 16 Add in Condition Data Import 127 Condition Data Import Database 127 Handheld ee tasti premit mara iet o RH ta pHUH pU EHE 128 Pocket Inspector Software And Pocket PC Devices 128 Inspection Data Entry Using A Windows CE Handheld Device 129 Software 129 viii Import B ckup Data Into PAVER ient
203. er Drop Lane Shoulder Drop Linear Cracking Linear Cracking Large Patch Utility Cut Large Patch Utihty Cut Small Patch Linear Area Linear Area Linear Area Area Area Linear Linear Area Linear Linear Area Linear Area Area Linear Linear Area Any Area Linear Area Linear Linear Area Area Linear Linear Constant Constant Distress Quantity Distress Quantity Patch Area Patch Area Patch Area Distress Quantity Distress Quantity Slab Width Slab Width Slab Width Slab Width Slab Width Slab Width Constant Constant Constant Constant Constant Constant Slab Length Width Slab Area Slab Width Slab Area Slab Width Slab Width Slab Length Width Slab Width Slab Width Joint Calculation Joint Calculation SlabLength Slab Length Slab Length Width Slab Area Slab Width Slab Width Constant units are in metric Appendix H 170 Distress Work Unit Small Patch Area Constant Polished Aggregate Linear Slab Length Polished Aggregate Area Slab Area Popouts Linear Slab Length Popouts Area Slab Area Pumping Linear Slab Width Pumping Area Slab Width Punchout Area Slab Width Punchout Linear Slab Width Railroad Crossing Linear Slab Width Railroad Crossing Area Slab Width Scaling Crazing Area Slab Width Scaling Crazing Linear Slab Width Scaling Crazing Linear Slab Width Scaling Crazing Area Slab Width Scaling Crazing Linear Slab Length Width S
204. ery item in the current database Missing Values The Missing Values table displays all values were not included in the report for the listed description in the table Chapter 11 Condition Analysis 89 E Plan Parameters The Plan Parameters table lists all of the parameters that were defined for the current condition analysis report Il PAVER 6 0 RC 13 Tables Preferences Add Ins Window Help d wo PAPCI Pred Modeling Analysis Plan YRGIS Tree Sel EBList Sel Wizards MB Visual Menu 6 0 About EMS Report Viewer C EMS Program Files Paver rpcdefit rpc Branch Area Branch Area Units Network Name Branch Name 532 400 SqFt Auglaize County RUNWAY 8 26 532 400 SqFt Auglaize County RUNWAY 8 26 A Section Condition tiet 211 459 SqFt Auglaize County APRON V N 211 459 SqFt Auglaize County APRON Al Section Work History Inventory Link 211 459 SqFt Auglaize County APRON Section Condition Inventory Link 211 453 SqFt Auglaize County Overlay Family Curve 211 459 SqFt Auglaize County APRON Inventory Work History 211 459 SqFt Auglaize County APRON Missing Values 211 453 SqFt Auglaize County APRON 211 453 SqFt Auglaize County APRON 206 367 SaFt Auglaize County Taxiway 206 967 SqFt Auglaize County Taxiway 206 367 SaFt Auglaize County Taxiway 2
205. esAums TWY AT Inspection Date 10 17 2011 Inspection Condition 93 PID Inspection Date 10 17 2011 Inspection Condition 97 08 28 Inspection Date 10 17 2011 Condition 95 Select Import to add inspection data to PAVER database Chapter 15 Wizards 125 16 Add ins Condition Data 127 Condition Data Import Database Handheld Data UENIRE DM NEN A IUD ER UH DM IET Pocket Inspector Software And Pocket PC Devices Inspection Data Entry Using A Windows CE Handheld Device 129 Software Operation 129 Import Backup Data Into PAVER T 3 eter vetera Geb bd ve ree ie leben 132 PAVER Shapefile 132 converting From PAVER 4X mi 132 Shapefile Conversion Procedure u s ceo ettet eiei oeeie aadi ceesre iaia ee ede eue DER 132 Condition Data Import ASCII The Condition Data Import ASCII feature allows the user to import data into using ASCII file format Upon launching the feature a file wizard 15 opened to help guide towards the appropriate data files For examples of how to format files for ASCII Video Inspection Import see Appendix B 1 Condition Data Import ASCII x Input
206. et today as the Inspection Date leave the Inspection Type as PCI Inspection Select all three Inspection Setup Actions Inspection Wizard Se tod a y as the Inspection Date and Inspection Type s inspection date Inspection Date 4 25 2007 17 PCI Inspection Non PCI Inspection Select setup actions as Inspection Setup Action s sh own Create Inspection Records Create Inspection Forms Inspector Name Your Name Reinspection Report Distress Detail Level Print Comments for C None Sections Summary Inspections Detail Samples Distresses Calculate Sample PCI C Yes No Workshops 252 E Select Next and then query all of the runway sections at Neil Armstrong as shown below Stored Criteria Memorize Copy Delete C Select All Enable Field Name Cache Refresh Cache Select Rows OrderRows Field Comparison Compare To Query as shown Branch Use Runway E Extrapolated Distress L Latest Conditions z z Clear Clear Current Clear Current Tables Table Row Text D S Select Next and review the selections shown on the map Inspection Wizard PAVER 6 0 RC 23 Select Zoom Zoom Zoom Pan m Rem vor In Out d Print r Locate Mode mouse clicks synchronize the tree and the map but do not attect selection Finish Workshops
207. ety of special effects Click Edit for the desired feature and then OK once you have made your adjustments A preview of the image will be shown in the EMS Image Viewer window Save changes by clicking Save Edits or restore the original image if the change is undesirable by clicking Restore Image Chapter 5 Inventory 58 Other Image File Options Five other commands are available in the EMSTM mage Viewer window New A new image is attached to the network branch or section that was active when the Image command was invoked Delete The current image in the viewer 15 deleted m Rename Renames the image within the viewer but does not change the file name m Print Invokes the Windows Print window to print the selected image Close Closes the EMSTM Image Viewer window EMS Image Viewer m DER Images 4 Image 1 of 1 PIPL item NetworicNeil ms Definition Properties Description Store New Images Paths to Image Files Pictures in Database Existing Images Stored As Image Source Paths to Image Files C P C Documents and SetlingsND avid Sawahata My Pictures in Database Chapter 5 Inventory 59 Work Extensive connections exist in PAVERTM between construction date and predicted PCI The system must have an accurate account of the last construction date for each section in order to accurately predict future pavement performance maintenance requi
208. f Additional User defined dd a do d d e M Mn MA Md clu 242 elec c 242 242 Lco 242 Hints amp Solution Guide For Workshop 8 nt tete ERES 243 xi Workshop 9 a Creation Of A New Surface 245 Sen p 245 ce 245 e 245 Hints amp Solution Guide For Workshop 9 246 Workshop 9 b Creation Of A New Branch 248 OBJECTIVES 248 E eae 248 248 Hints amp Solution Guide For Workshop 9 b eee 249 Workshop TUI idi iouis nid itis 251 Se c1 251 s 251 M 251 Hints and Solution Guide For Workshop 10 252 Works
209. file and related shapefiles Distress Unique Identifier 5 3 6 data structure includes a distress unique identifier used to prevent the duplication of distress values when a database 15 split and recombined GIS Assignment Tool Easier to discern networks and branches with unassigned sections Wizards Inspection Work Last Construction Date Inventory Properties Work Plan M amp R Families Credit for Preventative Delay Costs Project Planning m Virtual Inventory E User defined Views Miscellaneous Surface Change After Repair Drop Down List Option in Additional User Fields Inspection Scheduling with Cost Chapter 1 Overview 6 GIS Identification Tool The GIS Identification Tool allows a user to view important information about a section by right clicking on any defined section within a GIS view A pop up window opens to display Pavement ID Rank True Area Assigned PCI family Last Construction Date Last Inspection Date PCI SCI ACN PCN and Percent Deduct Value due to Load Climate Other This feature gives users an effective way to quickly answer questions about a section and provides useful information for project development 5 02 Use ROADWAY Surface PCC Rank S True Area 38 640 SqFt PCI Family DEFAULT Last Construction Date 6 1 1977 Last Global Work Date lt None gt Last Inspection Date 7
210. gions Previously created tables can be seen by clicking on the drop down list box Tables can be created deleted or renamed by clicking on the associated buttons If a new table is created a window will first appear prompting the user to enter a name for the new table This window also provides the user the ability to copy the default table to use as a template The costs associated with the work types can be customized on any of the tables including the default table If a desired work type is not included on a table the work item must first be entered on the Work Types tab Once the new item has been entered on the Work Type tab the Add or Delete button can be used to modify any table There must be a cost entered for all work types listed E Distress Maintenance Policies You can define separate tables and group different localized work types for different maintenance scenarios Consequence of Maintenance Policy For every work type listed on the Work Types tab there is an associated table here Each table consists of list of all distresses related to a particular work type and the distress produced as a result of performing the specified work This assists the Work Plan in predicting future PCIs Stopgap Cost by Condition On this tab M amp R costs are related to condition of the pavement As seen in the default table costs to repair a pavement increase as the pavement condition PCT decreases Chapter 3 System Table
211. gram is installed onto your computer it will automatically update PAVER 5 0 5 2 versions to the PAVERTM 5 3 version 5 3 serves as a migration tool between 5 0 5 2 versions and PAVER 6 PAVER 5 3 supports import export of e50 files from PAVER 5 0 5 2 as well as e60 and e65 files from 6 and 6 5 PAVER 5 0 5 1 5 2 upgrades 5 0 5 1 or 5 2 When 5 3 6 0 opens a PAVER 5 0 5 1 5 2 database the schema is automatically 6 5 Licensing Activation Screen Enter the serial number on the activation page in order to activate buttons which will allow you to activate your copy of PAVER PAVER Activation Enter the serial number from your copy of PAYER here Cancel Before using you must follow the steps below Chapter 1 Overview 2 When the serial number is entered the screen will look as shown below Before using PAVER you must follow the steps below Enter the serial number from your copy of PAYER here A A JAJA A A Automated Web Activation Manual Web Activation EMail Activation Phone Activation Choose one of the following four options il Automated Web Activation Select to activate your copy of PAVERTM automatically online El Manual Web Activation Select to activate your copy of PAVER via website
212. gregation Rule Sets Virtual Section V5 Name RD New Delete Rename Calculate Conditions View Virtual Inventory Assign Sections Set Properties 1 Stored Criteria Record Count Available sections Ld ROADPARK A0103 ROADPARK A0106 Network Select Rows Order Rows ROADPARK A0403 Branch arison Compare To ROADPARK A0500 Section ust z RoADwav z Show All Show Subset Criteria for available sections zi 3r 21 21 available sections a 5 xu a Liear All Liear Lurrent Liear Lurrent View Text Workshops 269 Virtual Inventory Management Virtual Inventory Name Roads and Parking VI New Delete Rename Close Aggregation rule Defaut Edt Aggregation Rule Sets Virtual Section VS Name PL New Delete Rename Calculate Conditions View Virtual Inventory Assign Sections Set Properties Stored Criteria Record Count Available sections Memorie Copy Delete a gt ROADPARK D0203 0204 Select Rows Order Rows Tn ur ds sepes Field Comparison Compare To 00207 USE PARKING ROADPARK D0207 Latest Show Show Subset Latest gt z z Criteria for available sections Latest t All available sections Latest zu 2 B
213. h elements are associated with the different levels of the inventory structure Select Columns requires the user to specify the data items that are displayed in each column Select individual components and move them to the window on the right All elements in this window become the column headers for the report Only the elements the user selects from the center window and moves to the right are integrated into the report Select Rows invokes the EMS Query Tool and allows the user to build the selection The Order Rows tab allows for the sorting of the records in the table In between the two windows of the Selected Columns tab and the Order Rows tab there are two types of arrows Double arrows move all items in the window and single arrows only move the selected item If you choose to deselect an item move it back to the left box and it is removed from the list The Move Up and Move Down buttons allow the user to position the selected components in the desired order The Change Order button in the Order Rows tab changes between ascending and descending orders for the selected components The New Copy Save Edit and Delete buttons located in the top left of the window become available to perform the corresponding actions as the circumstances allow Previously saved formats are in the Memorized Reports drop down list box Chapter 8 Reports 73 Store criteria to be EMS User Defined Reports Definition used again as a
214. h the same attributes as the previous frame When adding a new section sample or distress the user must first click New and then click Save after editing the appropriate fields The user must remember to select Save after editing existing sections samples or distresses Data may be entered by using the keyboard the number keypad or handwriting recognition for all data entry text boxes Make sure that the cursor is located in the box that you wish to enter data into When using the number keypad highlighted text cannot be overwritten the user must click C to clear the text prior to entering the data Comments may be added to any distress sample section or inspection by clicking Comments and either writing or typing the comment in the box Chapter 16 Add ins 131 Import Backup Data Into After backup files have been created the user may then Import Backup Data into by using the third tab on the Handheld Inspector menu First select the backup file to import by hitting Select and choosing from the list automatically places and selects files from a default location EMS Program Files User of Database PI Backup After selecting the backup file select the inspection date to apply to the data If some sections were not inspected or a different inspection date is required for some sections check the box next to the sections that should be skipped Click
215. hapefile Conversion Procedure The PAVER Shapefile Converter module contains three sections The first section displays the Source Shapefile the second section displays the Destination Shapefile and the third section displays the results of the conversion process You must first locate the shapefile you wish to convert by clicking Select and browsing for the appropriate files Once the file is selected PAVER checks that Chapter 16 Add ins 132 the file contains UNIQUEID and PID automatically sets the destination of the converted file in the folder for the online database To complete the conversion process click Convert As the conversion takes place the results will be shown in the lower window Shapefile Coordinate Shift The Shapefile Coordinate Shift module functions like the Shapefile Converter discussed above but this module also allows you to shift the coordinates of the shapefile during conversion The Shapefile Coordinate Shift 15 divided into three sections The first section displays the Source Shapefile the second section displays the Destination Shapefile and the third section displays the results of the conversion process First locate the shapefile you wish to convert by clicking Select and browsing for the appropriate files Once the file is selected PAVERTM checks that the file contains a UNIQUEID and PID The coordinates of the selected shapefile are displayed Once the file is loa
216. hat are not currently supported by PAVERTM but are there as place holders for future versions of the program Other items included in the data dictionary are used for XML verification purposes Below describes the common items used to import inspection data Mandatory items for a proper XML import are denoted below The starting Reference node is An Attribute to this node is the data dictionary The data dictionary 1s used to verify an XMLs format before importing it into PAVERTM Any XML errors during the format check will found when the XML is being imported using the PAVERTM XML import tool A child node to is geospatiallInspectionData The geospatiallnspectionData contains properties which are used throughout the XML statement These attributes are Bi InspectionDate All inspection data collected within the XML file will be associated with this date It is in MM DD Y Y format Mandatory level This will be either SAMPLE FRAME or SECTION to indicate the mode of data collection This property is Optional and if left out or blank will default to FRAME E Units This will be either English or Metric to indicate the need for numeric conversion during import This property is Optional and if left out or blank will default to English 2 Children of geospatialInspectionData node include inspectedElement inspectedCond
217. he hour glass disappears it may take several minutes for report data to populate the report form Chapter 8 Reports 72 User defined Report The user defined reporting tool gives the user the ability to create their own report and display it in table form which can then be printed or exported to another application such as Microsoft Excel As with other tables in PAVER right clicking displays the print and export options menu The EMS User defined Reports Tool can be accessed under Visual Menu gt gt Reports gt gt User defined Reports and offers three options display a Memorized Report Create New Report and Edit Current Report Display A Memorized Report This is a report that the user has created and saved It is available from the picklist at the top of the window and regenerates each time the user selects it so all displayed information is current Create New Report Click Create New Report to display the EMS User defined Reports Definition window On the left of the definition window there is a tree that reflects the database structure On the right there is a window with three tabs Use the tree on the left of the window to select a component of the hierarchy that contains the data elements that you would like displayed in your report All associated elements are displayed in the left window of the Select Columns tab Scroll through the various levels of the tree on the left of the window to see whic
218. he program seeks out matches for the characters you type If the picklist does not contain the item you wish to enter you need to add the Item to the picklist To enter a new item to the Use picklist select Tables from the PAVERTM Menu located along the top of the screen then Inventory Picklist and then the Branch Use tab For further information see Chapter 3 System Tables gt gt Edit Inventory Picklists The Branch file card contains three area fields Calculated Area Sum of Sections Area Adjustment and True Area The Calculated Area field 15 the sum of the true section areas of the branch The Area Adjustment field 15 used to reflect special knowledge the user may have about branch area which 15 not incorporated in the Calculated Area Decreases in branch area should be entered as negative values The Section card also has an area adjustment field so the user does not need to reflect section level area adjustments in the branch Area Adjustment field True Area is Calculated Area plus Area Adjustment True Area 15 the value used in calculations and reports 89 Inventory IRP INEWM 01 Branch 5 2 Branch file card Branch ID Branch Name NEWMARK DRIVE The user can Branch Use Agapway v Number of Sections in Branch create branch uses Length Sum of Width Ava of Sections Sections Sum of Area Adjustment 9 99 True Area Sections
219. he selection criteria is shown When checked the Record Count box shows the number of sections included in the current plan Below the inventory selection is Select Plan Start Date and Plan Length Enter the desired Start Date and the number of Years to run the M amp R Plan The Start Date field must be entered in mm dd yy format The drop down arrow next to the Start Date activates a calendar window for ease of viewing The Plan Start Date cannot be set to an earlier date than the current date and the Plan Length must be between one and twenty years At the bottom of the Plan Setup tab there are three variations of the Work Plan The first Critical PCI Method optimizes M amp R activity against a specified budget or determines the budget needed to maintain a specified condition Level The second Consequence of Localized Distress Maintenance calculates the cost and resulting condition of immediate implementation of local M amp R for the year of the most recent inspection Choosing Consequence Model automatically changes the work plan duration in the Timing tab to one year The Third Major M amp R based on Minimum Condition lets the user set the lowest pavement condition PCI that is allowed per year To edit or add a new minimum condition table refer to Chapter 3 System Tables gt gt Tables and Families gt gt Major M amp R Tables and Families Chapter 13 M amp R Plan 95 Select an actual or virtual database Indicate if M
220. hen Execute a First choose the source data by clicking Select next to the Source box and then choose the location of the database s you want to use A list of available data is on the left Select the data you want by clicking the database and using Add to move it to the right Alternately you can simply double click the database and it will move to the right Click OK when you are finished and the source box will now show what source database s you selected Import PAVER data from an e40 or e50 or 0 or e65 file Export PAVER data to an 5 file Combine Subset databases C lic k Execu te Create PAVER Inventory from Shape Data for Combine Subset form Source s Selection Criteria Destination 5 PROGRAM FILES USER DATA c Hard Drive EMS PROGRAM FILES 9 User Data C Class Workshop 3 Class Workshop 4b Pavement files Pavement Databases Selected to choose from FORTCOLUNSTESTING pv PROGRAM FILES Wear Daie Nel Arnaronaper Mansfield 2007 pvr i i PROGRAM FILESXUser DateXMansfield pvr Neil Armstrong Workshop 11 Add gt gt Neil Armstrong Workshop 12 Files selected to Neil Amnstron 2007 pur lt Remove Ohio Workshop 6 b PVR lt lt Remove combine Workshops 232 E Choose the destination or the new database that you wi
221. hes B FARB Sections rspark shp Assignment Assigned Assigned and Selected B INTE amp Sections 01 x Unassigned 218 E ais Assignment Tool 5 seen p ph ga jo Center Print Select this polygon on wl Bs em Assigned GIS M and Selected This will assign zn IFARB Section T 01 to this B EXEC 101 polygon d M IRESE Ei Sections 5 02 Locate mouse clicks synchronize me ana the map put ao m Now we will go through another example assigning IINTE section 01 to its associated polygon Note The section that was just assigned PAVRBS pan Select Zoom Zoom Zoom remains g reen rr Nevo Select B Qut Center Print 8 on the tree B Branches selector and the idu cepe rspark shp Assignment GIS map 5 J peu d Sections Assigned and Selected Click on Section p mc 01 in the IINTE 1 INEWM Sections branch T 9 INEWT Ei Sections 1 IRESE Sections B d 5202 Locate mouse syncnronize me ana me map ao notanect calartinn Close Note The Branch root did not turn green when 01 was E ais Assignment Tool
222. hop 11 Virtual 265 iei 265 Database soo RATER RSEN 265 265 Hints and Solution Guide For Workshop 11 266 Workshop 12 Creation Of Condition Prediction Model 272 ela 272 et 272 Hints amp Solution Guide For Workshop 12 eese 273 Workshop 13 Condition Analysis 277 Bozen 277 277 Hints amp Solution Guide ForWorkshop 13 ee reta rette e tts reve 278 Workshop 14 Work Plan 281 iB 281 sss 281 Ice M 281 Hints amp Solution Guide For Workshop 14 eee eee 282 Workshop 15 Project 222 22 222 222 2422 042 2 2 00 01 21 1 289 Blast M 289
223. hops 199 Survey Information To be used on the Class Workshop 3 database Inspection Date Today s Date Screen shots will show 4 23 07 amp 4 25 07 Branch RW 6 24 Section 02B Total Number of Samples N 26 Sample 01 Sample Type Random Sample Size 5000 sf Distress Severi uanti 4 Alligator Cracking M 1000 sf 4 Alligator Cracking L 100 sf 48 L amp T Cracking L 180 ft Sample 02 Sample Type Random Sample Size 5000 sf Distress Severi uanti 4 Alligator Cracking M 1000 sf Inspection Date Today s Date Screen shots will show 4 23 07 amp 4 25 07 Branch Spring St Section 02 Total Number of Samples N 4 Sample 01 Sample Type Random Sample Size 20 slabs Distress Severi uanti 28 Linear M 2 30 Small Patch M 4 26 Joint Seal Damage M 20 Sample 02 Sample Type Random Sample 20 slabs Distress Severi uanti 25 Faulting M 4 23 Divided Slab L 2 26 Joint Seal Damage M 20 Workshops 200 Hints amp Solution Guides For Workshop 3 1 add PCI inspection data in PAVERTM Ej Open the Class Workshop 3 database by clicking File gt gt Open Database gt gt Class Workshop 3 pvr B Click PCI on the PAVER button bar and using the list selector choose the Network named Exercise Branch RW 6 24 Section 02B add a new inspection date within the PCI window click Edit Inspections then select New and type in the inspectio
224. ica PCI plan type Determine budget requirements to eliminate backlog in 5 years Do not use an inflation rate Workshops Insert the information as shown in the following images within each tab of the M amp R Plan Parameters window PAVER will only allow dates greater than or equal to the current date so adjust the dates as needed Plan Setup Budget M amp R Categories MAR Families 1 Project Planning Select Inventory for Planning Record Count 40 Actual Database Virtual Database Allltems Build Selection using Query Tool Select Plan Start Date and Plan Length StatDate 671 2010 Years Select M amp R Plan Type Critical PCI Consequence of Localized Distress Maintenance Major based on Minimum Condition View Existing Report Execute Close el M amp R Plan Parameters Plan Setup Budget M amp R Categories Families Project Planning Constrain Budget C Determine Budget Consequence Determine Budget Requirements Iteration Determine Annual Budget For Condition Stabilization Backlog Elimination in p 2 years Maximum Number of Iterations to Achieve Goal 10 View Existing Report Execute Close 290 Plan Parameters Plan Setup Categories Families Project Planning Use all of the Categories M amp R categor ies I Localized Stopgap Localized Preventive PCI C
225. icking the BBC right pointing Po STEMS Show Show Subset Criteria for available sections available sections Create two more virtual section names TW and AP for the Neil Armstrong VI virtual inventory Assign sections to TW and AP using the Show Subset tool After the sections have been assigned to the Neil Armstrong VI virtual inventory review them by selecting the View Virtual Inventory button on the right side of the Virtual Inventory form 5 Virtual Inventory Management th Virtual Inventory Name Neil Armstrong VI x New Delete Rename Close eview tne Aggregation rule Default X Edit Aggregation Rule Sets sections assigned to the Virtual Section V5 TW New Delete Rename virtual sections _ Vitual Inventory er virtual i Set Properties SetFamilies inventory Available sections Member sections Virtual section _ NeilArms TAXIW D j Neil rms TAXIw7B assigned Neilims TAXIW7A sections Show All Show Subset Criteria for available sections All available sections Workshops 268 9513 Virtual Inventory Nel Amstrong VI v New Delete Rename Aggregation set v EdtAogegaton Rue Sets Virtual Inventory Management
226. ify the parameters for an individual work item being added Parameters include work category work type work date material type and thickness Selecting Calculate Total Cost from Unit Cost and Section Area causes PAVER to automatically look up the Unit Cost according to the Unit Cost From Table relative to the Work Category that was chosen The user also Chapter 15 Wizards 116 has the option to select Calculate Section Cost from Total Cost and Section Area and then enter in the Total Cost Comments can be added which will be linked to the individual work item being entered After entering in all the parameters for the work item click OK if finished or click Apply to enter another work item Choosing Apply clears the window allowing the user to repeat the same steps of adding a work item Work Wizard Enter work to be applied to sections Work Description Edit Work Work ee Add work items fork Date 7 77 2006 Material Type 52 Delete Work Thickness 0 i et ers Calculate Total Cost from Unit Calculate Section Cost From Total Cost and Section Area Cost and Si in Area ection Unit Cost 000 Unit Cost From Table Major MER Cost z Settings to apply to all the individual work ite Project Work History Work Required J pply Cancel
227. in my system tables to Roadway As a seen C REPLACE the values in my system tables with those from the import file USE WITH CAUTION Tables to Import v Pavement data and associated condition families System tables M amp R Tables Include other non associated condition families i ki Inventory Picklists Import file Include images Condition Families options Include Virtual Inventory Condition Types and Categories User Defined Fields igi Include Required Projects User Defined Reports Working Status Accomplished percentage 0 100 Action File Table Import Close When you select the file and click OK a default name for the database will appear in the box on the Destination Path line Here you can change the name of the database You can also change the location of the imported database by clicking Browse next to the Import Path line Workshops 228 PAVER 60 Import File Selection Import filename CAEMS Program Files User Data Roadways E65 Browse em Destination path CAEMS PROGRAM FILES USER DATAA Roadways Browse How to Import System Tables 1000 the values from the import file to the values in my system tables C REPLACE the values in my system tables with those from the import file USE WITH CAUTION Tables to Import Pavement data and associated condition families
228. inches Code MOL 2 Cold Mill and Overlay 3 inches Code MOL 3 Cold Mill and Overlay 4 inches Code MOL 4 m Layer Construction Cold Mill 2 inches Code CM 21 Cold Mill 3 inches Code 31 Cold Mill 4 inches Code 4 Organization The main features of are accessible from eleven buttons arrayed across the top of the Desktop The button array referred to as the PAVERTM Button is arranged to reflect the logical sequence of pavement management and initiates the most frequently used features in By clicking one of the buttons you launch one of ten principal PAVERTM components Inventory Data Inventory Inventory data entry and summary charts Work Information Work Work required and work history PCI Inspections PCI Field inspection data entry Reports reports and summary charts Prediction Models Prediction Modeling Build and assign condition prediction models Condition Analysis Condition analysis report M amp R Plan Maintenance and repair planning report GIS Tree Selection Tool Pavement selector using GIS List Selection Pavement selector using pull down lists Wizards Step by step guide to aid in basic functions Inspection data entry Work entry Last construction date Inventory properties Visual Menu A detailed menu with all PAVER options Like other Windows pr
229. ine User Distress Indices You have the option to create a user defined index These indices are computed with the same engine that PAVER uses to calculate the PCI so the index is a customized PCI After naming the index select every distress and severity level that is to be included in the computation At this point PAVER then uses deduct values from only the specific distresses indicated ignoring other distresses After naming the index and selecting the applicable distresses this distress appears on the Numeric Condition Types tab of the Condition Type Selection table To delete the newly created index return to the User defined Distress Indices table Define Condition Index FOD Distress Category Asphalt Roadway Parking Lot C Airfield Calculate for all Sections Concrete Unsurfaced C Roadway Parking Lot Roadway Parking Lot Airfield Miscellaneous Other Tables There are four tables that allow you to enter specific information into PAVERTM Aircraft Type This table holds information on a variety of aircraft and will be used in later versions of PAVER to catalog airfield traffic and its effect on pavement condition Chapter 3 System Tables 37 Materials This table is a list of all material types including Item number and Description that are available for selection within PAVERTM These are used in the Work section of PAVERTM where you can list the s
230. inspector Imagelnspector Data Inspection Export 120 Fieldinspector Imagelnspector Data Import XML 122 Inspection Setup Wizard The Inspection Setup Wizard allows the generation of Inspection Records Inspection Forms and a Reinspection Report for the inspection process The user is able to create these records forms and report over multiple sections for the inspection Access the Inspection Setup Wizard from the PAVERTM Button Bar by choosing Wizards Start by entering in the Inspection Date and Inspection Type s Choose the desired action s of creating Inspection Records Inspection Forms and or a Reinspection Report and specify the parameters Then click Next to select the sections to be included with the EMS Query Tool Select includes all sections whereas choosing Select Subset allows the user to build a subset of sections Choosing Select None and clicking Next will allow the user to utilize the GIS Tree Selector to select the section s to be included Click Next and PAVER will review the sections for inspection setup in order to check for any sections with insufficient data Run the Inspection Setup Wizard by clicking Apply and will create the desired records forms and or report lll Inspection Wizard Sel ect Inspection Date and Inspection Type s Inspection Date Date 10 30 2006 V Inspection and type Non PC Inspection
231. ion and that green section will become current changing the color to red The corresponding section identification will be automatically highlighted in the tree menu to the left 2 To determine the location on GIS map of a section At any time whether the Select tool is active or not click on a section identification in the tree menu and the corresponding area s will be highlighted red on the GIS map This section and all these areas associated with this particular section identification will become active 3 To newly assign a section identification to a section on GIS map Verify that the Select tool is active If it is not click Select then click on the area on the map that you want to assign a PAVER section identification to This section will be red Next click on the section identification in the tree menu to be associated with the section You can also do the above task in reverse order that is to first select the section identification in the tree menu and then select the area on the map Either method will accomplish the same thing It is possible to include more than one area in one section identification Add an additional area to a section by highlighting the particular section identification in the tree menu and clicking on another area The additional area will be added to the section and any previous areas associated with the sectio
232. ions Conditons 65 To enter a comment use the mouse to click on the Comments field in the list of distresses entered and type in the comment When finished click on the next distress code and resume keyboard only entry When you are finished entering all distresses for a sample move to the next sample by typing N for Next or move to a previous sample by typing for Previous Batch Inspection Data Entry To expedite inspection data entry enter multiple inspection records at one time A specified format 15 required for video inspection data and two options exist for the importing of data The first option requires six ASCII text files the second option requires at least one of five tables in a Microsoft Access database For specific format requirements see Appendix B After data is in the correct format and all files or tables are complete begin the batch entry by selecting the option from the PAVERTM Add ins menu Calculating The PCI After Inspection An Assessment Results window allows the user to view the condition of an individual section immediately after distress data is entered To access this window click Calculate Conditions in the Inspection Data Entry window The section properties are displayed at the top of the window In the middle of the window Condition Index Inspection Date and Condition Value are displayed This window also gives you basic information about the section that you are viewing Cond
233. iously saved report by clicking View Existing Report to the left of Execute on the Condition Analysis Parameters window Another method of opening a report 15 by selecting Visual Menu gt gt Condition Analysis gt gt Open Saved Condition Analysis Employing either method brings up a dialog box asking from where to load the report Condition Analysis report files carry the extension Chapter 11 Condition Analysis 12 M amp H Family Assignment MH oid Qaid ndo do PI rp ba aiii 92 ASSIQI 92 Assign M amp H Families The M amp R Family Assignment Tool is used to designate sections to receive specific M amp R work including Localized Stopgap Localized Preventative E Global Preventative Major M amp R Assigning sections to receive specific M amp R work helps the user develop a work plan tailored to their specific site Once sections have been assigned to M amp R Families the M amp R Plan is executed see Chapter 13 M amp R Plan E Assign Major M amp R Families Major M amp R Family Selected M amp R Family Edit Major M amp R Family definition Assignment selected work ty pe Sections not assigned to this Major M amp R Family C Sections not assigned to any Major M amp R Family Sections assigned to this Major M amp R Family Network ID Branch ID n Network ID Branch ID n CHEYENN
234. iple sections from this list and use the arrow buttons to move them under Member Sections This collection of Member sections will be combined to define the selected virtual section Repeat these steps to produce additional virtual sections After creating virtual sections the user can review or edit the virtual section properties under the Set Properties tab will display the virtual section properties computed according to the selected Aggregation rule set and data attributes of each of the member sections from the original inventory that were combined to form the virtual section Under the Set Families tab the user can assign the selected virtual section a Family Type and a Virtual section family Chapter 5 Inventory 54 Virtual Inventory Management DER Virtual Inventory Name T axiway Sections New _ Delete _ Rename Coe Aggregation rule set Default Edit Aggregation Rule Sets Virtual Section VS Taxiway VS gt New Delete View Virtual Inventory Assign Sections Set Properties SetFamilies Available sections Member sections Section ID Secimib 01 IRPZIINTE 701 IRPZIINTE 702 IRPZIINTE 703 IRP INEWM 01 Show All Show Subset Criteria for available sections All available sections Copy And Move Data The Copy and Move Data tool is now available under Inventory in the Visual Menu First select the inventory item you wish to mo
235. isting family model To create a new model click New You are prompted to provide a name for the new family model being created entries may be up to 16 characters in length After naming the family model OK and the EMS Query Tool is presented so that you may select a subset if desired of the active database After selecting the filter criteria which can be none the age verses condition points for the pavement sections selected are placed in the grid on the Review Model Data card as well as displayed on the graph The Get Data button at the bottom of the Collect Model Data card is used to modify the data used an existing family model After clicking Get Data the user is prompted to overwrite the existing model data append to add to the existing data or abort the get data operation Copy creates a new model based on the family model that was active when the Copy button was clicked To change the name of the model click Rename and to delete the active model click Delete Review Model Data This card presents data used to create the family model Like other tables in PAVER M the extended features can be accessed by right clicking on the table The Status column contains no entry for records that are used to calculate the condition prediction curve Points that are removed from the prediction process by boundary conditions or outlier analysis are labeled as of Range or Outlier points You can add points
236. ition and inspectedComments These nodes contain the information pertaining to the inspection The inspectedElement node contains direct attributes and children nodes The children nodes 9 startLocation endLocation centerLocation and inspectionData The children contained in startLocation endLocation and centerLocation are latitude and longitude Each of these nodes contain these attributes degrees GPS string of degrees minutes GPS string of minutes seconds GPS string of seconds Bi northSouth latitude only Represented by or S eastWest longitude only Represented by or W The child contained in inspectionData is PCIDistresses The PCIDistresses nodes contain a child levelDistress which contains these attributes distressCode The code of the distress Bi quantity The measured size or number of the distress Bl severity Represented by or Direct attributes defined for the inspectionElement node inspectedElementID A unique identifier within a section and inspection date Mandatory Appendix B 138 size The size of the inspected element corresponding to the Units attribute described in geospatialInspectionData element above Mandatory PID This is
237. ition Indices Displays the Condition Value for all conditions associated with the current section Sample Distresses Displays a sections inspected sample units and their corresponding distress codes descriptions severity quantity density and deduct Sample Conditions The top displays a sections inspected sample units and the individual unit s sample type size and PCI The bottom displays the number of samples surveyed and compares the total number of samples to the recommended number for a project level inspection Section Extrapolated Distresses Shows each distress type from the Sample Distresses tab Distresses are aggregated based on type and severity level For random samples distress quantities are adjusted to reflect the extrapolated value based on the sections total area For any additional samples distress quantities are extrapolated based on the additional samples true area Extrapolated distress deducts are classified as resulting from load climate or other The Distress Classification portion of the tab shows the percent of extrapolated distress deduct belonging to load climate and other Again right clicking any table provides Print and Export options There is also a Print button at the bottom of the window Chapter 7 Inspections Conditons 66 Other Conditions User editable Condition Indices computes condition indices as well as the PCI value Condition indices are defined and c
238. ition Prediction Model Objective Create a Condition Prediction Model for AC Taxiways Database Open the Neil Armstrong Workshop 12 database by clicking File gt gt Open Database selecting Neil Armstrong Workshop 12 pvr and clicking Open Workshops 272 Hints amp Solution Guide For Workshop 12 B Click the Prediction Modeling button on the button bar File Tables Preferences Add Ins Window Help H inventory A wok Reports ls Pred Modeling fi Cond Analysis Q als Tree Sel EBList Sel bh Wizards TE Visual Menu Help 6 0 About E Click New to create a new model named Taxiway AC and click OK Prediction Modeling Create New Family Family Type PCI vs Age Please enter a name for the new family Name the new es model Boundaries Dutliers Active 4 Options 5 View Equation and Stats B Assign Family 1 Collect Model Data 2 Review Model Data 3 Use Boundary Outlier Select Inventory Items Allltems Build Selection Edit Selection Rename Get Data Delete Copy Create a new prediction model Workshops 273 B When the Query Tool launches select the drop down list box under Field and choose Branch Use For comparison choose Equals 7 Compare To Taxiway and select And Surface AC and then click OK 2 EMS Query Tool Section Select None Record Count Select Subset Memorize
239. ized Critical Localized gt Critical use a lifetime credit of 5 years for preventative work and Major M amp R Calculate a Major M amp R delay penalty cost of 4 years and do not place a checkmark next to Global Select M amp R Plan Setup Categories Project Planning categories to include in the analysis Localized Stopgap M amp R Localized Preventive M amp R y PCI Critical PCI gt Critical M amp R Categories Default lifetime credit years for preventive work b to be applied to models built without preventive Major Major M amp A Start Date 7 17 2010 Major Delay Penalty Calculate for 4 EE years Penalty will be calculated for first 1 year s of the plar View Existing Report Execute On M amp R Families tab there are tabs for each of the M amp R Categories allowing previously created M amp R Families to be assigned Workshops 283 Plan Parameters Plan Setup Budget Categories Families Project Planning Localized Stopgap Localized Preventive M amp A Preventive Major M amp R Use Assigned Families Default Stopgap Family Cost By PCI ve Default AC Stopgap Edit Stopgap Localized below critical PCI Cost Multiplier Cost by PCI Multiplier 1 Plan Setup MAR Categories
240. king Jet Blast Polished Aggregate 56 Swell 42 Bleeding Jt Reflection PCC Raveling 57 Weathering 43 Block Cracking Long amp Trans Cracking Rutting 44 Corrugation Oil Spillage Shoving From PCC 45 Depression Patching Slippage Cracking SAMPLE SAMPLE Sketch Comments NUMBER AREA DISTRESS L CODE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE NUMBER AREA NUMBER AREA DISTRESS Appendix E 158 Unsurfaced Roads UNSURFACED ROADS CONDITION SURVEY DATA SHEET INSPECTOR NAME BRANCH DATE USE INSPECTED To SECTION SECTION WIDTH LENGTH Unsurfaced Distress Codes Improper Cross Section Linear Ft Inadequate Roadside Drainage Sq Ft Corrugations Sq Ft Dust SAMPLE NUMBER SAMPLE AREA DISTRESS L CODE SAMPLE SAMPLE NUMBER AREA DISTRESS L CODE 85 Potholes Count 86 Ruts Sq Ft 87 Loose Aggregate Linear Ft Sketch Comments SAMPLE SAMPLE NUMBER AREA DISTRESS L CODE Appendix E 159 Deduct Values 2 a o lt o 2 lt E o 2 a a 160 Appendix E Appendix F Load amp Climate Distresses 162 Asphalt Surfaced Roads And Parking Lots rettet itat 162 Concrete Surfaced Roads And Parking Lots ee ee 163 Asphalt Surfaced c rh atr hee neta o eben
241. l Styer Bill Taylor and Bob Williams The US Navy Greg Cline Vince Donnally Mel Hironaka Floreto Lomibao Dave Pendleton Charlie Schiavino Dean Shabeldeen and Harry Singh The Federal Aviation Administration FAA Satish Agrawal David Brill Gordon Hayhoe Fred Horn Michel Hovan Rodney Joel Albert Larkin Xiaogong Lee Wayne Marsey Aston McLaughlin John Paul Schilling Jack Scott and Dick Worch m The Federal Highway Administration FHWA Frank Botelho Sonya Hill Bob Kelly Ray McCormick and Lewis Rodriguez The American Public Works Association APWA Jim Ewing Teresa Hon Christine Johnson John MacMullen Dennis Ross and Dick Sullivan The Ohio Department Of Transportation Office Of Aviation Andy Doll and Mark Justice Special thanks is due to the PAVERTM users who have participated for many years in the annual Sponsor User Group meeting and provided significant feedback for the continuous development of the system These members include Greg Belancio Mike Black Chuck Calloway Paul Clutts Andy Doll Judie Greeson Ken Holton Mark Justice Sabine Lundgren Steve McNeely Rod Oshiro Justin Rabidoux Johann Rollen Jeffrey Sabiel Yasmine Sateei Robert Vandertang Janpiet Verbeek and Helena Wolfe Thanks are due to the CERL research team and University of Illinois at Urbana Champaign Research Assistants who have helped with over the years Lisa Beckberger Maggie Broten Jeff B
242. l data from this inspection multi day inspections just pick a day Sample number which owns this distress if any Assigned by video vendorldentifier for this video frame must be unique within sec tion and inspection date The distress code as used in PAVER integer H M L if severity is used for the given distess code The quantity of the distress for distress numbers with quantity defined Unit of measure as defined in PAVER for the quantity Available for any comment observation by the data collector optional PCIVideoCondition txt FieldA FieldB FieldC FieldD FieldE FieldF FieldG FieldH RSPARK IFARB 01 46 5 20004 21 IRI Automated data collection Where Appendix B FieldA FieldB FieldC FieldD FieldE The identifier of the section which owns this inspection NETWORKID BRANCHID SECTIONID SPACER Identifies the date common to all data from this inspection multi day inspections just pick a day Sample number which owns this distress 1f any Assigned by video vendorldentifier for this video frame must be unique within sec tion and inspection date The Numeric Condition value to be recorded 143 Only populate FieldE or FieldF as determined by the data type for the Condition Method FieldF The Textural Condition value to be recorded FieldG The Condition Method IRI PCI PCIV etc FieldH Source of the condition value optional Units Of Measure
243. lc Area Sum of 317 599 Area Adjustment 5 pp Sections Comment User Defined Fields are editing Current Values C Historical Values Images 0 New Delete 250 Workshop 10 Wizards Objectives Learn to use each of the wizards Database Neil Armstrong and Interstate Research Parkway Tasks Workshops Inspection Setup Wizard Create Inspection Records Inspection Forms and Reinspection Reports for all runways using the Neil Armstrong database Work Entry Wizard Enter a slurry seal on 6 15 2006 on all AC Taxiways using the Neil Armstrong database Calculate Last Construction Date Wizard Calculate the last construction date for all Aprons using the Neil Armstrong database Set Properties On Multiple Inventory Items Wizard In Interstate Research Parkway database populate the number of lanes with 3 for all of Interstate drive and the remaining streets with 2 lanes 251 Hints and Solution Guide For Workshop 10 1 Inspection Setup Wizard Neil Armstrong database ES Using the Neil Armstrong database open the Inspection Setup wizard via the Wizard icon on the toolbar File Tables Preferences Add Ins Window Help H Inventory ad Reports ls Pred Modeling fi Cond Analysis mar Plan GiS Tree Sel EBList Sel Wizards TE Visual Menu Help 6 0 About Select the Inspection Setup wizard and then s
244. lculated date is less than the existing construction date the calculated date is automatically thrown out and will not be used After selecting calculation parameters click Next and Select the sections to be included with the EMSTM Query Tool Select includes all sections whereas choosing Select Subset allows the user to build a subset of sections Choosing Select None and clicking Next will allow the user to utilize the GIS Tree Selector to select the section s to be included Select Calculate to run the Calculate Last Construction Date Wizard PAVER will display Results listing the sections and relevant information such as the calculated construction dates Select Show rejected dates and will display any sections that were discarded any sections with calculated dates before existing dates or sections not meeting the specified tolerance Review the results and deselect any sections you do not want the new calculated construction date applied to The user can click Select or Clear which will select clear all the sections in the Results table or the user can select clear a section one at a time in the table Select A Subset allows the user to create a subset of sections to select The Generate Work Report checkbox allows the creation of a work Chapter 15 Wizards 118 report for the sections Once the results are reviewed click Apply and will assign the new calculated construction date
245. licked The prediction model plot operates like other PAVER graphs where right clicking on the graph displays the extended graphing features menu Located just below the Close button are the Boundaries and Outliers status indicators Once a model is selected or created the Boundaries and Outliers status indicators are activated These indicators report the status of the boundary data filter located on card 3 Use Boundary Outlier and the statistical outlier analysis feature that is configured on card 4 Options These options and all other family model building variables are configured on the index card style data entry forms located on the lower half of the Prediction Modeling form Chapter 9 Condition Prediction Model 79 8 Prediction Modeling Family Type PCI vs Model Test Mansfield 100 rsl 50 PCI 40 45 50 55 Boundaries Active Outliers Active 4 Options 1 Collect Model Data 5 View Equation and Stats 2 Review Model Data B Assign Family 3 Use Boundary Outlier Family Model name Choose Family Type Status of boundaries and outliers Select Inventory Items Create new Allltems model Build Selection EqitSelection New Rename Delete Copy eXi j S li ng model Collect Model Data This form is used to collect data from the active database to build a new family model or adjust an ex
246. ll create from the source data by clicking Select next to the Destination box A dialog box will appear that allows you to type in a name for the new database and choose its new location Make sure that the newly created database is located in the directory C EMS Program Files User Data Select Open and then Yes to create the newly named file Selected files to Destination of Processing Status Se lect Destination Pavemei nt Database Combine Subset PAVEMENT Database gt 5 c ems program data neil armstrong combine c ems program files user data mansfield combined Pomm _ 5 Select Ste Nod My Recent Documents Desktop KA My Documents 57 Select a My Computer destination for combined files a or enter a new file name Loki 9 ELE 33 14 07 Ft Riley 34 06 07 Ft Riley class C CMAFS FINAL C CMAFS FINALTST Ft Riley Riley ProjForm 2 14 07 rt Riley ProjForm 2 26 2007 Sftriley interstate Research Park Mansfield Mansfield _2007 3 26 07 ce 3 30 07 3 23 07 lt 3 25 07 Armstrong Armstrong 2007 pce test Roads and Parking Roadway Test CyTest2 3 3 14 07 Ft Riley pvr 84 06 07 Ft Riley pvr Class pvr CMAFS FINAL
247. ls for details on linking Viewing a GIS Report effectively creates a shapefile with the PAVER data pertaining to the GIS Report view populating the shapefile s attribute table For more information on accessing these individual report shapefiles see Chapter 14 GIS Tools The views are grouped into 3 sections Inventory Last PCI and Assignment Of PCI Deterioration And M amp R Families To navigate these views use the GIS Viewer Buttons which function in the following manner Center Centers current view at full extent Pan Allows the user to move around the view at the current zoom level Select Activates the selector tool so the user can utilize the GIS view as an inventory selector Zoom Area Allows the selection of a portion of the view to zoom in on El Zoom In Zooms in one level on the current view Chapter 8 Reports 74 Zoom Out Zooms out one level on the current view Print Prints a copy of the view and the legend Inventory n Select GIS Views Inventory Surface Rank Category Last PCI Assignment of PCI Deterioration and M amp R Families The Inventory GIS view consists of four distinct layers The categories and associated color schemes in these views are preset and cannot be changed Since the Inventory view has four layers only the top most checked layer will be displayed Each layer name has a checkbox next to it If only one box 15 checked then only
248. lt with the query tool click the View Text button at the bottom of the screen The Clear All button removes all selection criteria on the screen Click the Save button on the EMS Query Tool to save a set of report criteria The And Or operators require additional clarification For example if the user wants to include pavement sections constructed with asphalt and concrete then the correct operator is Or and the query will return any sections that fit either of the conditions The And operator returns only sections that fit all of the listed conditions For example selecting asphalt surfaces and branch use equal to parking lots with the And operator returns only asphalt Chapter 2 User Interface 21 parking lots Using And with the first example will return nothing since it is impossible for a section to be both asphalt and concrete surfaced Select Sections Stored Criteria Indicates number Record Coun of included m VUES Em m sections v Enable Field Name Cache Reffesh Cache Store query Select Rows criteria Field Comparison Compare To Section Latest Work Latest Traffic Latest NDT a AT a hd Deflection Latest Inspections Sample E E 21 21 Select query Sample Condi criteria Distress x Extrapolated Distress Latest Conditions Clear All Clear Current Clear Current Tables Table Row View Text GIS Selector Because GIS has
249. me Browse Working Status No pavement data is selected for export In the File Selection box click Browse next to Pavement File to Export and double click on the directory with the name of the desired database to export navigate to C EMS Program Files User Data and select Interstate Research Park pvr Note If you are exporting only system tables the option to select the file to export is unavailable since the program already knows where the system tables are 225 Selected file to export Destination of export file E PAVER 65 Database Import PAVER dota from an Export PAVER data to an e55 Combine Subset PAVER dat C Create PAVER Inventory from S Export an 065 readable by Expor to an e55 readable by Options Export pavement data and assed Include other non associated Include Images Include Virtual Inventory Include Required Projects File Selection Open Documents Recently Changed More Folders J User Data de Class Workshop 3 J Class Workshop 4b de Class Workshop 8 J FORTCOLLINSTESTING J Interstate Research Park J Mansfield 0 EMS Program Files User Data a HE E Name Date taken 4 Class Workshop 3 J Class Workshop 4b J Class Workshop 8 J FORTCOLLINSTESTING Interstate Research Park
250. mp amp SECTION ID and click OK The following diagram shows the overall workflow for modifying your shapefile and allowing that to reflect in your database Chapter 14 GIS Tools 107 Shapefile Deletion Consider the following scenario You work for a local municipality and are getting ready to preform an updated roads implementation You review your current shapefile that 15 linked in PAVER and conclude with your GIS personnel that is doesn t accurately reflect the current state of your city You decide to obtain an updated current and accurate shapefile from your GIS department and section it according to your needs After the sectioning you create your network branch and section ID fields along with the PID field and populate all four Before you can import your new shapefile you must remove the old shapefile that is within your project folder which is found in C EMS Program Files User Data Project Folder To do this you can literally just go into your project folder and delete the files associated with your shapefile This task is much easier to do in a program such as ArcCatalog which views shapefiles as a single file though in reality they consist of several file types After you delete your old shapefile run the PAVER Shapefile Converter to import your new shapefile to your PAVER database To avoid having to resection your entire pavement network you alternatively co
251. n And M amp R 77 Summary Charts Summary Charts are a feature designed to allow you to graph and compare any two attributes of a database For example you can view the average condition of your network based on surface type To access the Inventory Summary Charts select Visual Menu gt gt Reports gt gt Summary Charts The Summary Charts window appears and awaits the users selection of a category to represent the X and Y axis Using the drop down list boxes labeled X Axis and Y Axis select an X Axis for the graph you wish to produce The drop down list box for the Y Axis selections is hidden until the user makes a selection for the X axis The third drop down list box requests that the user makes a selection of which condition index they wish to use For the charts to work properly the user must have condition data available for the index they have selected PAVERTM automatically associates a PCI with every section in the users database Every other index requires that the user either input the value manually or establish a definition for the index see Chapter 7 Inspection Conditions gt gt Other Conditions gt gt User Editable Condition Indices After the user has made valid selections the graph and data table will populate Some combinations may produce a null set of sections and hence no graph Dragging the border of the table at the bottom of the page can modify the field widths Right clicking on the table presents
252. n be added to the existing attributes for networks branches and sections A total of nine user defined fields are available three for each inventory item View Menu An item on the PAVERTM Menu that is active only when the Report Viewer is the active window The View Menu lists the available tables Open tables have a check mark to the left of the menu item Virtual Inventory The virtual inventory option allows the user to make copies of existing inventories and to combine sections according to some criteria to create a virtual section For example a virtual inventory can be created in which all taxiway sections of the original inventory are combined creating a virtual taxiway section Conditions can then be calculated as well as reports formulated for the virtual section Glossary 178 Workshops Workshop 1 Network 182 Objective 182 182 182 Hints amp Solution Guide For Workshop 1 183 Workshop 2 188 5 188 188 E e 188 Hints amp Solution Guide For Workshop 2 190 Workshop 3 Field Inspection Data Entry 199 Objectives EE
253. n date today s date shows as the default Enter the total number of sample units possible in the section 26 total area 130000 SF gt gt divided by normal sample size 5000 gt gt equals 26 sample units possible not the number you actually inspected and click Close E List Selector e Network Exercise Exercise Branch RW 6 24 Runway 6 24 Section 02B 5 00 c e 18 00 Y PCEExercise RW 6 24 028 Summary data at time of inspection Branch Use RUNWAY Section Surface AC Section True Area 130 000 SgFt Section Length 1300 Ft Section Width h Edit Inspections Detailed Inspection Comments Calculate Conditions Sample Unit e Construction records have no samples distresses am Inspections Edit Inspections button Inspection Date 6 23 1985 Total Surf Samples Enter inspection Date comments dat 241 4 23 2007 28 AC 0 6 23 1985 0 0 Construction 0 100 0 Click New to inspection data New creates both PCI and inspections Select Edit Sample Units then Add New and enter 01 for the sample unit number Under Sample Type select Random from the drop down list Enter 5 000 for the sample unit size Repeat this procedure for sample unit 02 and then click Clos
254. n identification will remain associated 4 To change the current section identification assignment of a section on the GIS map Click on an area that was green and 15 now red and that area will turn yellow no longer being associated with any pavement sections Click on a yellow area and that area will become red indicating that it is now an area associated with the current section The current section s or any section represented in red will always be assigned to a section therefore when another section becomes current the original red section will change to green and will be associated with the section that was highlighted last in the PAVER tree menu Click on a new section in the PAVER tree menu to change the section identification assignment of the current or red section Chapter 14 GIS Tools 110 The Select tool is used to assign or unassign sections The tree is used with the Select tool to assign sections Green sections are assigned Red sections are active Yellow sections are unassigned lii GIS Assignment Tool PAVER 6 0 RC 15 Select Select Zoom Networks Area Area IRP Branches Ef IFARB rspark shp Assigned INEWT Assigned and Selected IRESE X Unassigned iz Locate Mode mouse clicks synchronize the tree and the map but do not affect selection To customi
255. natives for roads and streets parking lots and airfields PAVER provides you with many important capabilities including Pavement network inventory 53 Pavement condition rating Development of pavement condition deterioration models Family Curves Determination of present and future pavement condition Condition Analysis Determination of maintenance and repair needs and analyzing consequence of different budget scenarios Work Planning Project Formulation Chapter 1 Overview 8 PAVER 6 Improvements New Features Import Export PAVER 5 3 6 0 Import Export Import PAVER 5 0 5 1 5 2 e50 file Export stripping off new fields Import adding new fields Import All new fields are automatically calculated on import PAVER 6 supports the import export of e50 files from PAVER 5 0 5 2 as well as e60 files from PAVER 6 and e65 files from PAVER 6 5 Import Export in PAVER 5 0 5 2 System Tables e50 an Access DB Pavement Data Shapefile The e50 files of earlier versions consisted solely of Access database files Chapter 1 Overview Import Export in PAVER 5 3 6 0 e60 a zip file System Tables Pavement Data Shapefile Shapefile The e60 amp e65 files exported from PAVER 6 and 5 3 are zip files that include an Access database
256. nch Number Section Number Add Change Delete Riding Safety Drainage Shoulder Overall FOD Total No of Samples in Section Select from Plan Parameters Format Numeric MMDDYY Alpha Numeric Alpha Numeric Alpha Numeric Alpha Numeric Alpha Numeric Alpha Numeric Alpha Numeric Alpha Numeric Alpha Numeric Numeric 08 AC Or GR And 11 PCC Card Format These cards contain sample unit and distress information One or more cards are required per sample unit inspected and can contain up to four distresses card A separate card may be used for each distress nnnnn nn is a decimal number Field Name Form ID Inspection Date Branch Number Section Number Add Change Delete Sample Unit ID Sample Type Area No of Slabs in Sample Distress Code Severity Quantity Distress Code Severity Quantity Distress Code Severity Quantity Distress Code Severity Quantity Appendix A Format Numeric MMDDYY Alpha Numeric Alpha Numeric Alpha Numeric Alpha Numeric Alpha Numeric nnnnn nn Numeric Alpha Numeric nnnnn nn Numeric Alpha Numeric nnnnn nn Numeric Alpha Numeric nnnnn nn Numeric Alpha Numeric nnnnn nn Columns Standard 1 2 3 8 9 13 14 16 17 18 20 21 23 24 26 27 29 30 32 33 35 36 38 Columns Standard 1 2 3 8 9 13 14 16 17 18 20 21 22 29 30 31 32 33 40 41 42 43 44 51 52 53 54 55 62 63 64 65 66 73 Columns Extended 1 2 3 8 9
257. ndition Model Family Assignment Assign PCI Deterioration Families Deterioration Families A Deterioration Family is a group of pavement sections that are subjected to similar traffic patterns weather and other factors that affect pavement life In the previous chapter we built Prediction Models to predict the future performance of a group of pavements that possess similar attributes Now that we have developed the deterioration curves we need to assign individual pavement sections to their corresponding curves As was mentioned in the previous chapter any sections that are not assigned to a deterioration family will automatically be assigned to a default deterioration family Assign PCI Deterioration Families DER Family Model Selected DEFAULT Critical condition for this Family Model 60 Edit Family Model definition Sections not assigned to this Family Model Sections assigned to default or no Family Model Sections assigned to this Family Model Network ID Section ID Show Show Show subset Show subset Assign Family To assign sections to a previously created family model open the Assign PCI Deterioration Families window There are two ways to reach the Assign PCI Deterioration Families window The first method is accomplished by selecting Visual Menu gt gt Condition Model Family Assignment gt gt Assign PCI Deterioration Families The secon
258. nge from one section to the entire database which 15 the default if Selection Criteria 1s not established Clicking on Selection Criteria opens the EMSTM Query Tool Before the Branch and Section Condition Reports can be executed the user must select which condition index to use This is done by double clicking on the desired condition in the Condition Selection box under Methods This places that condition type in the Selected window at which point execution of the report can continue To deselect an item in the Selected box double click on it to send it back to the Methods box Only one condition index can be used per report On the top of each of the reports is a tool bar which is used to manipulate the report Left and right arrow buttons are used to go forward and backward through the report In between the arrows is a display of the current page and the total number of pages in the report There 15 a print button and an export button to send the report to a printer or to a file and a view size drop down list box allows the user to size the report for easier viewing PAVER Standard Reports Condition Selection Methods Selected Select the Work History Report desired report Branch Condition Report C Section Condition Report Double click the desired Condition Index C Branch Listing Report Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Execute Close Please Note For Large Reports After pressing Execute once t
259. nt accent acne ht teeth ra 158 Unsurtaced af r To eene 159 poaae H 160 Example Pavement Survey Forms Included on the following pages are some example forms for surveying asphalt and concrete pavements The six example forms are Concrete Surfaced Roads and Parking Lots Asphalt Surfaced Roads and Parking Lots Airfield Concrete Pavement Airfield Asphalt Pavement Unsurfaced Roads Deduct Values Appendix E 154 Concrete Surfaced Roads And Parking Lots PCC ROADWAY PAVEMENT CONDITION SURVEY DATA SHEET INSPECTOR NAME SECTION BRANCH DATE USE INSPECTED TO SECTION WIDTH LENGTH Blowup Buckling Corner Break Divided Slab Durability Crack Faulting SAMPLE NUMBER SLAB LENGTH Joint Seal Damage Lane Shoulder Drop Linear Cracking Patching Large Patching Small SLABS IN SAMPLE DISTRESS CODE SAMPLE NUMBER M SLABS IN SAMPLE NUMBER OF SLABS Distress Codes Polished Aggregate Popouts Pumping Punchout Railroad Crossing SAMPLE NUMBER 36 Scaling Cracking Crazing 37 Shrinkage 38 Spalling Corner 39 Spalling Joint Sketch Comments SLABS IN SAMPLE DISTRESS CODE Appendix E M DISTRESS CODE 155 Asphalt Surfaced Roads And Parking Lots ROADWAY PAVEMENT CONDITION SURVEY DATA SHEET NAME WIDTH LE
260. ntered that differs from the current model the Calculate button will be activated After the model is recalculated the boundary table entries will be in the proper sort order The outlier boundaries are used to limit the number of data points used in the computation of the curve Options for outlier constraints range from 50 to 100 percent Changing these various options and recalculating produces different curve results Use tab 5 View Equation and Stats to determine the statistical soundness of your curve Prediction Modeling Test Mansfield Mansfield Calculate Close Boundaries Active Outliers Active Adj ust Model 4 Options 5 View Equation and Stats B Assign Family boundaries Collect Model Data 2 Review Model Data 3 Use Boundary Outlier Set X Range Filters Use X Range Filter S et Ou t l i er Use Outlier Boundaries 1 960 95 Boundaries Options The Options card is the heart of the statistical analysis performed in the prediction modeling tool In the Slope section the user can choose to constrain the curve upward or downward or to leave it unconstrained Set the critical PCI for all sections assigned to this model by entering the value in the Critical Condition window To prevent changes to the model select the checkbox associated with the label Prevent Changes to the Model Chapter 9 Condition Prediction Model 81 View Equation And Stats
261. ntory Visual Menu Define Inventory Inventory Define Virtual Inventory Work Copy and Move Data Inspection Conditions Database Verification Tools Reports Condition Prediction Model Condition Model Family Assignment Condition Analysis Family Definition Family Assignment Plan GIS Tools Selectors Wizards Continue E Select New to create a new Virtual Inventory Name and call the new virtual inventory Neil Armstrong VI Virtual Inventory Management Create a new virtual inventory Aggregation rule set Creating a New Virtual Inventory Enter a name for the new virtual inventory New virtual Armstrong inventory Please create a virtual inventory before proceeding Workshops 266 Create a new virtual section New virtual section name Open the query tool Define the subset Workshops Create a new Virtual Section VS Name by clicking New and call it RW Click OK Virtual Inventory Management el JoE3 Virtual Inventory Name Neil Armstrong VI New Delete Rename Close Aggregation rule set Default Edit Aggregation Rule Sets A Delete Rename Calculate Conditions View Virtual Inventory Creating a new virtual section Enter a name for the new vir Please cre tual section Select Show Subset and query all of the runwa
262. nventory module Workshops 243 1 Network Network ID Exercise Network Name Exercise Comment O New field User Defined Network Elevation o O are editing Current Values Historical Values Images 0 New Workshops 244 Workshop 9 a Creation Of A New Surface Type Objectives Create a new surface type for PCC over PCC surfaces and call it PPC Database For this workshop you may choose to use your choice of a database Note The creation of a new surface type is done at the section level therefore it does not matter which database you use Tasks 1 Create new surface type Workshops 245 Hints amp Solution Guide For Workshop 9 a 1 Create new surface type Select Surface Type table by clicking on Tables gt gt Edit Inventory Pick Lists Edit Inventory Pick Lists File Tables Preferences Add Ins Window Help Define User Fields Edit Ins entory Pick Lists gt Edit Inventory Pick Lists M amp R Plan Tables and Families gt Condition Tools Misc Other Tables E Click on tab 76 Surface Type and select Add This will allow you to add a new surface type in the last row of the table as seen below Name PPC Description over Surface Category Concrete Sort Order 1 Edit Inventory Pick Lists 3 Section Ranks 7 Branch Use E 6 Surface Type escription
263. ocate Mode mouse clicks synchronize the tree and the map but do not affect selection List Selector This is the same selection tool used in Inventory management lil List Selector Network IRP INTERSTATE RESEARCH PARK hd Branch IFARB FARBER DRIVE Section 01 NEWTON DRIVE INTERSTATE DRIVE X Search Selector The last choice from the Selectors menu is the search selector This tool can be used to search based on seven different categories Pavement Search Utility Network 19 Network Name 1 Branch 19 1 Section Id 1 Section From 1 Section 1 Chapter 2 User Interface 23 EMS Report Viewer The PAVER analysis reports Condition Analysis Report and the M amp R Report are presented in the EMSTM Report Viewer a tool that provides a framework for displaying multiple spreadsheet like tables that contain report information The spreadsheets in the Report Viewer can be associated with graphs that operate in conjunction with the spreadsheet tables The Report Viewer organizes the presentation of report results in two basic views the summary view and the detail view The summary view includes high level views of summarized report data The detail version of the report includes section by section details that are covered in the summary version of the reports To switch from between the summary and detail views click on the Go to Detail Summary button View Menu
264. ocket Inspector 1 0 and Pocket Inspector 1 1 The table below shows the relationship between the device versions pocket inspector versions and PAVERTM versions Pocket Inspector 1 0 Pocket Dor 1 1 Pocket PC 2000 IDoesntrn not run Pocket PC 2002 Runs with PAVER 5 0 thru 5 2 3 Windows Mobile 2003 Does not run Runs with 5 2 4 through 5 3 on some devices see below Windows Mobile The Windows Mobile 2003 Pocket Inspector 1 1 combination has only been tested on two devices m On the HP iPAQ h6315 the software works correctly EJ On the HP iPAQ hx4700 the drop lists in the software do not work correctly after a list is dropped once subsequent drops only show a single item and it is difficult to select Other operations appear acceptable Chapter 16 Add ins 128 Inspection Data Entry Using A Windows CE Handheld Device Hardware Software Requirements For the installation of the Handheld PCI Inspector program a handheld device with the Windows CE operating system and Microsoft Pocket Access is required In addition Microsoft Active Sync must be installed on the computer herein referred to as main computer that inspection information will be downloaded from and uploaded to Additionally PAVER must be installed on the main computer Software Installation First install Microsoft Active Sync on the main computer Microsoft Active Sync is a free program that can be downloaded f
265. ogram each have a button located along the bottom of the form labeled Images In order to edit pictures for a specific network branch or section the item must be actively displayed in the inventory data window at this time To open the EMS mage Viewer click the Images button Store An Image In the EMS Image Viewer window there is a box titled Store New Images As The options offered for storage are Paths to Image Files or Pictures in Database Since image files are typically large including them in the database substantially increases the size of a database An alternative is to attach the picture to the database through a path to the image The image would be stored in a fixed location and PAVER would simply set up a link to the image However an image stored as a path will not be included in the e65 file when the e65 is created for storage or transfer In order for the images to follow the database you will need to copy and send the images separately making sure to place them in the same path on the new machine as they were in on the original Select the appropriate storage option and click on the New button You are prompted to select the file containing the picture Chapter 5 Inventory 57 you wish to load The drop down list box at the bottom of the window is used to specify the format for the picture supports images stored in JPG TIF GIF BMP TGA PCX and PCT formats Once you have sel
266. ogram Files User Data Interstate Research Park CNVSHAPE shp sh a pe file Object variable or With block EUCH Destination Shape file currently selectec Results of the shapefile conversion Chapter 14 GIS Tools 108 GIS Assignment Tool What Is The GIS Assignment Tool The GIS Assignment tool links the data for individual pavement sections to GIS data providing a point and click interface to create remove or change the link between pavement sections and map features Using the same visual layout as the Selectors the tool reduces the time required to create or change the link between GIS and pavement data Using The GIS Assignment Selection Tool To practice using the GIS Assignment Tool open the Interstate Research Park pvr sample database that should have been installed in the User Data folder with your installation of PAVER 6 located in C EMS Program Files User Data If a new database is not opened PAVER will access the database used most recently by the machine Open Visual Menu gt gt GIS Tools gt gt GIS Assignment Tool If the GIS data is correctly associated with the PAVER database the GIS Assignment Tool dialog box that opens will contain the PAVER tree menu as well as a graphical representation of the base the GIS map for instructions on how to associate or import a shapefile to a particular PAVER database see Chapter 14 GIS Tools gt gt PAVER Sh
267. ograms additional program features are accessed from the drop down menus located above the PAVER Button Bar The PAVER Menu provides standard Windows features such as file and print services File New File Open File Combine Split Print Printer Setup and Exit editing Cut Copy and Paste and Windows management and help Chapter 1 Overview 13 The PAVERTM Menu also provides specialized PAVERTM options for accessing and editing system tables Tables as well as changing the units of measure from English to metric Preferences PAVER Button Bar PAVER 6 0 RC 13 File Tables Preferences Add Ins Window Help 1 ap Reports hy Pred Modeling Cond Analysis BBMAR YRGIS Tree Sel EBList Sel Wizards Menu 6 0 About Chapter 1 Overview 14 2 User Interface Basie 16 Spreadsheet FOIS 16 Inre daro eem 16 Se 17 Printing Screen Images tote tete epe te 17 Units Of Measurement Adjusting Table Graph 51266 2 teris oret tpe bte thee eae tek neo eek 18 Righit b tton CLICK in i t ERR D I a ER 18 a a i eens 20 SOLE CHO E T E RR 20 EMS M L 24 Edit mage
268. oject Completed Move to Work Hist New Delete Copy Rename Latest Work 87172010 Total Project Cost 555 10 05 Machu Project Sections Project Work Section Level Work Work Item Views Sections in Current Project Work Items for MANSFIELD 14 32 SectionID OL_4 4 overlay A 2 Cold Mill 2 in MANSFIELD MANSFIELD Section Level Work Item Replan Affected Sections Recalculate All Close These work items have only been assigned to this section Add the exact same work items to sections 14 32 B amp 14 32 C For section 14 32 D add a 2 Overlay Major work item only using a Unit Cost of 1 20 SqFt Enter a date of 8 01 2010 for each of these work items as well After this is complete review the work items assigned to the sections by highlighting them on the Project Planner gt gt Section Level Work tab To add Project level work To add Project Work items to the RW 5 23 project select this project in the Current Project list box and then go to the Project Work tab To add work to the entire project click Add The two work items to be added are Cold Mill 4 Layer Construct Work Category and 4 Overlay Major Work Category Use Unit Costs of 0 45 SqFt and 2 00 SqFt respectively with a construction date of 8 1 2010 After the work items have been added the Project Planner gt gt Project Work tab should look like the image below 299 es
269. om network to branch to section at each level selecting an item by its ID or Name In the inventory data window the user can edit inventory data Access data for a particular level by clicking the tab for Network Branch or Section To change the displayed inventory item locate the in the Inventory Item List Selector and the inventory data window will update itself accordingly At the bottom of the inventory data window the user is able to select the type of inventory data values to edit The user can edit Current Values which are the current data values used for new inspections and calculations or Historical Values which are relative to past inspection data Modified Historical Values do not have any effect on current PCI values and calculations For Historical Values will provide a range of inspection dates affected with consistent inventory data values You may move to different fields on the inventory data form by clicking on the field you wish to edit order to enter information You may also move from field to field on the form by pressing the tab key Each press of the tab key shifts the selected field once to the right and at the end of a row the tab key shifts the selected field down one row to the furthest left field Data fields in 6 only accept entries of a determined type of characters For example a distance field can contain only numeric information and if you try to enter non numeric cha
270. ome active liil Field Data Image Inspection Export Ex File name to export to Chapter 15 Wizards 120 The second screen displayed below is a query tool This tool lets the user define what sections are going to be surveyed The user can define a group of sections at this time or after Next is selected they can redefine or further define a selection based on a GIS map This screen shot is also displayed below Field Data Image Inspection Export Stored Criteria C Select None Record Count Select Subset Memorize Copy Delete Select All EE Enable Field Name Cache Refresh Cache Network Select Rows E Branch Section Latest Work Latest Traffic Latest NDT Deflection NETWORK AREA i etworl vation m Network ID Network User Sort 1 Sample Conditior Network UserSott2 Distress Extrapolated Distress Latest Conditions Clear All Clear Current Clear Current Tables Table Row View Text Cancel lt Back Nest Finish liil Field Data Image Inspection Export Select Zoom Zoom Zoom Pan Select Tue Aveo n Out Center Print TIN 2 Locate Mode mouse clicks synchronize the and the map but do not di selection Cancel lt Back Nest Finish After a final selection has been made and Next 15 selected on GIS selection tool the follo
271. onsistency can damage the accuracy of analysis routines such as the Work Plan Printing Screen Images Printing in 15 accomplished in one of three ways First the standard reports include specialized forms for printing reports see the Standard Reports section Right button clicking on tables or graphs provides a method of printing tables or graphs In certain situations you may wish to print the contents of a screen as it appears which can include multiple tables graphs or other data entry forms To print the image on your screen select File from the menu and then Print In some instances you will note that the Print option is not available to select from the File submenu indicating that there 15 currently no printable object on the Desktop After selecting Print the print dialog box appears on your screen containing a drop down list box labeled Print What Open the drop down list and select Form Image then select the OK button to send a copy of the active PAVERTM window to the printer You may use the Printer Setup dialog window to select an alternate printer if you have access to multiple printers After you have printed the form 1mage the print dialog window closes and you return to the window that was active when you selected the Print option Chapter 2 User Interface 17 Graphs in can be printed in either black and white or color The default setting
272. oordinator Zip Code PAVER Data Coordinator Phone Number INTERNAL USE VALUE NOT REQUIRED PAVER Agency Id FAMILY DBF Family Models Model name Max age to be used for model Model 1st coefficient Model 2nd coefficient Model 3rd coefficient Model 4th coefficient POLICY 1 DBF Maintenance Policy Names Maintenance policy Id Description of maintenance policy POLICY2 DBF Maintenance Policy Details Maintenance policy Id Distress for policy consideration Distress severity for policy consideration Work type considered for distress and severity Material type considered for distress and severity INTERNAL USE VALUE NOT REQUIRED INTERNAL USE VALUE NOT REQUIRED Cost per work type unit NETWORK DBF Pavement Network Inventory Large group of pavements Usually Airport City Sub Division Identifier Description of pavement network Supplemental value for selecting networks Supplemental value for selecting networks Supplemental value for selecting networks 148 OBJECT DATIASIZE USAGE 00 0 Table Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Table Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Appendix D BRANCH NETWORK BRANCH NAME USE SECTIONS AREA COMMENTS BSORTI BSORT2 BSOR
273. op 13 E Click the Condition Analysis button on the button bar With Actual Database selected Select All items and enter the Start Date as 10 1 1998 and the Plan Length as 10 years Click Execute Analysis Parameters Plan Setup Select Inventory for Planning Use the actual Actual Database Database database Tm Allltems Build Selection using Query Tool Select Plan Start Date and Plan Length Start date and StatDate 15 1 1999 Yeas plan length View Existing Report Execute Note Load Parameters button be used to restore the settings used in prior saved Condition Analysis Report m Click the Go To Detail button to view the results of the report at the section level Click the Go To Summary button to go back to the network level view networks and branches EMS Report Viewer C EMS Program Files Paver rpcdefit ca Switch between Sum mar y views Annual Condition Arithmetic Averaael _ Network ID Branch ID Oct 1998 gt E Annual Condition Plot A0103 Arithmetic Avg 0106 0403 A0500 0505 0601 BROADPARK AP205 ROADPARK AP403
274. ork Item Project Level Current project and phase 300 Area Bldg s Global Work G Total Project Area 11525798 Work Category Work Type Work details 5 Work Date 6 1 2009 Material Type Thickness 0 c Calculate Total Cost from Unit Calculate Section Cost From Total Cost and Section Area Cost and Section Area Cost of Unit Cost 0 00 SqFt Unit Cost From Table project work Maior M amp F Cost Analyzing M amp R Activity When the report calculations are completed the Work Plan report is presented in the Report Viewer tool The views on the Report Viewer tool can be changed between a Summary and a Detailed view each with their own table graphical views The default presentation of the report 15 a basic overall summary of the Work Plan Summary View Section The View menu within the PAVERTM Menu is used to add or remove tables and their associated graphs from the report viewer screen or to switch between the Summary and the Detail version of the report To turn off one of the Summary tables and their associated graphs select View gt gt Summary from the PAVERTM Menu and then select the table that you want to turn off Tables or graphs which are active in the current report view have a checkmark to the left of the table or graph s name Some of the views might not be applicable to the type of report run Summary views include a User defined Views Displays any previously cre
275. orrect EMail address is important to receive notification of PAVER updates Press Activate PAVER via EMail when you are finished PAVER Serial Number A A A A Agency Company Pavement Consultants Inc Contact Name Joe Smith City State Country EMail Address Joe Smith 2abc com Confirm EMail Address Joe Smith abc com Secondary EMail Phone After clicking Activate PAVER via Email PAVER will automatically use your email application to send an email to the licensing server which will send an email reply containing the activation code Enter the activation code from the reply email and click Activate Microsoft Office Outlook Im program is trying to access e mail address information stored in Outlook If this is unexpected dick Deny and verify your antivirus software is up to date For more information about e mail safety and how you might be able to avoid getting this warning click Help E Allow access for 1 minute Microsoft Office Outlook esm A program is trying to send an e mail message on your behalf If this is unexpected dick Deny and verify your antivirus software is up to date For more information about e mail safety and how you might be able to avoid getting this warning dick Help Chapter 1 Overview An EMail has been sent requesting your Activation cod
276. ossible List b Notwork Deleto Row User Defined List Entries View the details WARREN PLETWARALY WARREN PLFTWARALY 12 of the selected WARRENPLII29 0 fi WARREN 01 T WARREN PL0356 01 user de ined WARREN PLO280 01 0317 01 field WARF EN PLO332 02 WARREN 0332 01 WARREN PL4328 01 WARREN PL4Z00 14 The fourth display screen shows the attribute table with all of the valid and invalid records Any row that is highlighted in yellow is an invalid record which will gray out the Next button on the form All invalid records need to be corrected in the shapefile before it can be imported as a PAVER database Chapter 4 Database Tools Inventory Import ESRI GIS e Networkid BName Branchld Sectionld NSorti NSore r lt JARL Access for Bldg 103 0103 01 JARL Access for Bldg 106 0106 01 Access for Bldg 403 0403 JanL Access for Bldg 403 A0403 A0500 Access for Bldg 500 A0500 Access for Bldg 505 0505 Yellow areas Access for Bldg 505 Access for Bldg 601 0505 A0601 indicate invalid Access for Chance Rd _ ACHAN Access for Navy Base ANAVA records Access Parking for Bldg 205 AP205 Access Parking for Bldg 403 AP403 01 ARL Rd JARL Loading Dock for Bldg 2
277. our components source file selection selection criteria destination file specification and processing status Click the Select button associated with the large file selection list window labeled Source to identify the file s to be combined split or copied To combine databases select two or more files Select one file if you are subsetting or copying a file Specify the target for the combined or subset database by clicking the Select button associated with the window labeled Destination Enter a new file name for the database to be created The Selection Criteria button invokes the EMSTM Query Tool to filter the source databases For example you can combine several databases choosing to select only those sections from the source databases that have surface type equal to AC and rank equal to P primary Note that the selection criteria you specify depends on the values in the first source database you select for the combine operation For example if the first database you select has no AC pavements the EMSTM Query Tool cannot be set to select AC as the filter for surface type The Execute button launches the Combine Subset operation The processing status area of the screen monitors the progress of your operation and posts the results Once complete click Close to close the Combine Subset form and return to the PAVERTM desktop Use the File gt gt Open option from the PAVER Menu to select the newly combined subset or copied databa
278. ow Position the tip of the arrow over the point you want to zoom out from and click the left button on the mouse The GIS map view will increase as the scale of the map decreases at scale factor of 2 1 The new view window will be centered on the tip of the arrow The Zoom Out tool will continue to be active and may be used again until another tool is selected 7 The Print tool allows user to print a hard copy of GIS map use the Print tool click Print The default print setup will print the entire GIS map only on a letter sized sheet to the default printer The print setup may be changed using File gt gt Printer Setup Accessing GIS Reports Shapefile The GIS Reports are a series of preset views that allow the user to see a variety of information about their database in a GIS view See Chapter 8 Reports for more information on generating GIS Reports There are three GIS views Inventory Last PCI and Assignment Of PCI Deterioration And M amp R Families Y n Select GIS Views 5 Inventory Surface Use Rank Category Last PCI Assignment of PCI Deterioration and M amp R Families If the user has a linked shapefile then a GIS Report can be generated by clicking on Visual Menu gt gt Reports gt gt GIS Reports and then selecting the type of report After the GIS view appears a report shapefile has been generated To view this shapefile first close MicroPAVER Then navig
279. p Exit System a Click Inventory on the PAVER button bar Inventory button Workshops 190 Network tab Name new network New network button Workshops Within the Network tab click New and in the Network ID and Network Name boxes type Exercise E List Selector Network Exercise S Exercise Branch Section gt From Network Exercise lt None gt lt None gt 1 Network qo Network ID Exercise Network Name Exercise Comment User Defined NeorkUser Sor E P ou are editing Curent Yalues Historical Values New 191 Within the Branch tab click New and enter Branch Id Branch Name and Branch Use information Use the drop down list for Branch Use Select OK E List Selector Network Exercise Exercise Branch Section Network Exercise lt None gt lt gt Branch tab 2 Branch 1 new Branch ID ew 6 24 Branch Use FURY branch amp use ou are editing CurentValues Historical Values New branch button Copy Close List Selector Network Exercise Exercise RW 6 24 X Runway 624 Section From Te 6 24 lt gt 2 Branch 1 New branch information Branch ID AW 6 24 Branch Name Runway
280. parameters that were defined for the current condition analysis report 103 As with the Condition Analysis Report the M amp R Report also produces a Select GIS Views window that allows the user to see GIS views associated with the current M amp R Report The preset views are m After Conditions by Year Shows the condition of each section in the report after the funding work has been applied to that section Major and Global Years Shows the PAVERTM recommended Global and Major M amp R over the entire length of the M amp R Plan report E M amp R by Year Shows the PAVERTM recommended M amp R both Global and Major for each year of the M amp R Plan report Ej Project Assignment Displays the planned projects sections included that were created before running the report E Major M amp R by year Displays only on Major M amp R work per year and is split into two categories Above Critical for sections above the critical PCI and Below Critical for sections below critical E Global M amp R by year Displays only on Global M amp R work per year Localized M amp R by year Displays only on Local work per year Reminder GIS views are only available if a coverage or shapefile is linked to a database See Chapter 14 GIS Tools Open A Saved M amp R Plan As with the Condition Analysis reports a user can save any M amp R Plan that 15 ran saving the time it takes to execute the report Depen
281. pecifics of work that has been performed including the type of material used You can add any material types to this list by entering an Item and Description Layer Construct This table contains information on different work types associated with base preparation To enter a line item of work specifically for base course establish the work type in the Layer Construct table The information on these lists is accessible from Work under the History tab Unit Of Measure Field Settings Here select a particular unit from a picklist to be associated with measurements used within PAVERTM Chapter 3 System Tables 38 4 Database Tools Combine Subset 40 Import EDO unnm ideam dt bns ae Dd EM aM MM E 41 6 5 adoro disi Co ez elU ee DEEST TT ET ETE DE 41 6 5 ImportProcedUre ceci tete trt er US ERN ERE ERU Pe e NEN eod veto o 42 Create PAVER Inventory From Shape Data 43 Combine Subset Database The Combine Subset option enables the user to combine multiple databases or database segments into a single database or to separate databases into multiple segments This tool is located in external 6 Database Tools which may only be run when 6 is closed The Combine option 15 also useful for making a copy of a database in an effort to protect an original The Combine Subset form has f
282. ply the work to the sections Sections Selected for Work Items Voce RU Neil rms TAXIW Nein wekDaeUntCos 5 1172772007 0 35 SqFt in Work Wizard Confirm the results of the added work Created 7 work history records a Review the items by first selecting Work from the PAVER button bar and then selecting one of the AC Taxiways to which work was applied Workshops 259 3 Calculate Last Construction Date Wizard Neil Armstrong database B Using the Neil Armstrong database open the Calculate Last Construction Date wizard via the Wizard icon on the PAVERTM button bar Select the Calculate Last Construction Date wizard and use a fixed PCI Deterioration rate of 4 points per year Calculate Construction Date Use a fixed Deterioration Rate rate of 4 PCI Use a fixed rate of PCI deterioration of m rune poin ts year C Use the assigned PCI deterioration family Date Tolerance Discard a calculated date if it is less than gt after an existing construction date Cancel m Click Next and then select the subset of Aprons Calculate Construction Date Stored Criteria Select None Record Count zl Select Subset Mem ze Delete f IV Enable Field Name Cache Refresh Cache Network Select Rows E Branch Field Comparison Compare To Branch U APRON
283. ponent which presents graphs for each section relating condition to work history D APRON A FBO 00 Bo Quanti Initial Construction New Delete Chapter 6 Work 61 7 Inspections Conditions PCI And Distress Irdio 8 b Ir PER iM E 63 Entering Inspection Dates And Samples eee eese esee ento testo tenen 63 Entering Inspection Information 64 For Maximum Speed Keyboard Only niit retineret doin 65 Batch Inspection Data Entty iiie EINER IEEE 66 Calculating The PCI After Inspection ces cit nt itio niihi va eia 66 444 eee 67 User editable Condition Itidices 67 Inspection Data Import PAVER 67 COPYING Inspection Data ucc tret narret terea e 67 Create Inspection 67 Open Saved Inspection Schedule 11111 ees 69 PCI And Distress Indices Collection and recording of field inspection data are among the most frequently repeated tasks in The Inspection component of can be launched from Visual Menu gt gt Inspection Conditions gt gt PCI and Distress Indices The PCI button on the Button Bar also launches the inspe
284. pvr si CMAFS FIMALTST pvr Ft Riley ProjForm 2 14 07 pvr Ft Riley ProjForm 2 26 2007 pvr E Ft Riley pvr Interstate 8 Mansfield pvi esi Mansfield 20 MCB MCB 3 MCBCPEN 3 2 E MCBCPEN 3 2 Neil Armstror Neil Armstror E pcc test pvr Roads and Roadway pvi Test2 pvr Test pvr File name m Files of type 4 Cancel a tes m You can filter the information that goes into the new database which is useful for combining parts of multiple databases together or separating a single database into several parts Click Selection Criteria and the EMS Query Tool launches allowing you to create a query For this example we will combine both of the databases in whole thus the query tool is not needed Workshops 233 Combine Subset PAVEMENT Database Source s c Xems program files user data neil armstrong c ems program files user data mansfield Destination C EMS Program Files User Data Ohio P R Processing Status bset PAVEMENT Database J Combine Split complete Destination 5 Program Files User D Processing Status 4 Network History 1 41 2 File C XEMS PROGRAM FILES User Branch History 4 46 10 Data Mansfield pavement mdb Section History 18 40 58 Family Assignment 18 40 58 SampleConditions 543
285. racters into a distance field the program will not accept your entry PAVER 6 0 RC 16 Tables Preferences Add Ins Window Help Hil inventory Q Work M Pred Modeling Cond Analysis 5 Sel Sel Wizards Visual Menu Help 6 0 About Inventory Item Tee Selector Mansfield Lahm APRONS iwN Inventory data corresponds with List Selector Properties Conditions Famiies window cS gt Last Constr Date 770E Length 48200 Width 163 50 ro 8 Network MFD APRON A y Calc Area esoo Area Adjustment p 0 True Area 79353 09 Calculate Calculate You are I ica S Histori Range of inspection dates affected 171371963 12 6 2006 Close Bist Sele Network M CNEMS Program Files User DataWMansfield test Chapter 5 Inventory 48 Each of the inventory cards Network Branch and Section have six buttons along the bottom of the form The New button is for adding new inventory items The Copy button is used to create a new network branch or section identical to the selected network branch or section except that the Network Branch or Section ID will include the characters to indicate that it is a copy None of the copied network s children branches and sections are copied when a network is copied
286. raffic survey Ending date of traffic survey Layer and Materials Testing Details Large group of pavements Usually Airport City Sub Division Identifier Medium grouping of pavements Usually runway taxiway apron street name Area of same pavement type This is the unit of pavement used for inspection rating methods Layer type OVERLAY SURFACE BASE SUBBASE SUBGRADE Test type Date of test Location of test Result value of test Depth from layer surface Comments related to Material Test WORKREQ DBF Pavement Work Required Details Large group of pavements Usually Airport City Sub Division Identifier Medium grouping of pavements Usually runway taxiway apron street name Area of same pavement type This is the unit of pavement used for inspection rating methods Work type code Date to start project Proposed date to start project Proposal Id Project phase Manner Accomplished I Inhouse C Contractor Quantity of work type to be performed Cost based on work type and quantity Material type used for work type Thickness of material Comments related to project 151 OBJECT _ NAME USAGE 00 0 Table Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Table Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Table Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Fi
287. rd Count if not checked E Also Query as seen below for the Sections C Select None Record Count Select Subset Memorize Copy Delete C Select All m Enable Field Name Cache Refresh Cache Select Rows Field Comparison Compare To Query as shown Binche isi Latest Traffic L Deflection z Zr E E HH Extrapolated Distre lata aig Clear All Clear Current Clear Current 5 Tables Table Row View Text ck Next gt Finish Workshops 257 Work Wizard Stored Criteria f hn Select Subset Memorize Copy pese C Select All 1 Network Rons Branch Comparison Compare To Field SURFACE z fac Query as shown Latest Work Latest Traffic Latest NDT 21 Deflection Latest Inspections Sample M 21 zi Sample Extrapolated Distress Latest Conditions gt gt gt Select Next and review the selections shown on the map Work Wizard PAVER 6 0 RC 23 Select Zoom Zoom Zoom Pan Select Aron lim Out Center Print Finish Workshops 258 m Select Next review the sections and then click Apply Review Confirm Sections and Work V Record Count Generate Work Report Cancel will not apply any work Apply will ap
288. rea Adjustment are added to obtain True Area the value used in calculations and reports The True Area field may be edited directly if the true area of a section is known then will calculate the Area Adjustment For concrete sections there are four additional user entered fields Slab Length Slab Width Total Slabs and Joint Length These fields aid in determining the sections total joint length an essential factor when determining the cost of a joint sealing project Joint sealing is the process of cleaning and sealing or resealing PCC joints This technique is used to mitigate surface water infiltration into the pavement foundation and to stop the accumulation of incompressibles in the joints Inventory IRP IRESE 01 Jtr 5 New 0 2 3 Section Properties Conditions Families Section ID 01 From NEwMARK DRIVE Te 15 CURVE Surface Type PCC v Rank 5 Last Constr Date Length 400 Width Calc Area 120 Area Adjustment Gc True Area 11 200 Slab Length 20 Width Ft C Calculate Area Adjustment Total Slabs 40 Joint Length 932 Ft Calculate True Area Category N Zone Lanes Spaces n Shoulder m Street Type Grade 0 Comment User Defined Fields Images 0 New Copy Delete Chapter 5 Inventory 51 The formula for calculating Total Slabs is based on the sections True Area and the average slab length an
289. rea of same pavement type This is the unit of pavement used for inspection rating methods Starting location of pavement section Ending location of pavement section User specified indicator for funding sources maintenance areas etc Section category A Z 0 9 Pavement rank A Principal B Arterial C Collector D Industrial E Residential N Not Applicable P Primary S Secondary T Tertiary X Other Surface type AAC ABR AC ACT APC APZ BR COB GR PCC PVB ST X Section Length Section Width Section Area Slab length Slab width Number of slabs Slab joint length Last construction date Last inspection date Last inspection PCI condition Family model assigned to section Shoulder type Street type Pavement grade in degrees Number of lanes in section Supplemental value for selecting sections Supplemental value for selecting sections Supplemental value for selecting sections 149 OBJECT NAME _ DATATYPE DATJIASIZE USAGE 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Table Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Table Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Appendix D SAMPLE _ NETWORK BRANCH SECTION INSDAT SAMPLE TYPE SIZE PCI DISTRESS SEVERITY QTY XDIST NETWORK BRANCH SECTION INSDAT D
290. reated in Tables gt gt Condition Tools gt gt Select Condition Types On the Select Condition Types window there are three separate tabs Numerical Condition Types Textual Condition Types and Distress Condition Types These tabs represent user defined condition indices that may be numerical textual or distress oriented Condition indices can be edited using the Add or Delete buttons and manipulated individually inside the grid These user defined values can be assigned to sections in a data base via Visual Menu gt gt Inspection Condition gt gt Other Conditions Inspection Data Import PAVER Database Copying Inspection Data PAVER allows you to copy inspection data from one version of a database to another copy of the same database using the Inspection Data Import Database The Inspection Data Import 15 useful if inspection data entry is split among coworkers and is to be imported at a later time into one master database To start make sure that the database to which you would like to import inspection data into is open and click Visual Menu gt gt Inspection Conditions gt gt Inspection Data Import Database A window appears on the screen asking for the database file from which you wish to copy the inspection information Once you have located the correct database file another window appears asking which inspection dates you wish to import Select the appropriate dates from the lis
291. red as feet except True Area entered as SF Additional user defined fields can be present in the shapefile and brought into PAVER One example would be the field Category with string as its field type and as its field size Another example is Shoulder with string as its field type and 3 as its field size The Create PAVER Inventory From Shape Data tool contains five display screens The first display screen shows the source shapefile data and the destination path for the PAVER database The source data is where the user navigates to the shapefile that will be imported to create the PAVER database The destination path is where the database will be created The user has the ability to either create a new database or overwrite existing PAVER database If the user chooses to overwrite an existing database all of the data will be replaced by the created database inventory Import ESRI GIS o Source Data ESHI Shapefile c Hard Drive CA E Shapefiles for Import Roads FNIT Destination PAVER Database CAEMS Program Files User Data Roads amp Parking Inventory Import PVR Select Destiation The second display screen is where the PAVER database fields are matched with the fields in the shapefile s attribute table PAVER is able to recognize some field names but unrecognized fields can be s
292. rements cost and inspection schedule updates the last construction date for the section to correspond with the most recent major M amp R The History and Required forms provide an interface for easily entering work history data for a particular pavement section In order to enter work information for a particular section it must be selected in the Select Inventory Item window For a new record click New and then enter the information either by typing or selecting from a drop down list box of options You may edit entries by typing over existing text PAVER does not allow the user to delete ALL the construction dates in a work history profile and if there is only one construction date the entry cannot be removed Copy invokes the Copy and Move Data utility which Is used to move data elements to other compatible areas of the database In this case work records will be copied or moved Maintenance repair and construction activity information is recorded on the Work file card The file card is subdivided into History and Required tables Future or planned work 15 entered into the Required table When the activity has been completed scroll to the last column of the Required table and change the Work Completed field to Yes This causes the record to be transferred to the History tab and when the table refreshes the completed work activity will then be part of the work history The Graphs tab also contains a graphic com
293. ritical M amp R PCI gt Critical except Global Default lifetime credit years for preventive work to be applied to models built without preventive Major M amp R Major Start Date 6 17 2010 Sho Calculate delay penalty for 5 Major M amp R Delay Penalty Calculate for 9 aul years Penalty will be calculated for first 5 year s of the ple years View Existing Report Execute Close M amp R Plan Parameters Plan Setup Budget Categories Families Project Planning No M amp R Localized Stopgap M amp R Localized Preventive M amp F Major M amp R families have been assigned Use Assigned Families so all sections r Default Stopgap Family will use the Cost By PCI default M amp R V6 1 Default AC RD amp AF_Stopgap E dit family Use the cost tables as shown Stopgap Localized below critical PCI Cost Multiplier Cost by PCI Multiplier View Existing Report Close Workshops 291 M amp R Plan Parameters Plan Setup Categories Families Project Planning Localized Stopgap Localized Preventive Preveniive MEF Use Assigned Families Default Preventive M amp R Family Cost By Default AC Loc Prev E dit Preventive localized above critical PCI Cost Multiplier by PCI Multiplier 1
294. rked workstations This will preclude multiple simultaneous edits 2 Since this configuration creates multiple copies of the system tables different workstations could produce different results for the same pavement data based on different system table usage For this reason you must establish a process whereby edits to the system tables are manually propagated via import export to the other workstations With these two restrictions users on the network can access a networked pavement database Use A Terminal Services Or Citrix Server You can install on a Terminal Services or Citrix server and allow users to access the common install However since does not support multiple user access to common data you must enforce rules like those above l Two users cannot edit the same pavement data at the same time You can configure your server so that different users can only see different pavement databases or you must enforce by process that only one user 15 allowed to edit the pavement data 2 Two users cannot edit the system tables at the same time Here you have no configuration option you must enforce a process that only one user is able to edit system table data With these two restrictions users can access a common install on the Terminal Services Citrix server Another alternative is to have multiple installs on the server and give each user their own
295. rkshop LL Neil Armstrong Workshop 12 Neil Armstrong 2007 Tags s n Include other non associate Include Virtual Inventory Include Required Projects File Selection Save as type E65 export E65 Hide Folders Pavement file to export 5 Program Files User Data Roads and Parking pvr Browse Export path and filename Browse Working Status Action mg Filo EE Table 7 1007 MEER EE No destination has been selected Expart Close m Click Save and then click Export on the PAVER 6 5 Export form Close the program when it is finished Workshops 226 2 Using the same process as above export the Neil Armstrong pvr database and name it C EMS Program Files User Data MAirport e65 3 Importing the Roadway e65 file into Click Execute for import form Import file selection Destination of import file Workshops Close PAVER if it is opened as the import export tools will not run if 15 currently running Double click the 6 DB Tools icon and then select Import data from an e65 file and Execute Import PAVER data from an 40 or e50 or e60 or e65 file Export PAVER data to an e65 file Combine Subset PAVER databases Create PAVER Inventory from Shape Data PAVER 6 0 Import File Selection Import filen
296. rl button and then moving them to the Section In Current Project right hand table The single arrow moves only highlighted sections while the double arrows move the entire list The following image shows the sections that have been added to the project E Project Planner 9 ens Current Project AllSections Sections in projects Sections with recommended work that an Rw 523 V Eatliest Work Date 5 Total Project Area 110925055 Project Completed est wa LL Movelo Work History New Delete Copy Rename 5 Total Project Cost 0 00 dam Project Sections Project Work Section Level Work Work ltem Views Sections in Current Project NetworkID Brancho SectionID NetworkID BranchiD SectionID MANSFIELD 14 32 A MANSFIELD 05 23 MANSFIELD 14 32 MANSFIELD 05 23 B MANSFIELD 14 32 MANSFIELD 14 32 F inter MANSFIELD 14 32 MANSFIELD 14 32 MANSFIELD APRON MANSFIELD APRON MANSFIELD APRON C1 term MANSFIELD APRON c2 MANSFIELD APRON c3 MANSFIELD RUNUP AREA 14 MANSFIELD RUNUP AREA 32 4 MANSFIELD T HANGAR A E _ Show entire set Show subset jw Respond to Move Selected Section s Selections to a Different Project After assigning the above sections to the project add an additional new project named RW 14 32 Sections can also be selected highlighted through the GIS view Select the
297. rom Current Database 89 User Field Editor DERK User Defined Fields for Branch New Existing Fields Deleted Fields Recycle Bin Example values first 200 PIDs for FeldName Field Type Owner in curent database Owner Us ST Example RUNUP AREA IRUV 14 32 values for field RUV 5 23 to retrieve Fields that can be restored gt Permanently delete Select All Resne mece selected field s from current DB Chapter 3 System Tables 29 1 Network 2 Branch b Network ID MFO Network Mansfield Lahm Comment User Defi Owner ser Defined You are editing Curent Values Historical Values Images 0 New Copy Delete Close Example created user defined field Edit Inventory Picklists This window displays seven tabs that provide editing access to a group of picklists within PAVER of these tabs allow you to add items to the current list In some cases existing table data is considered to be default and cannot be deleted In most areas PAVER will direct the process of data input to conform to the necessary PAVER database formatting Some fields allow you to enter any text value while other fields produce a prompt to the user to select an option from a list that is displayed Examples of using this window are Customizing Zone names Naming a new Surface
298. rom www microsoft com Second link the handheld device to the main computer by connecting the two via serial port or USB port and launch Microsoft Active Sync When prompted by Microsoft Active Sync to setup a partnership with this computer select Guest Partnership and then Next Note A partnership is used when the synchronizing of files on the handheld and PC are desired this is not necessary for this PAVER application To install the necessary software to the handheld device select the install file from the handheld installation CD Software Operation In an effort to expedite the Pavement Condition Index PCT field inspection process has the added capability of interacting with Windows CE handheld devices This capability was developed as an add in to PAVER and currently ships with PAVER 6 Handheld Data Import is accessed in through the Add ins menu Data for field inspections can be downloaded from PAVER to a Windows CE handheld device that has the Handheld PCI Inspector program installed Typically when preparing for a field inspection the first step is to download the sections to be inspected to the Windows CE handheld device Data transfer between the main computer and the Windows CE device is facilitated with Microsoft Active Sync With Microsoft Active Sync sections to be inspected may be transferred from the main computer to the Windows CE handheld device using the Download Sec
299. s inspectionData lt inspectedElement gt lt inspectedElement 0002 size 2500 PIDZ ROADPARK PKUES 2 gt lt centerLocation gt latitude degrees 28 minutes 28 secondsz 7 726593 northSouthz N longitude degrees 80 minutesz 32 seconds 39 32922 eastWestz w centerLocation inspectionData PCIDistresses levelDistress distressCode 19 quantity 243 108692233997 severity gt lt PCIDistresses gt lt inspectionData gt lt inspectedElement gt lt inspectedElement inspectedElementID 0003 size 2500 PID ROADPARK PKUES 2 gt lt centerLocation gt lt latitude degrees 28 minutes 28 seconds 7 108612 northSouth N gt longitude degrees 80 minutesz 32 seconds 39 87854 eastWestz W centerLocation inspectionData PCIDistresses lt levelDistress distressCode 19 quantity 244 657117518622 severity L gt PCIDistresses lt inspectionData gt lt inspectedElement gt lt geospatialinspectionData gt lt pavementData gt Video Inspection Import Data Format ASCII Text File Specifications For PClVideo Interface To PAVER Example User Interfaces PCIVasc2PVR exe User interface for the use of Distress Data collected into ASCII files It is recommended that the complete parameter string be enclosed in quotes Command Line Parameters PVR C EMS Program Files PDIR C EMS Program Files User D
300. s 31 Stopgap M amp R Families On this tab Stopgap M amp R Families can be defined for use with the M amp R plan Once a new M amp R family has been created the previously defined Distress Maintenance Policy Cost by Work Type Cost by Condition and Sort Order can be assigned to it To add sections to a M amp R family refer to M amp R Family Assignment Localized Stopgap amp Tables and Families 5 Stop Gap Cost by Condition B Stopgap Families 3 Distress Maintenance Policies 4 Consequence of Maintenance Policy 1 Work Types 2 Cost by Work Type Tables No Localized M amp Sealing Joint Seal Silicon Sealing Grinding Localized Joint Seal Localized Patching AC Deep Patching AC Leveling Patching AC Shallow Patching PCC Full Depth Patching PCC Partial Depth Shoulder leveling Slab Replacement Undersealing PCC Sort Order Localized Preventative M amp R Tables And Families Work Types A listing of all work types classified as localized repairs Work types can be added or deleted by clicking on the associated buttons on this tab E Cost by Work Type Tables You can create different cost tables to correspond with different jobs or regions Previously created tables can be seen by clicking on the drop down list box Tables can be created deleted or renamed by clicking on the associa
301. s to GIS Linkage Unsaved changes will be lost 9 Create some GIS views that show Surface and Latest PCI Select Reports from the toolbar then GIS Reports and then Continue on the Reports form Workshops 220 Reports Pred Modeling Analysis Gis Tree Sel EBList Sel Wiza Reports Summary Charts Standard Reports Select GIS C User Defined Reports Surface Use Rank Category jid pi and 6 GIS Reports Assignment of PCI Deterioration and M amp R Families Now to view the Inventory GIS view click on the Inventory Surface Use Rank Category option Reports Click on In ventory C Summary Charts Select 615 Views 5 Surface U se 5 5 7 Surface Use Rank Category Rank Categ GIS Reports Assignment of PCI Deterioration and M amp R Families Workshops 221 7 rspark shp Surface rspark shp Surface rspark shp Category rspark shp Rank rspark shp Use On Inventory GIS view there are several viewing options layers checked on the lower left side of the form As seen directly below all of the layers are selected on and the upper most layer that is shown is the surface layer To toggle between these different views layers simply check them on or off 9 es Pen Select Select Zoom 2 1 200 el
302. se Combine Subset PAVEMENT Database DAR Select source database s Select a file name for the new database Run Combine No databases are selected Subset procedure Chapter 4 Database Tools 40 Import Export The Import Export utilities located in the external 6 Database Tools are used to exchange data between different computers running PAVER The database sender uses PAVER Export to create a single file The receiver uses PAVER Import to transform a single file with the extension e40 e50 e60 or e65 to a working pavement database in his her PAVER system Once in the system of the receiver the database can be opened 6 5 Export Procedure The 6 5 Export window 15 divided into four sections Export Type Options File Selection and Working Status The contents of the Export file are determined by the selection of one of two export options located at the top of the Export form When Exporting To An e65 File i The user has the option to include User defined Reports m When exporting System Tables only the option is available to export specific components of the System Tables m GIS shapefile is automatically included with data Configure the 6 5 Export file by selecting the checkbox es next to the appropriate option s As you configure your export file consider that the system importing the file you are creating imports all the information in the export fil
303. se of the unique ID allows the integrity of the link between GIS and data to remain even if the network branch and or section name changes In both of the following shapefile updating methods your shapefile is modified using a GIS program and your database is updated using Then in order to link the data and the shapefile you can either 1 Import your new shapefile into using Shapefile Converter and then manually link data with a polygon using GIS Assignment Tool a point and click user interface Within a GIS program such as ArcView add or update if they already exist network ID branch ID and section ID text fields to your shapefile s attribute table and populate them with your updated database information Then create another text field named PID which 15 the concatenation of your network ID branch ID and section ID with commas separating the three fields but no spaces This is essential in order for to correctly link your shapefile and database together As an example suppose you had a network ID of Stevensen branch ID of Scott and section ID of 02 Your PID field for this polygon should read Stevensen Scott 02 To specifically calculate the PID using ArcView s Field Calculator right click on the PID field within your attribute table and select Field Calculator Then in the PID box type NETWORK ID amp amp BRANCH ID a
304. se specified PCI categories excellent very good good fair poor and failed Under each of these categories the section area is presented for each year in the reporting period As in the other tables highlighting an individual year will display its associated graph to the right of the table Condition Frequency 96 Area This table is divided into six default unless otherwise specified PCI categories Voexcellent Vovery good Vogood fair and Under each of these categories the percent section area relative to the total area is calculated for each year in the reporting period As in the other tables highlighting an individual year will display its associated graph to the right of the table Chapter 11 Condition Analysis 88 EMS Report Viewer C EMS Program Files Paver rpcdefit rpc ser Defined Views eraael User Defined Views 2005 May 2006 enual Condition Plot Arithmetic Avg 15 Annual Condition Area Weighted Overlay Work Scenario Condition Frequency No Of Sections Condition Frequency Area v Condition Frequency Area Branch ID May 2003 May 2004 May 2005 21 20 18 Condition Distribution Graph 96 57577003 18 ondition Distribution Graph 96 Area 57572004 18 57572005 18 Percent 157572006 18 aay Detail Views The Detail version includes the following av
305. sen to name your samples m Print Comments Print Options Checking any combination of these boxes enables the report to display comments that were entered at that level Within the program you can enter comments in a text field at any of those levels here is where those comments can be printed out Now that you have configured your report click Next to bring up the EMS Query Tool At this point you can select the whole database or specific sections to be included into the report Click Next once sections are selected with the Query Tool saying Next to an empty query selects the entire database PAVER will review the sections for inspection setup in order to check for any sections with insufficient data Click Apply to run the Inspection Setup Wizard and PAVER will create the desired records forms and or report Work Entry Wizard The use of the Work Entry Wizard is a convenient way for the user to apply multiple work items to multiple sections as well as have the option to create a work history report Once work items are added to sections the user does not have the ability to delete or edit any of the items in the Work Entry Wizard However this can be done in the Work form on a per section basis Access the Work Entry Wizard from the PAVER Button Bar by choosing Wizards Start by clicking Add Work to start creating work items to be applied A new window titled Add Work Item will appear allowing the user to spec
306. ser to set the critical PCI Minimum Condition for each year Z Major M amp R Tables and Families 3 Cost by Condition 1 Work Types 2 Cost by Work Tables 3 2 11 NUN AC Surface Recycling Cold AC Surface Recycling Hot Select priority for Break amp Seat amp Overlay Major M amp R for Complete Reconstruction AC each Branch Use Complete Reconstruction New Construction New Construction AC New Construction Priority Tables M amp R Priority Table This table allows the user to prioritize pavements based on branch use and section rank The default table is ranked from 1 highest priority to 9 lowest priority New tables must have a ranking for each category and two or more categories are able to have the same ranking Section Rank Priority The user may assign a priority to pavements based on section rank Branch Use Priority The user has the ability to assign a priority to pavements based on their declared usage Branch use priority is considered during M amp R Plan execution and determines how limited funds are allocated Chapter 3 System Tables 34 Ei Priority Tables 3 Branch Use Priority 1 M amp R Priority Table 2 Section Rank Priority Default Priority T able m New Table Rename Del Table Close Layer Types And Costs Layer Types Codes and work units for all layer types
307. sh to delete the sample as well as any inspection information within the sample PCI IRP INEWM 01 Summary data at time of inspection Branch Use 2 Section Surface Type Section True Area Section Length F Section Width 5 Med 7 25 1296 Estmspecions Deteiled inspection Comments Calculate Conditions Edit a a Inspections window H SHOVING 127571994 SLIPPAGE CR 10 13 1893 SWELL Past 10 21 1992 IRAVELING 10 16 1991 WEATHERING 4 6 6 1989 inspections 10 13 1986 4 22 1986 listing l 9 30 1984 3 24 1984 Add Distress Delete Distress 4 New creates both PCI and Replace Distress non PCl inspections Create a new inspection Insp Images 0 Entering Inspection Information The PAVER Inspection Data Entry window is designed to be easy to use and to allow experienced users to rapidly enter large amounts of inspection data It is possible for the user to enter all inspection information for an entire section using only the keyboard Once the section is selected and the inspection date and samples are set up the user is ready to enter individual distresses Select the Distress Type and desired Distress Severity level and then enter the Distress Quantity Note that the distress codes available in the list depend on the type of pavement inspected since some distresses are only found on a particular
308. sign sections to a M amp R Family highlight the desired section on the left hand table and click the single right pointing arrow dividing the two tables This will move the highlighted section to the right table assigning it to the selected M amp R Family If the double right pointing arrow is selected it will assign and move all sections from the left table to the right table Alternately the left pointing arrows move sections from the right table to the left table Once all desired sections have been assigned press Close to exit the assignment tool window CE oo Selected M amp R Family Stop gap Family Selected Edit Stop gap amp Family definition Edit selected M amp R Family H i Table view Sections not assigned to this Stop gap Family options C Sections not assigned to any Stop gap M amp R Family Sections assigned to this Stop gap M amp R Family Network ID Branch ID E NewokiD St gt CHEYENNE CHAMBER A1 CHEYENNE CHAMBER 2 0 CHEYENNE CHAMBER C CHEYENNE CHAMBER B t tion ian CHEYENNE CHAMBER D Sections ed gt CHEYENNE CHAMBER E and unassigned 0101 to a M amp R Family CHEYENNE DWIOI lt CHEYENNE 103 M lt lt 4 4 Assioni Show all Show all Signing she bse C Show subset buttons Chapter 12 M amp R Family Assignment 93 13 M amp H Plan Crea
309. sing for the appropriate files Once the file is selected PAVERTM checks that the file contains a UNIQUEID and PID The coordinates of the selected shapefile are displayed Once the file is loaded click Select in the Destination Shapefile area of the box After selecting the destination file you are then able to select the appropriate Shift Mode for the converted shapefile You may select a pre made shift mode or a User Specified shift mode from the drop down list box To complete the conversion process click Convert As the conversion takes place the results will be shown in the lower window Shapefile Coordinate Shift Beek Source Shape File Shape File Type Records Destination Shape File Shift Right Down ield mnsfield shp CNVSHAPE shp ield test hp Chapter 14 GIS Tools 15 Wizards Inspection Setup 115 Inspection D 115 Inspection FORTIS ra reet dei ens 115 REINSPECTION dem 116 Work Entry 116 Calculate Last Construction Date 118 Set Properties On Multiple Inventory 119 Field
310. sociated with a particular pavement database Images can be associated with the a network or assigned to individual branches and sections It provides a convenient way to establish a pictorial record of database units EMS Query A tool used to temporarily select a subset of pavement sections for analysis or reporting The application of a query to the active database does not cause any records in the database to be changed or deleted The query tool can also be used to specify the sort order of report results Family A pavement family is defined as a group of pavement sections with similar deterioration characteristics family model is estimated from the plot of observed age and condition measurements for pavements with similar attributes Geographical Information System GIS Geographical Information System GIS refers to a system that presents data in the context of a map GIS be used to display inventory condition distress cost and other pavement data as color coded maps Global Preventive Maintenance amp Repair M amp R Defined as activities applied to entire pavement sections with the primary objective of slowing the rate of deterioration This policy 1s applied to pavements above the critical PCI Localized Preventive amp Defined as distress maintenance activities performed with the primary objective of slowing the rate of deterioration This policy is applied to
311. stress data Once familiar with the Inspection Data Entry window distress data entry can be performed completely on the keyboard To perform keyboard only data entry first set up the inspection and sample information as described the previous section distress codes are two digit numbers shown to the left of the Distress Type To enter Bleeding for example type two digit code 02 A rectangle appears around the code and description You may change the distress selected by typing a different code or by moving the selection rectangle with the arrow keys Select the proper Distress Severity by typing L for Low for Medium and for High Once you enter a Distress Severity the cursor immediately moves to the Distress Quantity field where you can type in the distress quantity Note that the entire Distress Quantity field is highlighted meaning that anything in the box is immediately overwritten by what you type If the distress has no severity level then the Low Medium and High options are disabled gray To skip the distress severity press the Tab key twice The cursor skips first to the N A option then to the Distress Quantity field Once you have typed in a distress quantity add the distress to the list by typing for Add or by pressing the Enter key A new row is created in the list of distresses and a short beep lets you know the data has been entered Chapter 7 Inspect
312. surface PAVERTM likewise modifies the available Distress Severity levels as some distresses cannot be assigned a severity level If no distresses were recorded for a sample select No distresses found during inspection checkbox For to calculate the PCI or condition for a section all samples created must have at least one distress or be identified as No distresses found during inspection If you finish entering the inspection information and there are undefined samples with no distresses click the Remaining Samples Have No Distress Chapter 7 Inspections Conditons 64 button and will assign them as so The Database Verification Tools can be utilized to easily verify inspection samples and manage samples with no distresses see Chapter 5 Inventory gt gt Data Verification Tools After you have entered the Distress Type Distress Severity and Distress Quantity click Add Distress to add the distress to the list To delete an existing distress from the list highlight a row and click Delete Distress The Replace Distress button deletes the highlighted record and replaces that information with the current Distress Type Distress Severity Distress Quantity information If you wish to enter a comment for the distress click the Section Comments button in the list of distresses Once you have entered inspection data for an entire sample proceed to the next sample in the list by choosing another sample from the Sample
313. t 148 Pavement Data Exchange PDE Format OBJECT _ NAME DATATYPE DATASIZE USAGE 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 000 Table Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Table Field Field Field Field Field Field Table Field Field Table Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Field Table Field Field Field Field Field Appendix D SITE AGENCY SECUR UNIT NAME ADDR CTYSTA ZIPCDE PHONE PASSWRD AGENCYID FAMILY FAMILY MAXAGE COEFFI COEFF2 COEFF3 COEFF4 POLICY 1 POLICY DESCRIPT POLICY2 POLICY DISTRESS SEVERITY WORKTYPE MATERIAL EXTRAI EXTRA2 UNITCOST NETWORK _ NETWORK NAME NSORTI NSORT2 NSORT3 Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Text Number Double Number Double Text Text Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Text Text Text Text Text 61 25 25 52 30 10 21 8 30 10 61 10 10 10 SITE DBF Database and Contact Information PAVER Agency responsible for data maintenance INTERNAL USE VALUE NOT REQUIRED Data units in ENGLISH or METRIC PAVER Data Coordinator Name PAVER Data Coordinator Address PAVER Data Coordinator City and State Data C
314. t No pavement data is selected for export procedure 6 5 Import Procedure The 6 Import screen is divided into four sections File Selection How to Import System Tables Tables to Import and Working Status In File Selection click the Browse button for Import file name to specify the file to be imported These include files with the formats e60 e50 as well as e40 Select the type of file that you would like to import and then select the file A second Browse button is associated with the Import path The Import path refers to the location and name you wish to assign to the pavement data that is to be imported When you identify a file for a database under the Import file name selection the default name for the database 1s placed in the Import path box Clicking the Browse button associated with the Import path opens the Open Create Pavement Subdirectory form You can edit this form to change the default selection The form shows the default path to your pavement databases and provides a picklist of your existing pavement databases You can select an existing database in which case the data you are importing overwrites the existing database or type in a new name and the import file will be copied to this new name The How to Import System Tables portion provides two options The first option allows the user to add only values from imported files that do not exist in their current System Tables The other option completely replaces
315. t Detail version of the Work Plan includes User defined Views table Section M amp R and Resulting PCI by Year table Global M amp R by Section table Major M amp R by Section table Inventory Items table Funding Detail Table Missing Values Table and Plan Parameters table Table definitions include the following Chapter 13 M amp R Plan User defined Views Displays any previously created Customized views Customized views can also be created by choosing this option Section M amp R and Resulting PCI by Year Displays a detailed section list of the M amp R that PAVERTM recommends be completed on a yearly basis Global and Major M amp R by Section These tables further break down the recommended M amp R by separating the Global and Major M amp R by section The separated Global and Major M amp R tables are also accompanied by specific M amp R section details Inventory Items Displays all inventory items included in the report by section and lists section details Funding Detail Table Link Inventory This table is linked to the Inventory table and displays the funding categories of the highlighted section on the inventory table Funding Detail Table all section Shows a detailed breakdown of the funding categories for all sections included in the M amp R Plan report Missing Values Displays all values that were not included in the report for the listed description in the table Plan Parameters Shows the
316. t and click Copy After the data is processed a window will appear letting the user know the inspection data import is complete Create Inspection Schedule The Inspection Schedule report selects sections for inspection subject to minimum condition criteria or projected deterioration rates and operates like the Condition Analysis and M amp R Work Plan reports When the report 15 opened the user may configure the parameters of the report and then execute the report The completed report is presented in the Report Viewer Start the Inspection Schedule report by choosing Visual Menu gt gt Inspection Conditions gt gt Create Inspection Schedule Select either the actual database or a virtual database to include in the report on the Plan Setup tab under Select Inventory for Planning To select all items from the database choose Items To select a subset of the database using the EMSTM Query Tool choose Build Selection using Query Tool then click Edit Selection The Select Plan Start Date and Plan Length portion of the Plan Setup tab is used to specify the scheduling period when Schedule using criteria is highlighted under Select Inspection Schedule Type Otherwise Schedule all sections selected above is highlighted specifying a complete inspection The Insp Criteria Sampling Strategy amp Cost tab allows the user to specify Sampling Strategy and Inspection Expenses per sample unit when Schedule all sections selected above
317. t there is only one set of user defined field data for each section Verify reset latest inspection indicators Check for duplicate Major and duplicate inspections Verify work required history descriptions Verify inspection samples and cached inventory data Report sections with missing data for PCI calculation Report missing system table information distresses recalculate conditions all sections Necalculate surface for all sections Replace names in cached inventory data with current names No Manage samples with no distresses c Mark all samples with no distresses as inspected but no distress and list them Delete these sample units and inspections with no sample units and list them Just list them When there is no condition index in system lables fur sume condition recurs in the pavement database Create an UnknownCI in system tables Delete the ennditinn records Just report them Select All Clear All Select all the boxes and then click Start Remove Duplicate Distress Severity Qty Yes No Database Verification Tools Verify branch data and remove duplicate section data Verify section construction history Verify 7 reset latest inspection indicators Check for duplicate Major and duplicate inspections Verify work required history descriptions Verify inspection samples and cached inventory d
318. te A 95 eu p 95 SOU pi m 95 Tab 2 Im 96 Tab 3 Categoties RES DO ad iD UN n DO M adt n ME 98 Tab 4 Fartiilies io rri ti i EI EVE E EHE ERU MK UI ERE 98 5 Project eR ev 99 Analyzing MER 102 Open A Saved 104 Hegulred WOrK PIER ceases RENN 104 Create A M amp R Plan Overview The Work Plan is a tool for planning scheduling budgeting and analyzing alternative pavement maintenance and repair M amp R activities The M amp R Plan utilizes basic inventory data combined with inspection information maintenance policies maintenance costs and predictions about future pavement condition Work Plan results are specific to the user s site and all factors used in determining future M amp R or construction activity or the associated costs can be configured to reflect specific pavement management practices and costs The Work Plan Parameters window is opened by clicking Visual Menu gt gt M amp R Plan gt gt Create M amp R Plan or by clicking M amp R Plan on the Button Bar The Work Plan report operates like the Condition
319. ted Construction 0 00 True Complete Reconstruction PCC 9 00 True EASTERN 2 3 OF SECTION At Patching PCC Full Depth 000 False 1027 1998 CR PC Network Branch APRON APRON Section B Surface PCC LCD 11 08 1909 Use APRON RankS Length 080 width 11000 True Area 2828000 Safi Work Work Work hickness Major comment Date Code Description Cost fin 1008 8980 BCALC Baclecaleulated Construction 0 00 True 1027888 NC PC New Construction Major M 9 00 True 10 27 1098 UNKNOWN UNKNOWN 0 00 True Network NeilAms Branch APRON APRON Section Surface LCD 0808 2001 Use APRON Rank Length 240 00 Ft Width True Area 30 320 00 Calculate Construction Date Created construction record s for 8 sections Review the newly calculated construction dates through the Inventory form or the Work History form via the PAVER toolbar 262 4 Set Properties on Multiple Inventory Items Wizard Interstate Research Parkway database E Using the Interstate Research Parkway database open Set Properties On Multiple Inventory Items by selecting the Wizard icon on the button bar In the Set Properties On Multiple Inventory Items wizard select the items shown below Change Property Values on C Networks f Branches Sections Select the properties to Property Lanes mass populate Property Value
320. ted buttons If a new table is created a window will first appear prompting the user to enter a name for the new table This window also provides the user the ability to copy the default table to use as a template The costs associated with the work types can be customized on any of the tables even the default table If a desired work type is not included on a table the work item must first be entered on the Work Types tab Once the new item has been entered on the Work Type tab the Add or Delete button can be used to modify any table There must be a cost entered for all work types listed m Distress Maintenance Policies You can define separate tables and group different localized work types for different maintenance scenarios E Consequence of Maintenance Policy For every work type listed on the Work Types tab there is an associated table here Each table consists of a list of all distresses related to a particular work type and the distress produced as a result of performing the specified work This assists the Work Plan in predicting future Preventive Cost by Condition this tab M amp R costs are related to the condition of the pavement As seen in the default table costs to repair a pavement increase as the pavement condition PCT decreases Chapter 3 System Tables 32 Preventive M amp R Families On this tab Preventive M amp R Families can be defined for use with the M amp R plan Once a new M amp R family has b
321. terstate Research Park pwr CAEMS PROGRAM FILES User Data Ohio Workshop 6 b PVR Mansfield 2007 pvr Neil Armstrong Workshop 11 Ri Armstrong Workshop 12 Neil Armstrong_2007 pvr lt Remove Roads and Parking Workshc lt lt RemoveAll 236 Click Selection Criteria and create query as seen below Network Branch Section Required Work Latest Work Latest Traffic Latest NDT Deflection Latest Inspections Sample Sample Distress Extrapolated Distre Latest Conditions New database name and destination Workshops Select Rows Field Record Count Comparison Compare To zl Al zl z zl z z Current Clear All Clear Tables Table Des View Text a Click Select next to the Destination box and type the name of the new database Ohio Runways Then click Open followed by a Yes to create the file PAVER 6 0 DB Tools Combine Subset PAVEMENT Database Liles C Import data from an 40 or e50 or e60 file C Export PAYER data to an 50 or e60 file Combine Subset databases 552 i My Recent Documents 9 Desktop My Documents My Computer My Network Pla Look in User Data er B airport class Workshop 2 Class Workshop
322. the identifier of the section which owns this inspection It is formatted as NETWORKID BRANCHID SECTIONID Mandatory if sectionUniqueid not defined sectionUniqueid Similar to the PID this value describes which section owns this inspection This ID is pre generated by and can be used in place of the PID value Mandatory if PID not defined 2 The inspectedCondition node contains children startLocation endLocation centerLocation and inspectionData The children and attribute structure for startLocation endLocation and are the same as described for the inspectedElement node above Direct attributes for inspectedCondition include PID or sectionUniqueid as defined above The child for inspectedCondition is levelCondition which contains these attributes condition Condition value If desired to import Mandatory conditionText Test pertaining to condition value E comment Inspection comments if wanted E cndMeasure Type of condition being recorded If desired to import Mandatory source Source of recorded data 2 The inspectedComment node again contains the children startLocation endLocation and centerLocation The children and attribute structure for startLocation endLocation and centerLocation are the same as described for th
323. the left table from the right table Once all desired sections have been assigned press Close to exit the assignment tool window Chapter 10 Condition Model Family Assignment 84 When viewing the table on the tab 6 Assign Family in the Prediction Modeling window the sections assigned through the Family Assignment Tool are present On the tab there are three buttons below the table Assign Family to Sections Unassign Family from Selected Section and Family Assignment Tool The Family Assignment Tool was described in the previous section The other two buttons allow for the editing of the assigned family on the fly without the assignment tool To delete an assigned section s from a family model highlight the section in the table and then click Unassign Family from Selected Section PAVER will ask if you are sure that you would like to delete the desired section from the family After clicking the OK to delete the member s the selected section s will be removed from the list When the Assign Family to Section button is selected the EMSTM Query tool will open allowing the user to assign a group of sections at once Depending on the variability of a large database the user may want to avoid this method of assigning Chapter 10 Condition Model Family Assignment 85 11 Condition Analysis Create Condition 2222 87 Condition Analysis Parameters
324. tion The advantage of this capability is that PAVERTM allows you to sort the database at any level according to criteria that you have defined This is helpful if you want to select certain networks branches or sections for reports or work plans There are two types of user defined fields SORT Fields and Additional User Fields SORT Fields are designed to be picklist fields requiring the user to select from a predefined set of choices Additional User Fields require the user to enter data NSORT BSORT And SSORT At each level of the Inventory hierarchy network branch and section PAVER allows you to create three SORTs Under the main menu select Tables gt gt Define User Fields gt gt SORT for the desired level of inventory Enter data by clicking on the field you wish to edit The entries for Name should be short and easily recognizable since these will be displayed in as the options presented in the picklist for the SORT field The Description entry should indicate the complete name Click Add to add more entries for the sort and click Delete to delete the selected entry The selected entry 15 indicated by an arrow in the left margin To assign criteria for the other two SORTS click on their corresponding tabs Define Ssort1 through Ssort3 3 Section User Sort 3 1 Section User Sort 1 2 Section User Sort 2 Name Description Sample entries 2 Way Stop Intersection for SSort by
325. tions to Inspect tab available through the PAVER Add ins menu Once the appropriate sections are transferred to the handheld device the handheld device is ready for use in the field After the inspection has been completed the data on the Windows CE handheld device must be backed up using the Backup Inspection Data tab that is accessed through the PAVERTM Add ins menu The backed up data may then immediately be imported into PAVERTM or imported at a later date To import the data the third tab labeled Import Backup Data into is used During the data import all distress information is transferred to the appropriate PAVERTM database on the main computer The Handheld Data Import option in the PAVER Add ins menu launches a window with three tabs that perform three different tasks The first tab 15 used to Download Sections to Inspect The second tab 15 used to Backup Inspection Data after an inspection has been performed The third tab is Import the Backup Data into PAVER If no device is detected Chapter 16 Add ins 129 by you are only allowed to use the third tab to import previously backed up data into PAVERTM Download Sections To Inspect When downloading sections to inspect the user has available three methods to select the sections to download to the handheld device Make sure that there are no programs running on the handheld before the transfer of data I The first method is to Use PAVER
326. to this table if you wish to influence the curve in a particular area If any records are added or deleted you must recalculate to refresh the graph Use Boundary Outlier Upper and lower model boundaries are specified on the Use Boundary Outlier card Age vs PCI points that fall outside the boundaries are marked as of Range in the Review Model Data table Chapter 9 Condition Prediction Model 80 and are not considered when the predicted condition function is estimated Points marked as of Range can be reintroduced into the analysis by turning off the boundaries or shifting the location of the boundaries so those points are in the allowable range The X Range Filter is used to specify a range on the x axis from which you want to include data Data points outside the specified range are ignored Model Boundary Filter are adjusted by changing the values in the table on the Use Boundary Outlier card To edit or change a value highlight the row in the table you want to change and then select the column you wish to edit year lower or upper bound and type the new value numeric entries only New rows can also be added to the table with the right click menu The Add option inserts a blank row in the last row of the boundary data table Records in the Boundary Filter data table are sorted in ascending order by age year Edited and new records are out of order until the model is recalculated If any new information is e
327. uirements Iteration Determine Annual Budget For Condition Stabilization Backlog Elimination in 5 years Maximum Number of Iterations to Achieve Goal MAR Priority Table Default Priority Table Apply Inflation Rate 5 View Existing Report Execute m After reviewing the results close the window and save the report as Bklog wp as done before with the 300k report Workshops 288 Workshop 15 Project Planning Objective Plan projects using the M amp R Planner Database Open the Mansfield 2007 database by clicking File gt gt Open Database selecting Mansfield 2007 pvr and then clicking Open Tasks 1 Develop a 10 year work plan will eliminate all of the Major M amp R backlog in 5 years 2 After the M amp R Plan has been executed and the results analyzed plan two separate projects using the Work Planner Workshops 289 Hints amp Solution Guide For Workshop 15 1 Develop a 10 year eliminate backlog work plan using Mansfield 2007 database Open the M amp R Plan tool by selecting it from the PAVERTM button bar Tables Preferences Add Ins Window inventory Qi wok Reports Pred Modeling fif Cond Analysis PM amp R 15 5 gy Wizards E Visual Menu Help 6 0 About Use Actual Database Plan start date and plan length 10 years Use the Crit
328. uld update the current shapefile found in your Project Folder by moving it to another location on your computer modifying it and using the MicroPAVER Shapefile Converter to import it PAVER Shapefile Converter The PAVER Shapefile Converter is used to import a shapefile into a PAVER database The shapefile conversion procedure verifies that the shapefile contains a Unique ID and or PID field which PAVER uses to link and uniquely identify a polygon section with its corresponding PAVER data and if necessary adds the field s To use the PAVER Shapefile Converter first open your relevant database in PAVER Then open the Visual Menu gt gt GIS Tools gt gt PAVER Shapefile Converter In this window your source shapefile is defined as the shapefile that you have actively been modifying or working with The destination shapefile is essentially a copy of the source shapefile that after the conversion procedure will be utilized by PAVER The source shapefile will be stored on your computer within the following directory C EMS Program Files User Data Project Folder Your Project Folder is simply the name of whatever you named your project As an example if working on a database for the town of Fort Collins the Project Folder might be named FCollins Once the shapefile is converted the process is completed PAVER Shapfile Converter Select the source shapefile Destination of the converted Source C EMS Pr
329. ull extent of the window in which the graph 1s located From the zoomed graph window you can copy the graph to the clipboard to later paste into spreadsheets presentation programs or other Windows applications To return to the original window right click on the zoomed graph and select Unzoom Chapter 2 User Interface 19 Toolbar invokes a graph editor Graph Control that allows you to customize graph type and presentation For example you may change the graph type from a two dimensional bar graph to a three dimensional pie chart The Save Layout feature saves the current graph configuration so that on subsequent visits to the current graph it will retain the graph properties you specify using the Toolbar The final graph feature Print allows you to print your graph to a Windows printer Advanced Selectors provides several options for choosing the portion of inventory with which the user wants to work These selectors make moving from one part of the inventory to another quick and easy The selectors are accessed directly from the Selection Buttons on the main toolbar or by going into the Visual Menu and choosing Selectors Other parts of the program that require the user to specify a component of the inventory 1 e Network Branch Section respond to the input received from the selection tools There are five selector types Tree Tab GIS List and Tree GIS Tree Selector Since the inventory in
330. unt for each year Condition Tools Select Condition Types To make condition types available for use in PAVER they must be declared in this window Condition types will be classified as Numeric or Textual and you may declare Minimum and Maximum Values for Numeric Condition Types To make a condition available for use in choose yes in the Selected column If you would like to keep the condition data in the table for future use but do not wish to make it accessible a in the Selected field hides the condition from the program Define Condition And Age Categories The user may establish a set of categories for each condition available in PAVERTM The table for each set of condition categories consists of a name for the category i e Good Poor etc a high and low value to establish the range for the category and associated colors for each category to be used in the graph and GIS text The Age Categories tab is simply a table of age brackets by which you can group pavements These tables are used in the graphical display of condition information throughout Chapter 3 System Tables 36 Define Condition And Age Categories 10 0 Grey Dark Gray 25 0 Dark Red Brown 40 0 Red 55 0 Light Red Light Red 70 0 Yellow Y ellow 85 0 Green Green 100 0 Dark Green Green Def
331. untry USA EMail Address jsmith abc com Confirm EMail Address jsmith abc com Secondary EMail joe_smith abc com Phone 555 555 5555 Required Activate PAVER Online Cancel Manual Web Activation When Manual Web Activation is selected the following screen will open along with a webpage where required information needs to be entered The System ID information will be automatically populated You must obtain an activation key before you can proceed Please complete or edit the contact information on the web page provided Enter the Activation Key you receive below Activation Code Log In SerialNumber Be o d Please enter or update your contact information Agency Company Pavement Consultants Inc Contact Name Joe Smith City State Country EMail Address Joe Smith abc com Confirm EMail Address Joe Smith abc com Secondary EMail Phone Required SOLO Lite Version 1 23 Chapter 1 Overview Once required information is entered the Next button on the bottom of the webpage will be activated Click on the Next button to receive the activation number Enter the activation number on the Web Activation form Email Activation When activating PAVER via Email first enter the required information in the image below To activate your software via EMail please enter or update your contact information below Your c
332. urkhalter Abbas Butt Stephanie Carey Lindsey Cerda Meri Coburn Mercedes Crovetti Christina Eng Kieran Feighan Sam Franzen Jim Hall Lindsi Hammond John Heflin Kevin Hoene Rich Hoffman Heather Holden Kurt Keifer Charles Kemper Simon Kim Starr Kohn Ruth Lehmann Craig Louden Linda McCarthy Scott McDonald Ryan Meisel Amir Moid Jeff Morton Gary Nelson Dixon O Brien Mark Owens B J Park Mark Pitak Jay Rank Francine Rozanski David Sawahata Jeff Schmidt Judie Simpson Shauna Shepston Scott Strnad Carol Subick Chad Stock Bradley Vassau Chao Ming Wang Jeanette Walther Bill Welborn Greg Wilken Bob Wofford and Katie Zimmerman Additional thanks are expressed to University of Illinois faculty Sam Carpenter Tom Chen Mike Darter and Ahmed Sameh Special thanks are due to the team at Intelligent Information Technologies IIT for system design and programming Arthur Baskin Bill Nelson Mark Brown Robert Reinke Ben Hartmann and Doug Waterfield Thanks to the Ohio Department of Transportation Office of Aviation for allowing us to attach their Neil Armstrong and Mansfield databases as examples with the release of PAVERTM 6 Finally and on behalf of the entire PAVERTM group I would like express a special thanks in the memories of Don Brown US Air Force Chuck Calloway City of Reno Mike Flaherty US Army Starr Kohn coauthor of Pavement Condition Index John MacMullen APWA Charles McCarol US Air Force
333. ution Guide For Workshop 10 252 Workshop 11 Virtual 265 ObjectiV8s esee 265 BEREIT 265 cec 265 Hints and Solution Guide For Workshop 11 266 Workshop 12 Creation Of Condition Prediction Model 272 E 272 272 Hints amp Solution Guide For Workshop 12 eee eese 273 Workshop 13 Condition Analysis 277 Objective 277 277 Hints amp Solution Guide For Workshop 13 eee 278 Workshop 14 Work 281 Objective Database Workshop 15 Project 2 222 222 2 14 289 Sai 289 289 289 Workshop 1 Network Definition Objective Section a network into manageable branches and sections Database Use the maps on the following pages Tasks 1 Section pavement network s into named branches and sections
334. ve or copy under Source Then select the Destination for the inventory item you wish to move or copy Move relocates the item to the specified location while Copy leaves the original item in its location and places a copy in the specified destination The Move and Copy buttons remain gray until an acceptable combination of source and destination locations are chosen For example you cannot move a network into a section All data movement is restricted within the open database To move data items between databases the user will have to combine databases using Combine Subset Database described in Database Tools gt gt Combine Subset Database After two databases have been combined move or copy the data items and then split the database back into its original components The Copy and Move Data tool also allows the user to delete and rename items by highlighting the item and clicking Delete or Rename under the Source side The EMS Query Tool can eliminate any data the user does not want to view by the selection of Subset from the View box and then Select The Generate Selections and Respond to Selections checkboxes link the Copy and Move utility with the other selection tools For all components of PAVER that use inventory items Network Branch and Section there is one active selection Therefore the user can use the Copy and Move utility to generate selections in other inventory selectors or Copy and Move can be selected to respond to
335. ventative work where the pavements life is increased The Major checkbox allows to plan major M amp R work Work in this area includes any overlay or other major work where the resulting pavement has a PCI of 100 Below the Major M amp R checkbox 15 an option to specify the Start Date of the Major work a value within the specified plan length set on the Plan Setup tab Below and beside the Start Date are the checkboxes Calculate Major M amp R delay penalty and Show Major M amp R Backlog in interim Calculate Major M amp R delay penalty reports any delay costs associated with delaying the start date of Major M amp R over the length of the work plan Show Major M amp R Backlog in interim displays any remaining backlog between the years of calculation M amp R Plan Parameters Plan Setup Budget Categories l Families l Project Planning Categories Localized Stopgap Localized Preventive PCI lt Critical I PCI Critical Global Preventive Default lifetime credit years for preventive work a to be applied to models built without preventive Select which M amp R 7 Major policies to apply to Maior Start Date 5 2 m the M amp R Plan ied Major M amp R Delay Penalty Calculate for 1 years Penalty will be calculated for first 4 years of the plar View Existing Report Execute Close Tab 4 M amp R Families On this tab
336. w and click the Detailed Inspection Comments box Network INTERSTATE RESEARCH PARK Branch NEWMARK DRIVE Select Inventory Item window Section From NEWTON DRIVE INTERSTATE DRIVE e 1 Summary data at time of inspection Branch Use ROAD Section Surface Type Section True Area Section Length 13 Ft Section Width Inspection Date 7 23 1996 Edit Inspections _ Detailed Inspection Comments Calculate Conditions Create a new Sample Unit edit Sample Units inspection 2500 00 fort EN SUCRE Distress Type 01 ALLIGATOR CR 7 O6 DEPRESSION 11 PATCH UT CUT 16 SHOVING 02 BLEEDING C 07 EDGE CR 12 POLISHED AG 17 SLIPPAGE CR O3 BLOCK CR JT REF CR 13 POTHOLE 18 SWELL M O4 BUMPS SAGS 09 LANE SH DROP 14 RR CROSSING 19 RAVELING Remaining O5 CORRUGATION 15 RUTTING 20 WEATHERING Low Medium High 464 00 grt Samples Have No Distress Distress Description Severity Quantity Add Distress 1 ALLIGATOR M 464 Delete Distress 1 ALLIGATOR H 3 BLOCK CRACKING gt Replace Distress H 3 3 BLOCK CRACKING 4 i nt Next Sample Unit Smp Images 0 Insp Images D Close While the user can inspect each section in its entirety it 15 not practical to do so and it is acceptable to inspect only portions of a section PAVER utilizes sampling techniques
337. what budget and M amp R 1s necessary to achieve a user defined goal When selecting Determine Budget Requirements two options goals appear to choose from Condition Stabilization or Backlog Elimination in X amount of years When Condition Stabilization is chosen two more options appear The user must specify either Maintain current area weighted PCI or Reach area weighted PCI of X Along with these two options are the following Chapter 13 M amp R Plan A amp R Plan Parameters Constrain Budget Determine Budget Consequence One budget for all Localized Global Major Budget One budget for localized global one budget for Major Categories Determine Budget Requirements Iteration M amp R Families Project Planning Separate budgets for Localized Global Major fi OOK per Year Priority Table Apply Inflation Rate 2 Default Priority Table _Edit_ Scale Factor 100K per Year Edit Scale Factor 100K per Year Edit Scale Factor View Existing Report Execute 96 plan requirements Condition Tolerance and Maximum Number of Iterations to Achieve Goal Condition tolerance allows the desired goal to vary within the set tolerance while the number of iterations tells the program how many times to run to achieve the desired outcome Plan Parameters Plan Setup
338. wing screen will appear This screen summarizes what sections have been selected to survey Further revisions can be made by individually picking in the Selected column Chapter 15 Wizards 121 Field Data Image Inspection Export Review sections for export PD Selected Charle Select All Select None Cancel will close the wizard with no action taken Apply will execute the selected actions for the selected sections Cancel lt Back Apply After review select Next will place the named 170 file on the computers desktop with the associated name defined on screen shot 1 above Now all sections selected are ready to import into FieldInspector ImageInspector and ready for use in a pavement condition inspection survey The I70 file also contains a linked copy of the GIS shapefile that is associated with the main inventory liil Field Data Image Inspection Export Data written to the file Denver I70 on your desktop You now transfer it to the system containing the Field Data Inspection program There were 2 sections exported Fieldinspector Imagelnspector Data Import XML Version 6 5 includes a new method to import survey information into a database This import tool uses an XML file to import survey conditions at the frame sample or section level Using a specified XML format XML format defined in Appendix B includes a
339. wnloaded from PAVER cannot be deleted The user may calculate the PCI for a section by clicking Calc on any of the three tabs To see a detailed calculation of the PCI and Structural PCI select the Details checkbox before performing the calculation The calculated PCI and Structural PCI can also be seen on the Sections tab after calculations have been done Chapter 16 Add ins 130 Backup Inspection Data Once the inspection data has been collected using the handheld device the user must Backup the Inspection Data using the second tab from the Add ins menu After connecting the handheld device to the main computer using Microsoft Active Sync as before go to the Add ins menu and select Handheld Inspector Using the second tab Backup Inspection Data select the appropriate file to be backed up Once a name is selected click Backup to create the backup file The backed up files are automatically placed in the following directory EMS Program Files User Data of Current Open Database PI Backup Data Since the backup files are put in these locations it is important to be in the correct database when backing up files and importing files from the handheld device Inspections Using The Handheld PCI Inspector After data has been transferred to the handheld device field inspections may be carried out using the Handheld PCI Inspector program The Handheld PCI Inspector program is separated into three tabs Sections Samples Frames
340. y sections Calculate Condition View Virtual Inventory Assign Sections Set Properties Stored Criteria Available sections Delete P NeilArms 8 267A 8 26 Neil rms APRON A Network Neil rms APRON C Branch Section Show Subset Latest w Criteria for available sections bacs All available sections Latest NI t Latest In E E Latest Cc Clear All Clear Current Clear Current Tables Table Row Record Count Select Rows l Order Rows Field Comparison Compare To fuse 1 j z Runway zi zl View Text 267 m After the runway sections have been selected assign all of them to the virtual section by selecting the double right pointing arrows Virtual Inventory Management Virtual Inventory Name Neil Armstrong New Delete Rename Close Aggregation rule set Default Edit amp ggregation Rule Sets Virtual Section V5 Name Rw New Delete Rename View Virtual Inventory Assign Sections Set Properties Set Families Add sections Available sections Member sections by highlighting Sedenib Jein them and then Neil ms APRONZA NeitArms 78 2678 m Neil rmms 8 26 B cl
341. ype and quantity Comments related to project Date project started Proposed date to start project Proposal Id Project phase NDT1 DBF FWD Testing Summary Not imported into PAVER 4 0 Large group of pavements Usually Airport City Sub Division Identifier Medium grouping of pavements Usually runway taxiway apron street name Area of same pavement type This is the unit of pavement used for inspection rating methods Area tested Center Wheel Path Edge Loading Corner Etc Station number tested Date of testing Air temperature Test load in kilograms Maximum deflection in mils Load transfer in percent NDT type D Design A Average NDT2 DBF FWD Testing Detail Not imported into PAVER 4 0 Large group of pavements Usually Airport City Sub Division Identifier Medium grouping of pavements Usually runway taxiway apron street name Area of same pavement type This is the unit of pavement used for inspection rating methods Area tested Center Wheel Path Edge Loading Corner Etc Station number tested Date of testing Air temperature Test load in kilograms Sensor measured Sensor distance from load Sensor deflection in mils 152 Appendix E Example Pavement Survey Forms 1 1 eene ttt 154 Asphalt Surfaced Roads And Parking 10 5 156 AirfieldiConcretePaVelmient aceo itte eerte ene rt rette eene EN 157 AirtieldiAsphialt Paveme
342. ze the view of the GIS map L Chapter 14 GIS Tools The Center tool will zoom to the original view of the entire GIS map and will center the map on the screen To use the Center tool click Center The Pan tool allows the user to move the view of the GIS map while maintaining the current zoom factor To use the Pan tool click Pan and the mouse icon will become a double arrow Find the spot on the map you would like to move to and place the double arrow over it Click and hold down the left button on your mouse and move the double arrow to a new location and release The view window of the GIS map will move so that the point first selected is moved to the point of release The Pan tool will continue to be selected and may be used again until another tool is selected The Select Area tool allows you to determine the PAVERTM section identification of a section on GIS map without changing the assignment of the active area the current section or the association of an area to a section identification To operate the Select Area tool click Select Area and then click on any section of any color and the corresponding section will be highlighted in the tree menu The Select Area tool will continue to be active and may be used again until another tool is selected The Zoom Area tool allows the zoom factor of the GIS map to be changed and allows the user to zoom in on a specific area quickly To use the Zoom Area tool

U ser M anual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents